Skip to main content

Full text of "A grammar of the Hausa language"

See other formats


THE  LIBRARY 

OF 

THE  UNIVERSITY 
OF  CALIFORNIA 

LOS  ANGELES 


The  CELLAR  BOOK  SHOP 

Box  6,  College  Park  Sta. 

Detroit  21,  Mich.  -  U.S.  A. 


A  GRAMMAR  OF  THE    HAUSA 
LANGUAGE 


BY  THE  SAME  AUTHOR 


THE     LANGUAGES    OF    WEST    AFRICA. 

2  vols.     Demy  8vo.     Each  125.  6d.  net. 

A  linguistic  survey  of  about  three  hundred 
languages  and  dialects,  with  Classification  and 
inquiry  into  their  origin. 

THE  MENDE  LANGUAGE,  including  Gram- 
mar, Vocabularies,  Useful  Phrases,  and  Reading 
Exercises.  Crown  8vo.  75.  6d.  net. 

A  MENDE  NATURAL  HISTORY  VOCABU- 
LARY. A  description  of  the  Fauna  and  Flora 
of  the  District,  with  Notes.  Crown  8vo.  43.  6d. 
net. 


KEGAN  PAUL,  TRENCH,  TRUBNER  &  CO.,  LTD. 


A    GRAMMAR 


OF    THE 


HAUSA  LANGUAGE 


BY 

FREDERICK   WILLIAM    HUGH  jMIGEOD 

AUTHOR  OF  "THE  LANGUAGES  OF  WEST  AFRICA,"  "  THE  MENDE  LANGUAGE," 
AND  "  MENDE  NATURAL  HISTORY  VOCABULARY." 


LONDON 
KEGAN   PAUL,   TRENCH,  TRUBNER   &   CO.,   LTD. 

BROADWAY   HOUSE,    68-74   CARTER    LANE,    E.G. 
1914 


Library 

ft- 


PREFACE 

x\  THIS  Grammar  is  primarily  for  students  who  have  already 
acquired  some  knowledge  of  the  Hausa  language. 

In  its  compilation  the  Author  has  been  at  pains  to 
make  the  vocabulary  as  diversified  as  possible,  so  that 
there  are  few  words  in  common  use  that  have  not  been 
made  use  of. 

All  rules,  too,  have  been  fully  illustrated,  and,  as  re- 
gards such  as  have  only  been  slightly  noticed  by  other 
writers,  the  Author  has  for  preference  selected  sentences 
from  texts  to  which  all  students  of  the  language  have 
access.  In  this  way  the  existence  of  the  rules  themselves 
is  more  readily  recognised. 

The  origin  of  the  Hausa  language  is  not  inquired  into 
here,  and  etymologies  are  only  occasionally  examined. 
Both  of  these  subjects  were  discussed  by  the  Author  in 
his  recently-published  work,  "The  Languages  of  West 
Africa,"  and  a  repetition  seemed  somewhat  unnecessary. 

The  same  observation  applies  to  the  native  script, 
which  is  Arabic  slightly  modified.  It  would  have  been 


viii  PREFACE 

of  little  use  to  give  here  the  alphabet  alone,  unless  ac- 
companied by  instructions  for  its  use  and  by  literary 
specimens  with  transliterations,  translations,  and  critical 
notes;  and  to  treat  this  subject  adequately  a  great  deal 
of  space  would  be  required :  hence  its  entire  omission. 

The  proof-sheets  of  this  work  have  been  read  by  the 
Author's  brother,  Mr  Charles  Migeod,  2nd  class  Resident 
in  Northern  Nigeria. 


F.  W.  H.  MIGEOD. 


GOLD  COAST  COLONY, 
March  1914 


CONTENTS 


PAGE 

PREFACE  .  vii 


CHAPTER   I 
PHONETIC   NOTES 

Part  I. — ACCENT 
Penultimate — Ultimate — Antepenultimate — Movement  of       .         1 

Part  II. — INTERCHANGEABILITY  OF  LETTERS 
Consonants — Vowels — Omission  of  Syllables    ....        3 

CHAPTER  II 

NOUN 
Nature  of 9 

Part  I. — DERIVATION  OF  NOUNS 
Simple — Derived — Description  of  Classes  of  Derived        .        .        9 

Part  II. — GENDER 

Remarks  on  —  Exceptions  for  —  Gender  in  Neighbouring 
Languages — Common  Gender — List  of  Nouns  ending  in 
"a"  which  are  Masculine  .  .16 


x  CONTENTS 

PAGE 

Part  III. — NUMBER 

Methods  for  forming  Plural  —  Terminations  —  Plurals  of 
Simple  Nouns — of  Verbal  Nouns — of  Compound  Nouns 
— Nouns  without  Plural — Nouns  without  Singular— Use 
of  Singular  for  Plural — Plural  Forms  with  Singular 
Meaning  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  ..  .  *  .  20 

Part  IF".— CASE 

Remarks    on  —  Nominative    and    Accusative  —  Vocative  — 

Genitive — Dative — Ablative — Locative      .  44 


CHAPTER  III 

ADJECTIVE 

General  Remarks — Simple  Adjectives — Compound  Adjectives 
— Present  Participle — Past  Participle — Nouns  used  as 
Adjectives — Reduplication — Syntax — Predicative  Use — 
Circumlocution  to  avoid  Use  of  Adjectives — Comparison 
— Numerals  49 


CHAPTER  IV 
PRONOUN 

Personal — Relative — Demonstrative — Final  "n"  with  Nouns 
— Interrogative  —  Indefinite  —  Reflexive  —  Emphatic — 
Reciprocal .  .  .  .  .  .  .  ...  72 


CHAPTER  V 
VERB 

Part  I. — DERIVATION 
Description  of  Classes  of  Derived  Verbs    .....     101 


CONTENTS  xi 

PAGE 

Part  II. — DIVISION  OF  VERBS 
Transitive — Intransitive 116 

Part  III. — AUXILIARY  VERBS  119 

Part  IV. — CONJUGATION  OF  THE  VERB 

Remarks  on  —  Conjugation  —  Uses  of  the  Tenses  —  Passive 
Voice — Infinitive — Present  Participle — Past  Participle — 
Verbal  Adverbs — Use  of  Inverted  Personal  Pronoun — 
Impersonal  Verbs  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .125 

CHAPTER  VI 

ADVERBS 

Remarks  on — Adverbs  of  Place — Time — Manner — Affirmation 

and  Negation — Interrogation    .        .         .        .        .        .158 

CHAPTER  VII 

PREPOSITIONS 
Simple — Compound — Examples  of  Uses — Omission  of  .183 

CHAPTER  VIII 

CONJUNCTIONS 

Co-ordinating — Subordinating — Nouns  (with   Particles)  used 

in  Sense  of  Conjunctions — Examples  of  Uses     .        .        .     201 

CHAPTER  IX 

INTERJECTIONS  208 


CONTENTS 


CHAPTER  X 

SYNTAX 
THE  SUBJECT 

PAGE 

Nature  of — Examples — Simple — Compound     ....     210 

THE  PREDICATE 

Simple,    Nature   of    and    Examples  —  Compound  —  Special 

Notes  on 211 

THE  OBJECT 
Direct,  Nature  of,  and  Examples — Double — Indirect       .        .214 

NATURE  OF  SENTENCES 
Affirmative — Negative — Interrogative — Compound  .        .        .     216 

CHAPTER  XI 

COMMON   IDIOMATIC   EXPRESSIONS,   ETC. 

Salutations — Seasons,  Months,  Days,  Hours — Che — Chika — 
Chi — Da — Dama — Damre  — Dau  —  Kai  —  Kara — Maida 
— Sha — Sa — Samu — Saura — Yi — Examples  of  Circum- 
locution   219 

BIBLIOGRAPHY  .  229 


A    GRAMMAR    OF    THE 
HAUSA    LANGUAGE 


CHAPTER    I 
PHONETIC    NOTES 

PART  I 

ACCENT,  POSITION  OF 
PENULTIMATE 

The  stress  accent  is  as  a  general  rule  011  the  penultimate 
syllable. 

ULTIMATE 

1.  It  is  on   the   last   syllable   in   some  few  words,  as 
"  kadan,"  little. 

2.  In  nouns  taking  the  plural  termination  "ai." 

3.  In  verb  forms  ending  in  "a"  or  "o"  as  vowels  of 
direction. 

4.  When  final   "  s "   is  added  to  a  verb   for  "  voice " 
purposes,  as  "  zubas,"  from  "  zuba,"  to  pour. 

ANTEPENULTIMATE 

There  are  similarly  a  few  words  that  take  the  accent 
on  the  antepenultimate,  as — 

Magani     medicine  Takalmi     shoe  Taberma     mat 

A 


THE    HAUSA   LANGUAGE 


MOVEMENT  OF  ACCENT 

1.  When  an  objective  pronoun  follows  the  verb,  joined 
by  "  n,"  as  in  Present  tense  No.  I.,  it  takes  the  nature 
of  a  suffix  to  the  verb,  and  the  accent  is  shifted  to  the 
new  penultimate  syllable — 

Jna  dubansa         I  am  looking  at  him 

2.  When   a   word   is    reduplicated   the    accent   usually 
moves  to  the  last  syllable — 

Chiye-chiye     plural  of  infinitive  form  of  "  chi "  to  eat 
Maza-maza     quickly ;    but   if    not    emphasised    it    remains 
"  maza-maza  " 

In  reduplicated  colour  adjectives,  however,  the  accent 
does  not  move. 

3.  In   some   derived   nouns   the   accent  moves  towards 
the  suffix ;  in  not  a  few,  however,  it  remains  unaltered — • 

Sayowa         selling  from     saye         to  sell 

Jefawa          throwing  „         jefa          to  throw 

In   the   latter  the   final   vowel  is  long,  and   so  rather 
attracts  the  stress  accent. 

4.  In  some  plural  forms  the  accent  remains  on  the  same 
syllable  as  in  the  singular  form,  though  the  rule  is  that  it 
should  move  towards  the  suffix — 

Watani  months  from     wata 

Hanaye  hands  ,,        hanu 

Hanua  hands  „        hanu 

5.  If   "mai-"  is  prefixed   to   a   noun   or   verb,  it  still 
remains  an  accented  syllable,  and  so  the  word  it  is  prefixed 
to  does  not  change  its  accentuation — 

Maimagani  doctor  from  magani 

Maimagana  a  person  speaking  ,,  magana 

Maidoki  horseman  „  doki 

Maigaskia  man  of  truth  „  gaskia 


PHONETIC  NOTES  3 

PART  II 

1NTERCHANGEABILITY  OF  LETTERS 
CONSONANTS 

(1)  Variation  of  Consonants 
Some  variations  are  merely  local  peculiarities. 

L,  R,  T 

These  letters  are  interchangeable  in  Hausa,  for  phonetic 
reasons,  the  same  as  they  are  in  other  negro  languages. 

The  word  in  most  common  use  subject  to  this  variation 
is  the  preposition  "na,"  of.  In  the  feminine  gender  it  is 
"  ta,"  which  is  commonly  shortened  to  "  t,"  and  "  t " 
in  its  turn  may  become  "  1 "  or  "  r."  For  instance — 

Ya-t-malam,  Ya-1-malam,  Ya-r-malam,  the  mallam's 
daughter,"  are  all  equally  correct. 

Biar,  bial,  and  biat,  five,  are  all  heard. 

Halbi,  harbi,  to  shoot ;  •  and  in  Maiharabi  for  Maihalbi, 
shooter,  an  exaggeration  of  the  "  r "  sound  is  shown. 

This  emphasis  of  the  "  r  "  sound  is  also  found  in  con- 
nection with  the  preposition  "  of."  chiefly  if  not  entirely 
in  the  Hausa  spoken  in  the  more  northerly  parts.  It 
is  especially  found  after  a  long  "a."  For  instance — 

Mine  kamcriki  ?  What  caught  you  9 

Kameriki  =  kamarki  =  kamaki 

R,  S 

Saycr  saycs  sell 

.Saycruwa  saycsuwa  selling 

Arna  asna  heathen 

Ycr  yea  throw  away 

llasso  uk a  bar  so-uku  up  to  three  /////>• 

Zuchias?u  znohia-1-su  'heir  heart 


4  THE    HAUSA   LANGUAGE 

N  or  another  letter  for  S 

Benne  bisne  burial 

Muka  tarad  da  yaki     for     Muka  taras  da  yaki        We  joined  in  battle 

P  and  F 

Fashe          pashe  break 

Tafshi         tapshi  (also  tabshi,  taushi)         soft 

F  and  H  (H  is  Katsina  dialect). 

Fudu  hudu  four 

Funtu  huntu  naked  person 

Tali  tahi  go 

Bafellanchi  bahillachi  Fula 

T,  K,  R 

Tutut,  tutuk,  tutur,  tutu        for  ever 

N  and  M,  the  latter  before  a  labial. 

Kulun  kulum  always 

Em  bika  ?     for      En  bika  ?  Shall  I  folloiv  you  ? 

T,  Ch,  S 

Wotika,  wochika         wosika         letter 
Tasubi  chasubi       bead 

It  is  often  doubtful  whether  "ts"  or  "ch"  should  be 
written,  though  any  doubt  that  there  may  be  vanishes 
when  the  word  is  seen  written  in  Arabic  character. 

In  this  connection  it  should  be  noted  that  the  Arabic 
"ta"  or  "tsa"  is  often  written  in  Hausa  for  '  dal,"  and 
"  shin  "  for  "  cha." 

Gb  for  B 

A  very  few  words  admit  "gb  "  for  "  b,"  some  speakers 
sounding  the  "g"  where  others  do  not.  The  "gb"  is  a 
sound  of  pure  negro  origin — 

Gbache         bache         destroy 
Gboye          boye          hide 


PHONETIC  NOTES 


(2)    Vocalisation  of  Consonants 

In  some  parts  of  the  Hausa  country  two  consonants 
coming  together  are  readily  admitted.  Elsewhere,  especially 
nearer  other  negro  influences,  such  combinations  are  not 
much  found.  Two  alternatives  exist — either  to  insert  an 
intermediate  vowel  harmonising  with  the  other  vowels  in 
the  word,  or  to  vocalise  the  first  consonant  of  the  two. 
Nearer  Arabic  or  Berber  influences  the  harder  forms  are 
always  found,  but  a  negro  of  another  tribe  learning  Hausa 
invariably  uses  one  of  the  softer  forms. 

It  might  possibly  be  supposed  that  it  is  the  original 
form  of  the  word  which  has  the  intermediate  vowelj 
and  that  this  vowel  is  eliminated  to  make  the  harder 
form.  That  the  reverse  is  the  case  is  made  clear  by  the 
position  of  the  accent,  which  is  on  the  penultimate  in  the 
shorter  form  of  the  word,  and  remains  on  the  same  syllable, 
which  becomes  the  antepenultimate,  in  the  longer  form  of 
the  word. 

The  following  are  examples  of  the  two  processes — 


Sarki 
Ber 

sariki 
beri 

chief 
leave 

Duk 

duka 

all 

Girma 
Damre 

girima 
darime,  daure,  dore 

big 
bind 

Amre 
Samri,  samli 

aure 
sauri 

marry 
hasten 

Samri 
Kamna 
Takalma 

sauri 
kauna,  kona 
takoma 

young  man 
love 
shoe 

Zamna 

zona 

sit 

It  may  here  be  noted  that  syllables  ending  in  a  consonant 
occur  more  commonly  in  the  middle  of  a  word  than  at  the 
end,  the  tendency  being,  as  here  seen,  to  eliminate  or  soften 
them — 

Mafelfeohi  fans 

Sarki  (sariki)  chief 

Tutuk  (tutu)  for  ever 


6  THE    HAUSA    LANGUAGE 

(3)  Insertion  of  Semi-vowels  after  Consonants 

"  W  "  is  commonly  inserted  after  "  k  "  and  "  g  "  when 
followed  by  "  o  " — 

Akwoi  for     akoi  there  is 

Gwonda  gonda  pawpaw 

Kwoi  koi  egg 

Kwomi  (rare)  komi  everything 

Kwoiya  koiya  teach 

The  semi- vowel  "y"  may  be  introduced  after  "k"  and 
"g"  before  "i"  and  "  e."  This  usage  seems  due  to  the 
influence  of  other  negro  languages.  It  is  comparatively 
rare  in  the  purest  forms  of  Hausa,  if  the  more  northerly 
be  taken  as  such,  but  it  is  found  to  be  almost  invariably 
made  use  of  in  the  speech  of  negroes  of  tribes  to  the  south- 
west when  they  speak  Hausa.  This  is  especially  so  in  the 
Gold  Coast  Colony. 

Chauta,  kyauta  for  keauta  (written  kauta)  a  present 

Kyetu  ,,  ketu  flint 

Kyanwa  „  kenwa  cat 

Gyero  ,,  gero  corn 

Nevertheless  this  introduction  of  a  semi-vowel  plays  a 

very  considerable  part  in  the  formation  of  nouns  derived 

.  from  verbs  in  Hausa,  indicating  that  this  same  influence 

existed  long  ago,  even  if  there  has  been  an  interval  in  which 

it  has  ceased  to  operate. 

For  example,  when  the  root  of  a  word  ends  in  "  t,"  the 
final  vowel  being  "  a  "  or  "  o,"  and  for  some  grammatical 
reason  this  vowel  is  changed  to  "  e  "  or  "  i,"  a  "  y  "  sound 
creeps  in,  with  the  effect  of  adding  a  sibilation — 

Sata  sache  =  satye  steal 

Bata  bache  =  batye  destroy 

Kotanta         kotanche  =  kotantyi         compare 

This  is  very  clearly  seen  in  the  participles — 

Batache  =  batatye  destroyed 

Batachia  (f.)  =  batatyia 
But         Batatu  (plu.) 


PHONETIC  NOTES  7 

For  the  same  reason  are — 

Tarsa  tarshe=tarsye  help 

llaii.su         bahaushe  =  bahausye         Hausa 

Contraction  of  W  and    Y 

These  semi-vowels  are  often  elided  either  in  a  derived 
word  or  even  when  two  words  come  together,  the  latter 
applying  to  "  y."  It  is  often  doubtful  whether  it  is 
more  correct  to  write  them  or  to  omit  them.  It  must, 
however,  be  observed  that  their  insertion  seems  preferable 
in  some  words,  and  it  is  better  to  omit  them  in  others — 

Tafowa  =  tafoa  coming 

Tafiy  a  =  tafia  going 

Zanowa  =  zanoa  cloths 

Gaisuwa=gaisua  salutation 

Sunkai  =  sunka  yi  they  did 

The  appearance  of  "  w  "  or  "  y."  in  the  verbal  nouns 
depends  on  the  associated  vowels; — "a,"  "  o,"  "u" 
requiring  "  w  "  ;  "  i  "  requiring  "  y  "  ;  and  "  e  "  either. 
This  interchangeability  is  seen  in  "  na  wuni  "  =  "  na  yini," 
/  spend  the  day. 

VOWELS 
(1)    Variation  of    Vowels 

There  is  a  great  tendency  in  Hausa  to  use  short  vowels, 
and  many  words  are  pronounced  indifferently  with  long 
and  short  sounds. 

This  practice  may  be  possibly  due  to  the  former  existence 
of  closed  syllables  now  no  longer  recognisable.  That  they 
have  existed,  however,  may  be  seen  from  such  words  as 
"  tutuk,"  or  "  tutu,"  for  ever. 

A 

"  A  "  is  in  many  words  so  short  as  to  seem  also  "  e  " 
or  "  u." 


Teffi          fc 

r      tafi 

g0 

Serki 

sarki 

chief 

Dere 

.Seyesua 
Mini 

dare 
saycsua 

in.  mi 

night 
netting 
to  me 

Fudda 

t'.nl.i 

tell 

8  THE    HAUSA   LANGUAGE 

The  prefix  "  mai-  "  is  usually  pronounced  as  "  may  "  in 
English,  and  not  as  the  sound  in  the  word  "  might." 

A  and  0 
Waje=woje    side        Wani  =  woni    another       Wannan  =  wonan    this 

A  and    U 
Mamu  =  mumu         to  us  Maku  =  muku         to  you 

I  and    U 

Filani  (Hillani)  =  Fulani,  Fulas  Fukaf uke  =  fikafike      feather 

Rufe  =  riffe  call  Mutane  =  mittane         men 

(2)  Omission  of   Vowels 

Final  "  i "  is  the  one  most  commonly  elided.  This 
usually  takes  place  when  an  objective  pronoun  is  joined 
to  the  verb — 

Ban  san'shi  ba         Ba  na  sani  shi  ba         I  do  not  know  him 
Na  gan'sbi  Na  gani  shi  I  saw  him 

Ber'sbi  Beri  shi  Let  him 

The  first  personal  pronoun  "  ni  "  is  shortened  to  "  n  " 
in  "  zani"  — 

Zan'  for  Zani  /  will  go 

Other  elisions — 

Gareshi = garesa = garuss  towards  him 

Masa  =  muss  to  him 

Akasa  =  akass  on  the  ground 

Ya  manche  tagia  tass  He  forgot  his  hat 

Omission  of  Syllables 

There  are  found  both  long  and  short  forms  of  words. 
The  short  forms  are  usually  poetical — 

Dau,  do,  for  dauka  take  up* 


CHAPTER    II 
NOUN 

NOUNS  are  simple  and  derived.     They  have  gender  and 
number,  but  are  not  inflected  for  case. 

PART   I 

DERIVATION  OF  NOUNS 

Simple  nouns  are  those  of  which  the  origin  cannot  be 
traced  beyond  the  present  form — 

Gona  farm  karifi  strength 

Derivatives  are  such  nouns  as  can  be  traced  to  their 
primary  parts — 

Mai-gona        farmer  Mai-karifi         strong  man 

All  infinitives  may  be  used  substantively  without  change 
of  form — 

Kcdaya-n-sa  da  wuya  To  count  it  is  difficult  (lit.,  count- 

ing of  him  with  difficulty) 

Chi-n-sa  da  dadi  ft  is  nice  to  eat 

Fade-fade  ba  yi  ba  (proverb)  Talking  is  no  good 

Do-n-so,  ya  rasulu,  domi-n-so-          Because  of  love,  0  Prophet,  because 
n-fiyaye  of  love  of  God  (lit.,  Excellence) 

(For  further  examples  see  under  the  Verb  (Infinitive).) 

Derivation  of  nouns  takes  place  by  means  of  prefixes 
and  suffixes,  and  sometimes  by  means  of  both  together. 

9 


10  THE    HAUSA    LANGUAGE 

Derived  nouns  are  formed  in  the  following  ways  : — 
Concrete  nouns — 

1.  Noun  with  personal  particle  prefixed. 

2.  Noun  with  material  particle  prefixed. 

3.  Verb  with  personal  particle  prefixed. 

4.  Verb  with  material  particle  prefixed. 

Abstract  nouns — 

5.  Verb  with  prefix. 

6.  Noun  with  suffix. 

7.  Verb  or  adjective  with  suffix. 

Verbal  nouns — 

8.  With  suffix  or  unchanged. 

Concrete  nouns — 

9.  Feminine  nouns  derived  from  masculine  form. 

10.  Nouns  ending  in  "  ya." 

11.  Compound  nouns. 

12.  Adjective  used  as  noun. 

13.  Noun  phrases. 

Description  of  Classes  of  Derived  Nouns 

1 .  Concrete  nouns  formed  from  other  nouns  with  personal 
particle  prefixed. — There  are  four  particles  relating  to 
persons  :  "  ba,"  "  da,"  "  mai,"  "  ma." 

Ba 

"  Ba  "  means  inhabitant  of  a  country,  and  is  compounded 
with  place  names  for  the  most  part — 

Ba-haushe     Hausa  man         Ba-hausa     Hausa  woman 
Ba-kano          Kano  man  Bature          white  man 

(Further  examples  are  given  in  the  tables  of  plurals.) 

Da  ("  ya  "  feminine) 

"  Da,"  meaning  child,  is  compounded  with  place  names 
when  it  means  native  of.  With  other  nouns  it  acts  as 


NOUN  11 

a  diminutive.     Unlike  ';  ba,"  the  preposition  "  n,"  of,  is 
inserted  — 

Da-n-Kano       native  of  Kano         Da-n-birni         native  of  the  city 
Da-n-akwia      kid  Da-n-zunzua     a  little  bird 

Feminine. 
Ya-l-Kano    femal':  native  of  Kano,  daughter  of  Kano 

Also  in  some  idiomatic  cases. 
Da-n-zane     a  fragment  of  cloth         Da-n-bindiga     soldier 

Mai 
"  Mai  "  means  ovmer  of  or  doer,  and  expresses  the  agent, 


Mai-gona  owner  of  a  farm 

Mai-gaskia  a  man  of  truth,  or  one  speaking  the  truth 

Mai-wayo  a  cunning  person 

Mai-shi  the  owner  of  it  (shi  is  the  3rd  personal  pronoun) 

NOTE.  —  "  Mai  "   also  forms  adjectives  and  the  present  participle, 
which  see. 


Ma 

"  Ma  "  is  a  personal  particle  as  well  as  a  material  particle. 
It  has  a  similar  sense  to  "  mai,"  as  a  personal  particle, 
but  it  is  not  compounded  with  nouns  in  their  simple 
form — 

Mafauta,   butcher,  from    fauta,  slaughter,  itself  derived  from  fawa, 

to  slaughter 

Mafauchi,  butcher,  from  fawa  (fauchi  is  not  found) 
Makaranchi,  scholar,  from  karanta,  to  read  (karanchi  is  not  found) 

2.  Concrete  nouns  with  material  particle  prefixed. — There 
is  only  one  prefix,  "  ma-." 

As  in  the  preceding  class,  it  is  prefixed,  not  to  the  pure 
noun  form,  but  to  a  derived  form — 

Matsorachi,  cowardice,  from  tsorachi,  which  is  a  derivation  of  tsoro, 

to  fear,  but  is  not  found  alone 
Mafauta,  place  of  slaughter,  from  fauta,  slaughter. 


12 


THE    HAUSA    LANGUAGE 


3.  Concrete  nouns  formed  from  a  verb  with  a  personal 
particle  prefixed. — These  particles  are  "  mai  "  and  "  ma" — 


Maihalbi 
Maikoiyo 
Mai-aski 
Mai-giri-baba 


marksmen,  hunter 

learner 

one  that  shaves 

she  of  the  big  eyebrows 

Ma 


from 


halbi  to  shoot 
koiyo  to  learn 
aski  to  shave 


The  final  vowel  is  "  i  "  generally — 


Makami  one  that  catches 

Makiyi  hater 

Makoiyi  teacher 

Makeri  blacksmith 

Maso  one  that  loves 

Makiayi  herdsman 

Makiaji  one  who  refuses  to  hear 


from     kama     to  catch 


ki 

koiya 

kira 

so 

kiwo 

ki 


to  hate 

to  teach 

to  forge 

to  love,  to  want 

to  tend  cattle 

to  refuse,  ji  to  hear 


4.  Concrete  nouns  formed  from  verb  wiih  material  particle 
prefixed. — These  are  the  particle  "  ma,"  and  also  the  nouns 
"  abu,"  thing,  and  "  wuri,"  place. 


Ma 
The  final  vowel  of  the  verb  changes  to  "  i " — 


Madafi 

Madubi 

Makami 

Mashidi 

Mazamni 


kitchen 

looking-glass 

trap 

halting-place 

seat 


from 


dafa 

duba 

kama 

shida 

zamna 


to  cook 

to  look  at 

to  catch 

alight,  to  encamp 

to  sit  down 


Abu,  Thing 

The  preposition  "  n,"  of,  enters  into  the  composition 
of  the  word,  and  "  abu  "  usually  takes  the  form  "  obi," 
which  is  never  found  alone — 


Abi-n-chi 
Abi-n-sha 
Abin-mamaki  or 
Abu-n-mamaki 
Abin-sara 
Abin-tsoro 
Abin-worigi 

food 
drink 
a  wonder,  miracle 

accusation 
a  thing  to  fear 
plaything 

from 


chi 
sha 

raamaki 

sara 
tsoro 
worigi 


to  eat 

to  drink 

a   marvel    (is 

a  noun) 
to  accuse 
to  fear 
play  (a  noun) 


NOUN 


13 


Wuri,  Place. 
This  prefix  also  requires  the  preposition  "  of 


Wuri-n-kwana 

Wuri-n-kiwo 

Wuri-n-rubutu 

Wuri-n-sabka 

Wuri-n-shida 


sleeping-place 

pasture 

writing-place 

halting-place 

halting-place 


from 


kwana 

kiwo 

rubutu 


shida 


to  sleep 
to  feed  cattle 
to  write 
to  alight 

to  alight,  (i.e.,  from 
horse  or  camel) 


5.   Abstract  nouns  formed  from  verbs  with  prefix  "  ma-." — 
The  final  vowel  becomes  "  i  " — 


Makari 
Mabani 
Mafari 


end 

hindrance 

beginning 


from 


kare 
hana 
fara 


to  finish 
to  hinder 
to  begin 


6.   Abstract  nouns  can  be  formed  from  concrete  simple 
nouns  with  the  suffixes — 

-chi  (m.)  and  -ta  (f.) 
-n-chi  (m.)     -n-taka  (f.)  "  n  "  being  the  preposition  of 


"  -N-chi 
origin — 

Bauchi 


is  of  Kano  origin  and  "  -n-taka  "  of  Sokoto 


bauta 

kauta 

kariata 

makafta 

wauta 

sarauta 


-chi  (m.)  and  -ta  (f.) 

slavery  from  bawa 

present  beauty ,       keao 


lying 
blindness 
folly 
kingdom 


karia 
makafo 
wawa 
sariki 


slave 

beauty 

lie 

blind  man 

fool 

king 


-n-chi  (m.)  -n-taka  (f.) 

Bakunchi 

bakuntaka 

strangeness 

bnko 

stranger 

Baranchi 

barantaka 

service 

bara 

servant 

Daianchi 

daiantaka 

singleness 

daia 

one 

Diyanchi  or 

diyantaka 

freedom 

diya 

free  person, 

diyauchi 

offspring 

Gadonchi 

gadontaka 

inheritance 

gado 

inheritance 

(abstract) 

(concrete) 

Malanchi 

raalantaka 

priestcraft 

malam 

priest 

Raganchi 

ragantaka 

laziness 

rago 

idler 

Sarkanchi 

sarkantaka 

kingship 

sariki 

king 

Tsiranchi 

tsirantaka 

safety,  salvation 

tsira 

save 

Ubanchi 

ubantaka 

fatherhood 

uba 

father 

14 


THE    HAUSA    LANGUAGE 


Yaranchi 
Yawanchi 
Zarumchi 

Fulanchi 

Hausanchi 

Turanchi 


yarantaka 

yawantaka 

zarumtaka 


youth  (abstract) 

multiplicity 

bravery 

what  belongs  to 

the  Fula 
what  belongs  to 

the  Hausa 
what  belongs  to 

the  white  man 


yaro 

yawa 

zarumi 


boy 
many 
brave  man, 


or  zarmi  body-guard 
Fula          Fula 

Hausa       Hausa 


ture 


the      white 
man's  country 


7.    Abstract  nouns  formed  from  a  verb  or  adjective  with 
suffix. — The  suffixes  are  "  -chi  "  and  "  -ta." 

-chi  (m.) 

This  is  never  added  to  a  verb  alone.     The  prefix  "  ma- ' 
is  added  as  well.     Some  of  these  words  have  a  concrete 
as  well  as  an  abstract  meaning — 


Maaikachi 
Mafauchi 
Marokachi 
Marowachi 

Matsorachi 


labour  and  labourer  aiki 

slaughtering  and  butcher  fawa 

begging  and  beggar  roko 

greediness  rowa 


cowardice 

-ta  (f.) 

Chiwuta  sickness  chiwo 

Gajerta  shortness  gajere 

Kasamta  uncleanness  kasami 

Kuturta  leprosy  kuturu 

Mugunta  evil  mugu 


work  (n.  and  v.) 
to  slaughter 
to  beg 
to  be  greedy  and 

covetousness 
fear  (n.  and  v.) 


sick  (n.  and  v.) 

short 

unclean 

to  be  leprous 

bad 


8.  Verbal  nouns  are  formed  with  the  suffix  "  -wa." a 
Many  verbs  do  not  take  this  suffix,  but  the  infinitive  is 
used  with  the  same  sense.  Verb  forms  ending  in  "  -da;" 
for  instance,  do  not  admit  of  it. 

A  few  nouns  in  this  list  have  practically  a  concrete 
sense.  Their  gender  is  feminine — 


Baiwa 

giving,  gift 

ba 

to  give 

Chewa 

saying 

che 

to  say 

Dubawa 

looking 

duba 

to  look  at 

Fitowa 

coming  out 

fito 

to  come  out 

1  See  also  under  Derived  Verbs,  class  8,  and  Present  Participle. 


NOUN 


15 


Gamuwa 

meeting 

Gaisua 

saluting,  salutation 

Kaiwa 

bringing  (a  present 

to  a  chief) 

Kamuwa 

catching 

Karewa 

ending 

Koiyawa     1 
Koiyasuwaj 

\  teaching 

Lalachewa 

idling,  idleness 

Mutuwa 

dying,  death 

Rabuwa 

separating 

Rantsuwa 

swearing,  oath 

Tafia 

travelling 

Tareya 

assembling 

Tsirawa 

saving 

Tadowa 

raising 

gamu 

to  meet 

gaishe 

to  salute 

kai 

to  bring 

kamu 

to  catch 

kare 

to  finish 

koiya 

to  teach 

lalache 

to  be  idle 

mutu 

to  die 

rabo 

to  separate 

rantse 

to  swear 

tafi 

to  go 

tara 

to  assemble 

tsira 

to  scwe 

tada 

to  raise 

(For  other  examples,  see  under  plural.) 

It  will  be  noticed  that  for  translation  into  English  the 
present  participial  construction  is  used. 

The  verb  form  in  "  -as  "  also  admits  of  this  suffix — 


Tayesuwa 
Fitasuwa 


helping  taycs  (taya) 

coming  out       fitas  (fita) 


to  help 

to  come  out 


9.  A  few  nouns  with  a  feminine  meaning  are  derived  from 
the  masculine  by  some  slight  modification  of  the  word, 
together  with  the  addition  of  "  a  "  as  the  terminal  vowel. 

Kane  younger  brother  kanua  younger  sister 

Da  son  dia  daughter 

Sariki  king  saraunia  king's  wife 

Yaro  boy  yarinia  girl 

(For  other  examples,  see  under  gender.) 

10.  "  -Ya  "  is  suffixed  to  a  few  verbs  to  make  concrete 
nouns — 

Kaya  (m.)       load  kai          to  bring 

Mashaya         drinking -place         sha         to  drink 

11.  There  are  no  real  compound  nouns  in  the  Hausa 
language,  but  two  nouns  may  be  joined  by  the  preposition 
"of"— 

Kada-n-gari         lizard  (lit.,  crocodile  of  the  town) 
Ka-n-duki  upper  room  (lit.,  head  of  room) 

Rua-n-sha  drinking-water 


16  THE    HAUSA    LANGUAGE 

12.  An  adjective  may  be  used  as  a  noun. 

Ko  gida-n-sariki  ko  na  talaka      Whether  the  house  of  a  chief  or  of  a 

poor  man 

13.  Noun  phrases  or  noun  sentences, — These  are  mostly 
found  in  proverbs— 

Hauka-1-ba-ni  magani-n-ta:  (For)  the  madness  of  "give  me," 

Ungo  the  remedy  is :  "  take  it  " 

Yao  da  gobe  ke  sa  gini-  "  To-day  and  to-morrow "  is  likt 

n-rijia  da  alura  having  a  well  dug  with  a  needle 

Magani-n-kada  aji,  kada  The  remedy  for  "  let  it  not  be 

ayi  heard  "  is  "  don't  do  it  " 

Also  Ya  tafo  wurina  do-n-gaishe-ni    He  came  to  salute  me 


PART  II 
GENDER 

Gender  is  grammatical.  It  is  divided  into  masculine 
and  feminine,  and  there  is  no  neuter.  The  names  of  males 
are  all  masculine,  and  of  females  all  feminine.  The  names 
of  things  and  abstractions  are  either  masculine  or  feminine 
according  to  their  termination,  the  same  applying  to  verbs 
when  used  in  a  noun  form.  A  noun  cannot  be  feminine 
except  it  ends  in  "a." 

Nouns  ending  in  "  e,"  "  i,"  "  o,"  "  u,"  and  consonants 
are  with  the  few  exceptions  of  nouns  representing  the 
female  sex,  masculine. 

Those  ending  in  "  a "  are  feminine,  excepting  those 
which  represent  the  male  sex  and  a  few  others. 

The  gender  of  each  noun  is  given  later  under  the  plural. 

Gender  could  be  ignored  as  having  a  separate  existence 
in  a  language  if  there  were  not  other  words,  such  as  adjec- 
tives and  pronouns,  modified  to  agree  with  the  noun 
according  to  the  idea  it  represents.  This  is  strictly  so 
as  regards  plural,  for,  as  will  be  seen  in  the  chapter  on  the 
adjective,  no  distinction  of  gender  is  made  in  a  noun  when 
in  the  plural  number.  For  instance — 

Mutum  nagari  good  man    mache  tagari          good  woman 

Mutane  nagargaru     good  men     mata  nagargaru     good  women 


NOUN  17 

Exceptions  for  Gender 

Although  there  is  a  gender  to  every  noun,  and  nouns 
ending  in  "  a  "  are  assigned  to  the  feminine  gender,  there 
is  a  great  tendency  to  classify  as  masculine  many  nouns 
ending  in  "  a  "  which  are  not  the  names  of  human  beings 
or  animals.  This  is  especially  common  with  those  nouns 
which  are  used  for  prepositions,  and  is  usually  put  down 
to  carelessness  in  speaking.  It  is,  however,  a  debatable 
point  whether  carelessness  is  possible  to  any  appreciable 
extent  with  the  mother  tongue.  It  certainly  exists  with 
the  written  language,  but  the  written  form  of  a  language 
always  differs  from  the  spoken  form.  The  latter  is  the 
mother  tongue,  and  it  is  learnt  naturally  much  the  same 
as  the  other  functions  of  life,  and  accordingly  varies  but 
little  from  century  to  century  unless  subjected  to  some 
strong  foreign  influence. 

It  may  therefore  be  taken  that  the  apparent  mistakes 
in  gender  are  in  reality  idioms  of  the  language  which  admit 
of  perfect  explanation,  and  their  existence  may  be  in 
accordance  with  a  more  influential  rule  of  the  language. 

Seeing  that  it  is  by  the  adjuncts  alone  that  the  gender 
of  a  noun  can  be  ascertained,  the  use  of  the  masculine 
form  for  the  feminine  naturally  requires  some  explanation, 
and  it  is  in  connection  with  the  preposition  "  of  "  ("  na," 
"n"  for  masculine,  and  "  ta,"  "  t,"  "1,"  "  r,"  "t"  for 
feminine)  that  the  greatest  uncertainties  are  found.  This 
preposition  as  a  copula,  it  may  here  be  stated,  plays  a 
very  important  part  in  the  structure  of  sentences. 

The  reason  for  the  apparent  exceptions  that  are  found 
can  only  be  ascribed  to  the  more  exigent  rules  of  euphony. 
It  is  a  common  feature  in  some  languages  for  words  in  a 
series  to  be  made  to  agree  with  each  other  either  in  an 
initial  syllable  or  in  some  other  way.  In  Hausa  itself  this 
is  found  in  the  pronouns,  in  which  "  mini  "  is  found  for 
"  mani,"  "  mumu  "  for  "  mamu,"  etc.  ;  and  grammatical 
gender  is  probably  largely  assignable  to  the  same  reason.1 

When,  therefore,  apparent  mistakes  in  gender  are  made, 
they  must  be  put  down  to  a  rule  of  euphony  over-riding  a 
rule  of  grammatical  gender,  the  latter  being  but  the  offspring 
of  the  former. 

1  #ee  Languages  of  West  Africa — chapter  on  Gender 

B 


18  THE    HAUSA    LANGUAGE 

Gentler  in  Neighbouring  Language.* 

Hausa  together  with  a  few  languages  to  the  south  and 
east  of  it  are  the  only  ones  in  West  Africa  which  indicate 
masculine  and  feminine  gender.  In  Hausa  gender  is 
further  developed  than  in  Angas  and  Bolanchi — to  mention 
only  two  of  these  languages — and  so  far  as  is  at  present 
known  the  latter  only  distinguish  it  in  the  pronouns,  and 
not  in  the  adjective  as  in  Hausa.  To  such  an  extent  is 
the  gender  idea  developed  in  Hausa  that  adjectives,  pro- 
nouns, verbs,  and  prepositions  are  all  under  its  influence. 

A  great  many  other  languages  in  West  Africa  have  a 
neuter  gender,  Avhich  distinguishes  things  from  persons 
effected  by  means  of  the  3rd  personal  pronoun  singular, 
but  they  do  not  in  any  way  recognise  masculine  and 
feminine  gender.  Hausa  with  its  neighbouring  languages 
form,  therefore,  a  little  group  by  themselves  as  regards 
gender. 

The  sex  of  living  things  is  distinguished  in  three  ways : — 
1.  By  different  words  for  male  and  female — 


Uba 

father 

uwa 

mother 

Uba-n-gi  ji 

master 

uwa-1-gida  or 

mistress  of  the  house 

uworigida 

Miji 

husband 

mata 

wife 

Mutum 

man 

mache 

woman 

Namiji 

male 

tamata 

female 

Ango 

bridegroom 

amaria 

bride 

Sarmayi 

youth 

budurua 

virgin 

Wa 

elder  brother 

ya  or  iya 

elder  sister 

Bunsuru 

he-goat 

akwia 

she-goat 

Rago 

ram 

tumkia 

ewe 

ToroJ 

male  elephant 

giwa 

female  elephant 

Doki 

horse 

godia 

mare 

Rakumi 

camel 

tagua 

female  camel 

Zakara 

cock 

kaza 

hen 

(Other  examples  will  be  seen  in  the  tables  of  plurals.) 
2.  By  adding  words  representing  male  or  female — 
Da-n-gari  townsman  ya-1-gari         townswoman 

Da-n-uwa  brother  ya-l-uwa         sister 

Zakara-zabi          male  guinea-fowl         zabua  female  guinea-fowl 

NOTE.  — "  Zabi "    is   apparently   the   plural  form  of  the   word 
"  zabua."    As  the  common  form  of  many  animals,  birds,  etc., 


NOUN 


19 


is  the  feminine  form,  it  is  to  this  that  the  word  "  male " 
("  na-miji ")  is  added  when  it  is  necessary  to  indicate 
the  sex.  For  birds  "  zakara,"  cock,  is  more  generally 
used, 

3.  The  feminine  may  be  formed  from  the  masculine  by 
a  different  termination  to  the  same  root.  The  masculine 
may  end  in  any  vowel,  but  the  characteristic  termination 
of  the  feminine  is  "  a  "  in  the  syllable  "  ia,"  "  ania," 
"  nia,"  or  "  unia,"  as — 


Anabi 
Ba-fulache 

prophet 
Fula  man 

anabia 
ba-fulata 

prophetess 
Fula  woman 

Ba-haushe 

Hausa  man 

ba-hausa 

Hausa  woman 

Ba-ture 

white  man 

ba-turia 

white  woman 

Bara 
Barao 
Bawa 
Da 

servant 
thief 
slave 
son  or  free- 

barania 
baraunia 
bauya  or  baiwa 
diya 

female  servant 
female  thief 
female  slave 
daughter  or  free- 

man 

woman 

Gobro 
Jariri 
Kane 

Mayi 

bachelor 
infant  boy 
younger  brother 
wizard 

gobrua 
jariria 
kanua 
mayia 

spinster 
infant  girl 
younger  sister 
witch 

Mafauchi 

butcher 

mafauchia 

female  butcher 

(See  further  under  derived  nouns,  supra.) 


Sariki 
Tsofo 
Yaro 

Alfadari 
Babe 
Gado 
Rare 
Maraki  \ 
Marcki  / 
Sa 
San 

Safe 


chief,  king 
old  man 

saraunia 
tsofua 

boy 

yarinia 

mule 

alfadara 

locust 

babania 

hog 
dog 

gadonia 
kariya 

calf 

maraka 

butt 

sania 

young  horse 

safia 

morning 


safia 


king's  wife 
old  woman 
girl 

female  mule 
female  locust 
sow 
bitch 

female  calf 

cow 
young  mare 

morning 


To  these  may  be  added  a  number  of  abstract  nouns, 
which,  if  formed  with  the  termination  "  -n-chi "  (K)  are 
masculine,  but  if  with  the  termination  "  n-taka "  (S) 
are  feminine — 

Yaranchi  yarantaka  youth 

(See  list  of  derived  nouns  in  Part  I.) 


20  THE    HAUSA   LANGUAGE 

Common  Gender 

Some  nouns  relating  to  persons  are  of  both  genders. 
These  include  most  nouns  formed  with  the  prefix  "  mai-," 
as — 

Mai-aiki     worker         Mai-karia     liar       Mai-gaskia        speaker  of  the 

truth 

Others  with  the  prefix  "  mai-  "  so  exclusively  represent 
the  duties  of  men  that  they  can  only  be  of  the  masculine 
gender,  as — 
Mai-yaki     warrior  mai-gona    farmer  mai-doki     horseman 

It  is  to  be  noted  that  nouns  with  the  prefix  "  mai-  "  are 
unchanged  for  gender,  but  those  with  the  equivalent 
prefix  "  ma-  "  take  a  gender  termination. 

List  of  Some  Nouns  ending  in"  a"  which  are  Masculine 

(Names  of  human  beings  and  animals   of  the  male  sex 

are  not  included). 

Baba1 

Baka 

Baya2 

Bisa2 

Gaba2 

Gida 

Guga 

Igia 

Kama2 

Kasa 

Kaya 

Kusa 

Kwaya 


greatness 

Magana2 

speech 

bow 

Nama 

flesh 

back 

Rana 

day  (m.  and  f.)  3 

top 

Rijia  * 

well 

front 

Rua 

water 

house 

Suna 

name 

bucket 

Taberma 

mat 

rope 

Tsaka  2 

middle 

likeness 

Tsofa 

old  age 

ground 

Wata 

moon  and  month 

load 

Yawa 

crowd 

nearness 

Zuma 

honey 

ear  of  grain 

(See  further 

under  plural  forms.) 

PART  III 

NUMBER 

There  are  two  numbers  in  Hausa — the   singular  and 
plural.     The  plural  is  formed  in  a  great  variety  of  ways, 

1  Commonly  used  as  an  adjective. 

2  These  nouns,  though  commonly  masculine,  are  also  met  with  in 
the  feminine  gender.     When    used   as  prepositions  the   masculine 
gender  is  commonly  preferred. 

8  Rana=«ttw  is  fern. 


NOUN  21 

and  is  extraordinarily  rich  in  forms.  Many  nouns  have 
as  many  as  four  plural  forms.  Most  of  these  forms  were 
originally,  no  doubt,  of  dialectic  origin,  but  with  the  spread 
of  the  Hausa  language  as  a  lingua  franca  they  have  come 
to  be  used  indiscriminately  or  so  as  to  suit  the  harmony 
of  the  sentence.  Some  are  more  commonly  used  than 
others,  and  it  is  possible  that  there  are  slight  distinctions 
of  meaning,  which  are  now  quite  disregarded,  or,  at 
all  events,  rarely  paid  any  attention  to.  Among  such 
possible  distinctions  are  the  definite  as  against  the  indefinite 
state,  a  collective  sense  as  against  one  that  preserves  the  dis- 
tinctions of  the  individuals,  or  duality  as  against  plurality. 

In  the  present  state  of  knowledge  no  etymology  offers 
itself  for  any  of  these  plural  suffixes. 

The  plural  in  any  language  has  probably  originated  in 
one  of  the  following  three  methods  l  which,  however,  often 
become  greatly  corrupted,  and  when  adopted  into  another 
language  cease  to  be  recognisable — 

1.  Reduplication. 

2.  Addition  of  an  adjective  meaning  "  many  "  or  "  all." 

3.  Addition  of  the  word  "  they  "  or  "  them." 

1 .  The  first  method  is  found  in  Hausa  both  in  its  purity 
and  also  modified.  When  modified  the  last  syllable  of  the 
word  is  duplicated,  and  some  change  is  also  made  in  the 
final  vowel,  as — 

Iri-iri  from     iri  kind,  sort 

Hainyaiyai  hainya         road 


Dakunkuna 

Hakukua 

Takardodi 

Kofofi 

Yasosi 


daki  hut,  room 

haki  grass 

takarda  paper 

kofa  door 

yasa  finger 


The  reduplication  of  the  last  syllable  takes  the  forms 
"(b)obi,"  "(d)odi,"  «(f)ofi,"  "(g)ogi,"  «(k)oki"  «(s)osi," 
"(t)oti"  or  "(t)oshi,"  "  (w)owi,"  "  (y)oyi,"  etc. 

All  these  terminations  must  in  reality  be  regarded  as 
one  alone,  for  the  last  consonant  in  the  word — that  is,  the 
one  in  the  appended  termination — is  made  to  agree  with 
the  last  consonant  in  the  stem.  This  adaptation  rather 
recalls  what  is  not  dissimilar  in  Wolof  and  Temne,  the 

1  See  the  languages  of  West  Africa — chapter  on  Plural. 


22  THE    HAUSA    LANGUAGE 

article  in  those  languages  being  made  to  agree  consonantly 
with  the  radical  consonant  in  the  noun ;  and  a  similar  har- 
monisation  also  exists  in  the  Ba-Ntu  languages. 

2.  As  regards  the  second  method,  there  is  not  a  single 
one  of  the  many  terminations  that  can  be  connected  with 
such  words  as  "  many  "  or  "all." 

3.  As  regards  the  third,  the  same  may  be  said,  though 
this    method  is  found  in  Angas.      On  the    other  hand, 
in  Bolanchi,  a  language  similarly  related   to  Hausa,  the 
plural  forms  are  as  varied  almost  as  they  are  in  Hausa. 

The  Terminations 

The  commonest  plural  termination  is  "  ai,"  which  is 
substituted  for  the  last  vowel  of  the  noun,  as  "  haske," 
"  haskai,"  light. 

Almost  all,  if  not  entirely  all,  nouns  taking  this  ter- 
mination can  take  also  the  termination  "  (-)o(-)i,"  the  last 
consonant'  of  the  noun  which  stands  before  "  o  "  standing 
also  between  "  o  "  and  ''  i,"  as  "  haske,"  "  haskoki." 

Further,  these  same  nouns  can  probably  all  take  the  ter- 
mination "  una,"  the  last  vowel  of  the  noun  being  changed 
to  "  u." 

Other  terminations  are  "  ni  "  and  "  ki,"  usually  added 
to  nouns  ending  in  "a,"  as — 

wata  watani  month 

rana  ranaki  day 

kwana         kwanaki         day  of  twenty-four  hours 

Nouns  ending  in  "  a "  will  often  change  "  a "  into 
"  u,"  as— 

takarda      takardu          paper 
fitila  fitilu  lamp 

Some  nouns  add  "  aye  "  or  "  aje,"  changing  the  final 
vowel  to  "  a  "  if  necessary,  as — 

Sana  sunaye  name 

Gida  gidaje  house 

Hanu  nanaye  hand 

Kifi  kifaye  fish 

The  foregoing  are  the  commonest  ways  of  forming  the 
plural  number,  but,  as  can  be  seen  in  the  following  lists, 


NOUN  23 

there  are  a  great  many  other  methods,  and  some  nouns 
may  have  several  different  forms. 


Use  of  Plural  Terminations. 


TERMINATION    TO 
UNBROKEN    STEM 

ai 

una 

(-)o(-)i 

ki 

wa 

u 

Jc 
ye 


INANIMATE    THINGS 
AND  ABSTRACT  NOUNS 


common 

used 

used 

not  used 

used 

used 

very  rare 


common 
common 
common 
not  used 
not  used 
common 
rare 


found  more  frequently  than  '•  je"  but  not  so 

commonly  used  as  other  terminations 
ni  used  used  used 

Other   plural   terminations    occasionally   met   with    are 
a,"  and  "  i,"  and  other  variations. 


Accent 

ai     the  accent  falls  on  ai — last  syllable 

una  „  u   as   a   rule,   but   sometimes   on  the   ante- 

penultimate syllable 


SIMPLE   NOUNS — PLURAL 

(The  form  in  common  use  is  marked  with  an  asterisk.) 
Persons — Common  Formation 


MASC. 

Aboki 

Alkali 
Almajiri 
Ango 
Barao 

Dogari 
Fasiki 


FEM. 

AI 

•O-I 

abukia 
aimajira 

abokai 
abokai 
alkalai 
almajirai 

abukiyoyi 

baraunia 
fasika 

barai  and 
barayi 
dogarai 
fasikai 

anguna 


friend 

friend 

judge 

disciple 

bridegroom 

thief 

soldier 
2>rojligale 


24 


THE    HAUSA   LANGUAGE 


MASC. 

FEM.                    AI                     -O-I                   UNA              ENGLISH 

Jagaba 

jagabai 

guide 

Jariri 

jarirai 

baby 

Galadima 

galadimai 

minister 

Hakimi 

hakimai 

governor, 

ruler 

Jika 

jikata                               jikoki 

grandchild 

Kafira 

kafirai  and 

heathen 

kafirawa 

Kane 

kanua          kanai           kanoni  and 

young 

kanena 

brother, 

young 

4 

sister 

kwuyanga  kuyangai 

female  slave. 

kwiyanga 

In     plural 

applied  to 

both  sexes 

Kisbia 

kishiyoyi 

rival  wife 

Kuruma 

kurumai 

deaf  person 

Munafiki 

munafikai 

hypocrite 

Musulmi 

musulmai 

Moslem 

Shagiri 

shagirai 

beardless 

person 

Sbaida 

shaidai         shaidodi      shaiduna    witness 

and  shaidu 

Turdi 

turdodi  and 

snake 

turdawa 

charmer 

Zabiya 

zabiyoyi 

musician 

Zabiya 

zabiyoyi 

albino, 

species 

of  date 

Zarumi 

zarumai 

bodyguard, 

brave  man 

Zuma   or 

zumuna     friend 

zumu 

Ki 

Not  used 

Wa 

Anabi 

anabawa 

prophet 

Kafiri 

kafirai                           kafirawa 

heathen 

Majusi 

majusawa 

magician 

Madugu 
Turdi 

raadugawa 
turdodi         turdawa 

chief  of  a  caravan 
snake  charmer 

Mafada 

mafadawa 

counsellor 

See  also  nouns  with  prefix  "  ba-  ' 

• 

NOUN 

25 

U 

MASCi                        FEM. 

PLUEALS 

ENGLISH 

Aljan 

aljanu 

demon 

Balagaga 

balagagu 

young  man  (adult) 

Dakara 

dakaru 

bodyguard 

Marare     or      marania  (f.) 

marayoyi,  marayu 

orphan 

maraya  (m.) 

Hadaka 

hadaku 

stranger  who   refuses 

to  account  for  himself 

saraunia 

sarauniyoyi     sar- 

wife  or  sister  of  a 

auniyu 

king 

Shaida 

shaidu,    etc.,     see 

witness 

previous  list 

Je  and  ye 

Barao              baraunia 

barayi  and  barai 

thief 

Bebe 

bebaye 

dumb  person 

Boka 

bokaye 

wizard 

Buzu 

buzaye 

a  person  half  Hausa 

half  Tawarek 

Dengi,  denga, 

dengoyi 

family  relations 

deggi 

Gabro  (gobro)  gabrua 

gabraye,     and 

bachelor  and  spinster, 

(goburo) 

gaguare 

wifeless  man,  and  so 

either  widower   or 

bachelor 

Gata 

gataye 

spy 

Gimba 

gimbaye 

younger    son     of     a 

chief,  also  a  large 

white  seed  used  as 

a  bead 

mata 

mataye,  mataitai, 

wife 

matataki 

Rago               ragua 

ragaye,*        ragaje 

idler 

raguaye,  raguna 

uwa 

uwaye  and  iyaye 

mother  and  parent* 

Yaro 

yaraye  and  yara* 

boy 

yarinia 

yaraye,  yara,  and 

girl 

yamata 

Ni 

Baba 

babani 

eunuch 

Kaka 

kakani*  kakoka 

grandfather,  ancestors 

Manzo 

manzani 

messenger 

Wada               wadania 

wadani 

dwarf 

26 


THE    HAUSA   LANGUAGE 


Nouns  that  admit  of  a  broken  stem  or  change  of  word 


MASC.                      FEM. 

PLURALS 

ENGLISH 

Baba 

mainya 

great  man 

Bardi 

baradine 

horse  soldier 

Bawa 

bayi,*  bai.  bawoyi 

slave 

bauya  (S) 

bayi,  bai 

female  slave 

baiwa  (K) 

bayi,  bai 

female  slave 

Da                     diya.  dia,  ya 

yaya,*    diya    (S), 

son,  child,  free 

yayaya 

Malam 

malamai,  maluma 

mallam 

Miji   namiji 

rnaza,'    mazaje, 

husband,  male 

mazai 

maehe 

mata 

woman 

Mutum 

mutane  *  (S)  mut- 

man,  person 

(mutume) 

antani  (K) 

Falke 

fatake 

trader 

Kuturu 

kutare 

leper 

Sariki 

sarakai.        saraki, 

king 

sarakuna  * 

sarkania 

sarakai,        saraki, 

reigning  queen 

sarakuna  * 

Sarmayi 

samari 

youth  under  twenty 

(samrai)  or 

samri  (gaure) 

Uba 

ubane  (K),  ubanai 

father 

(S) 

Wa 

yeyu 

elder  brother 

Plurals  unclassified 


Bara 


Bako 

Dodo 
Kafo 
Manomi 

(monomi) 
Makeri 
Tsofo 
Talaka 


barania  barua,  barori,     servant 

barurua 

budurua          badurai 
bakua  baki,    bakuna, 

bakokuna 
dodonai 
kafi 


monoma 

raakira 
tsofafi,  tsofi 
talakawa 


virgin 
stranger 

sprite 
blind  man 
cultivator 

blacksmith 
old  man 
poor 


NOUN 

LIVING  THINGS 

Common  formation 


27 


MASC. 

FEM. 

AI 

-O-I                     UNA 

ENGLISH. 

Bika 

bikoki 

baboon 

Biri 

birai 

birori,  biruna, 

monkey 

birari,  biraye 

Bunsuru 

bunsurai 

he-goat 

and  bun- 

suraye 

Dabbo 

dabbobi 

live-stock 

(dabba) 

and  dab- 

bo  ni 

dila 

diloli 

jackal 

Dukushi 

dukusa 

dukusai 

young  horse 

dorina 

dorinai 

hippo- 

potamus 

fara 

farori           faruna 

locust 

fara-n-dere 

farori  -  n  - 

black  locust 

• 

dere 

gafia 

gafiyoyi 

rat 

goda 

gododi 

small  dark- 

coloured 

antelope 

Gunzu 

gunzuna 

pig 

Jaki 

jakania 

jakai  * 

jakuna 

ass 

and  jaka 

Kada 

kadodi 

crocodile 

(kado) 

Kankeso 

kankesai 

cockroach 

kenwa 

kenwai 

kenwuna 

cat 

kunama 

kunamai 

scorpion 

Kurege 

kuragai 

jerboa 

Kurtumi 

kurtumai 

ox 

Kusu 

kusai 

mouse 

Machi  ji  l 

machijia 

machizai 

snake 

Rago 

ragai 

ragogi          raguna  * 

ram 

Rakumi 

rakumai 

rakumomi  rakuma  * 

camel 

shirua 

shiruyoyi 

hawk 

tagua 

taguai 

taguyoyi 

female 

camel 

Takarikari 

takarikarai 

bullock 

Taki 

takoki 

locust  of 

sorts 

Zaka 

zakania 

zakoki 

lion,  lioness 

Zomo  or 

zomai 

hare 

zomu 

"  j  "  is  soft  here,  and  "  z  "  is  almost  "  sh." 


28 


THE    HAUSA   LANGUAGE 


Ki 

Not  used  with  living  things 

Wa 

Not  used  with  living  things,  persons 

only 

U 

MASC. 

FEM. 

PLUBALS 

ENGLISH 

Alfadari 

alfadara 

alfadaru 

mule 

gada 

gadu 

small    reddish 

antelope 

hankaka 

hankaku  and 

crow 

hankaki 

Maraki 

maraka 

maraku 

calf 

(mareki) 

tantabera 

tantaberu 

dove 

Zakara 

zakaru 

cock 

Je  and  Ye 

bera 

beraye 

rat 

Berdo 
Gadu  (gyadu) 

gadonia 

berdaye 
gadaye,  gadoji, 

pigeon 
pig 

gadania 

gaduna 

Kifi 

giwa 

giwaye 
kifaye 

female  elephant 
fish 

Kudi  (kuji) 

k  iul  a 

kudaje 

fly 

kura 

kuraye 

hycena 

mujia 

mujiye 

owl 

Meke 

mekia 

mekiye 

a  species  of  eagle 

Zunzu 

zunzaye,  zunzuaye 

bird 

Ni 

gara 

garani 

white  ant 

Broken  stem 

akuya  (akwia)    akuyai,    akuyoyi, 

she-goat 

awakai,  awaki  * 

Doki 

bauna 

bakani,  baunaye 
dawakai,*  dawaki 

buffalo 
horse 

Kare 

karia 

dokuna  (dowakai) 
karnai,  karnuka 

dog 

Sa 

sania 

shanu 

bull,  cow 

kaza 

kaji 

hen 

tumkia 

tumaki 

sheep 

NOUN 


29 


Unclassified 


MASC. 


Kwado 
Kwaro 


Kwikuyo      or 

kurkwiyo 
(Zakara  zabi) 
Tabri 
Toro 


FEM. 

PLURALS 

ENGLISH 

barewa 

bareyi 

antelope 

bisa 

bisaisai,     bisoshi, 

animal 

bisashe  * 

gamraka 

gamraki 

crested  crane 

godia 

godi 

mare 

hankaka 

hankaki,  hankaku 

crow 

kagua 

kagunai 

crab 

kwadia,  kwaduna 

frog,  toad 

kwari 

black  moth 

kurichia 

kurichecheki, 

dove 

kurichiyoyi 

kwikuye 

young  of  animals 

zabua  (sabua) 

sabi 

guinea  fowl 

tabra 

castrated  goat 

torone 

bull 

INANIMATE  THINGS 
Common  formation 

-O-I  UNA 

adodi 
albasosi 


Ado  (m.) 

Albasa  albasai 

(m.  or  f.) 

Akurike(m.)  akurikai 
Alama  (f.)  alamomi 

Alfuta  alfutai 

(m.  or  f.) 
Aljifa     (m.)  aljifai  *  aljifofi 

or  aljifi  (m.) 
Alura  alurai  *  alurori 

(m.  or  f.) 

Awoza      (f.)  awozai 
or  awaza 
Baki  (m.) 

Banto  (m.) 

Bata  (f.)  batochi 

Bindiga  (f.)  bindigogi 

Buka  (f).  bukogi 

Bulala  (f.)      bulalai 

Bunu  (in.)      bunai 


aljifuna 
(aljifu) 


ENGLISH 

splendour 
onion 

fowl  coop 

sign 

head  kerchief 

pocket 
needle 
rib,  side 


(bakakuna)      mouth 

and  bakuna 
bantuna  towel 

small  box 

made  of  skin 
gun 
tent 

whip  of  hippo- 
potamus hide 
grass  for  thatch, 
dark  blue 
striped  cloth 


30 


THE    HAUSA    LANGUAGE 


AI 

-O-I 

UNA 

ENGLISH 

Chibia  (f.) 

chibiyoyi 

navel 

Chinia  (f.) 

chiniyoyi 

thigh 

Daki  (m.) 

(dakunkima) 

room,  hut 

and  dakuna* 

Danga  (m.  or  f.) 

dangogi 

garden,  fence 

Doiya  (f.) 

doiyai 

doiyoyi 

doiyuna  * 

yam 

Duggo  (m.) 

dugogi 

drop 

or  digga  (f.) 

Dukia~(f.) 

dukoki  and 

riches 

dukiyoyi 

Dundu  (m.) 

dundai 

dundodi 

dunduna  * 

yam 

Dunia  (f.) 

duniyoyi 

world 

Fada  (f.) 

fadodi 

blow 

Fada  (f.) 

fadodi 

chief's  court 

Fata  (f.) 

fatuna 

skin 

Fikafike  (m.) 

fikifikai 

wing 

Fukafuki 

fukafukai 

wing 

(m.) 

Filafile  (m.) 

fulafulai 

paddle 

or  fulafule 

Fitila  (f.) 

fitilai 

fitiloli 

lamp 

(fitilu*) 

Fure  (m.) 

furai 

furori 

flower 

(furaye) 

Fuska  (f.) 

(fuskaikai) 

fuskoki 

fuskuna 

face 

Gaba  (m.) 

gabobi 

front,  breast 

Gamba  (m.) 

gambobi 

a  grass,  a  kind 

of  hoe 

Gado  (m.) 

gadai 

gadodi 

gaduna  * 

inheritance 

Gado  (m.) 

gadodi  and 

bed 

(gadaje) 

Ganga  (f.) 

ganguna 

drum 

Garike  (m.) 

(garka) 

garikuna, 

enclosure 

or  gerke  (m. 

) 

gerkuna 

Garwashi 

garwashoshi 

burning  char- 

(m.) 

coal 

Gembo  (m.) 

gembuna 

ulcer  on  body 

Geza  (m.) 

gezuna 

ear    of     corn, 

mane 

Gilmi  (m.) 

gilmomi 

cross 

Gora  (f.) 

goruna 

calabash,  cup 

Goriba  (f.) 

goribai 

goribobi 

a  palm  and  the 

mats       made 

of  it 

Guga  (m.) 

gugogi 

guguna 

bucket 

Gungume 

gungumai 

tree  stump 

(m.) 

Gwaza  (m.) 

(gwazoyi) 

gwazuna 

a  kind  of  sweet 

or  Goza 

potato 

NOUN 


31 


Al 

-O-I 

UNA 

ENGLISH 

Haba  (m.) 

habobi 

chin 

Hako  (m.) 

hakoki 

pitfall 

Hanchi  (m.) 

hanchochi 

nose 

or  hanshi 

Harufi  (m.)     harufai 

letter  of 

or  harifi 

alphabet 

Hainya  (f.)     hainyai  also 

hainyoyi* 

hainyuna 

road 

hainyaiyai 

Harshi 

harshuna 

tongue 

(halshi)  (m.) 

and  halshina 

Hatsi  (m.)      hatsai    and 

hatsoshi 

hatsuna 

corn,  wheat 

hatsaisai 

Haskc  (m.)     haskai     (S) 

haskoki  (K) 

haskuna  (K) 

light 

and  hask- 

aikai  (S) 

Hatiya  (f.) 

hauyoyi  (and 

hauyuna 

hoe 

hauyi) 

Hiska  (m.  or  f.) 

hiskoki 

• 

wind 

Jgia  (m.) 

igiyoyi  (and 

rope 

Iko  (m.) 

ikoki 

power 

Iri  (m.)           irai 

irori     (irare) 

kind,  sort 

and  (iri-iri) 

lyaka  (m.  orf.) 

iyakoki 

boundary 

Jika  (m.) 

jikoki 

jikuna 

sack 

Jiki  (m.) 

jikuna 

body 

Jigo  (m.) 

jiguna 

post,  beam 

Kango  (m.) 

kangogi 

ruin 

(kangaye) 

Karufa  (f.)     karufai 

riding  boots 

Kataruka  (f.) 

katarukuna 

bridge 

or  kaderko 

Kasua  (f.)       kasuai  * 

kasuwoyi 

market 

Kilago  (m.)     kilagai 

hide 

Kiriji  (m.)      kirijai 

breast 

Kofa  (f  ) 

kofofi       and 

door 

(kofanu) 

Kogi  (m.)        kogai 

koguna  and 

lake,  river 

kogina 

Kosfa 

kosfofi 

peel,  dregs 

(kwosfa)  (f.) 

Kufita  (m.)    kufitai 

riding  boots 

or  kufta 

with  spurs 

Kugiya  (f.) 

kugiyoyi 

hook,  clasp 

kogia  and 

kogua 

Kumbu  (m.)  kumbai 

kumbnna 

scale,     finge 

nail 


32- 


THE    HAUSA   LANGUAGE 


AI 

-O-I                         UNA 

ENGLISH 

Kurada  (m.)  kuradai 

small  round 

hatchet 

Kurafu 

kurfuna 

hide  whip 

(kurfu)  (m.) 

Launi  (m.)      launai 

launoni     also 

colour 

(launuka) 

and   (launi- 

launi) 

Lebo  (m.) 

lebuna 

lip 

Leferu  (m.)    leferai 

pad  for 

donkey's  back 

Lotu  (m.)       lotai 

lotochi             lotuna 

season 

Lufudi             lufudai 

quilted  coat 

(m.) 

Madafa  (f.)     madafai 

cannon 

Malafa  (f.)      malafai 

malafuna 

large  straw  hat 

Marede  (m.)  maredai 

millstone 

Molo  (m.) 

moluna 

music  (banjo) 

Muddu  (m.) 

mudduna 

a  measure 

Muria  (m.  or  f.) 

muriyoyi 

voice 

Raga  (f.) 

ragoyi 

net  bag 

Kami  (m.) 

ramuna 

hole 

Randa  (f.) 

randuna 

large     earthen 

pot 

Rega  (f.) 

reguna 

rags 

Riga  (f.) 

rigogi       also  riguna  * 

clothes 

(rigaigai)  and 

(rigunoni) 

Rumbu  (m.) 

rumbuna 

storehouse 

Saiyi  (m.) 

saiyoyi 

shelter  shed 

Saiga  (f.) 

salgagi 

cesspit 

Sanda  (m.  orf.) 

sanduna 

stick 

Sanduki(m.)  sandukai 

box 

Sanfo  (m.) 

sanfuna 

basket 

Sarauta  (f.)    sarautai 

sarautochi       sarautuna  * 

kingdom 

Sarika(m.) 

sarikoki 

chain 

Sefa  (f.)  and 

sefofi 

spleen 

saifa 

Shekara  (f.)    shekarai 

shekarori  and 

year 

(shekaru  *) 

Shantali           sbantalai 

kettle 

(santali) 

Sheria  (f.)       sheriai 

judgment 

Shia  (f.)  or 

shiyoyi 

quarter     of    a 

•him 

shirori 

town 

Surdi  (m.)      sur(a)dai 

surdodi            surduna 

saddle 

Sufadu  (m.)      sufadai 

inner  shoe 

Tabo,  (m.) 

tabuna 

dirt  spot 

NOUN 


33 


AT 

•  O-I 

UNA 

ENGLISH 

Takalmi  (m.) 

takalraai 

takalmomi, 

shoe 

also 

(takalma) 

and 

(takaluma) 

Takarda  (f.) 

takardai 

takardodi, 

takarduna 

book,  paper 

also 

takardu  * 

Tanfasiia  (f.) 

tanfasuai  *  (S)  tanfasuwoyi 

needle 

Tafarnua  (f.) 

tafarnai 

garlic 

Tago  (m.) 

taguna 

shirt 

Tada  (f.) 

tadodi 

custom 

Tafariki  (m.) 

tafarkoki 

way,  method 

Tagula  (f.) 

tagulai 

bracelet 

Taiki  (m.) 

(taiku) 

taikuna 

bag,  bundle 

Tamraro  (m.) 

tamrarai, 

star 

(tauraro) 

also  (tam- 

r  ai     and 

(tamraru) 

Taru  (m.) 

taruna 

net 

Tasunia  (f.) 

tasunai 

tasuniyoyi 

story 

Taro  (m.) 

tarori 

crowd,  heap 

Tasa  (f.) 

tasoshi 

cup 

Taska  (f.) 

taskoki 

store-room 

Tasubi  (m.) 

tasubai 

bead 

(chasubi) 

Toka  (f.) 

tokuna 

ash 

Tofo  (m.) 

tofuna 

leaf 

Tsafi  (m.) 

tsafuna 

idol 

Tufa  (f.) 

tufofi  and 

shirt,  clothes 

(tufua) 

(tufafi) 

Tudu  (m.) 

tudodi 

hitt 

Tumbi  (m  ) 

tumbuna 

stomach 

Turuba  (f.) 

turobobi 

path 

Tuta 

tutoshi 

flag 

Wakati  (m.) 

wakatai 

time 

Wake  (m.) 

(wakeke) 

wakuna 

bean 

Wando  (m.) 

wanduna 

trousers 

Wuri  (m.) 

wurai,  also 

wurori 

wuruna 

place 

(wurarc) 

Yatsa  (yasa) 

yatsochi* 

yatsuna 

finger 

(f.) 

yasosi* 

(yatsaitsai) 

Zargi  (ra.) 

zarguna 

loop 

Zobi  (ra.) 

zobuna 

ring 

Zunubi  (m.) 

zunubai 

sin 

(zunaba) 

THE   HAUSA   LANGUAGE 


U 

This  list  includes  words  of  foreign  origin 


SINGULAR 

PLURALS 

ENGLISH 

Albada  (f.) 

albadu                     albadodi 

strip  of  cloth 

Alkaria  (f.) 

alkariyu 

village 

Alkeba  (f,) 

alkebu 

cloak 

Gargasa  (f.) 

gargasu 

large  fish  with  red 

tail 

Hamata  (f.) 

hamatu 

arm-pit 

Kafada  (f.) 

kafadu                     kafadodi 

shoulder 

Kagara  (kagarua) 

kagaru 

barricade 

(f.) 

Kwarmi  (m.) 

kwarmu 

socket,  joint 

Labari  (m.) 

labaru 

news 

Mashi  (m.) 

masu 

spear 

Ragaita  (f.) 

ragaitu 

idleness 

Ragaya  (f.) 

ragayu 

supporting  rope 

Rai  (m.) 

raiu,  raiuka 

life 

Refi  (m.)  (refo) 

refu,  refuna 

branch 

Shegifa  (f.) 

shegifu                     shegifofi 

mud  house 

Silia  (m.  or  f.) 

siliyu                        siliyoyi 

silk 

Takarda  (f.) 

takardu    and 

paper 

other    forms 

(see  previous 

list 

Tamraro  (m.) 

tamraru    and 

star 

other    forms 

(see  previous 

list) 

Zamani  (m.) 

zamanu 

time,  season 

Fili  (m.) 
Gainya  (f.) 
Gado  (m.) 
Gauta  (m.  or  f.) 
Gawoi  (m. 
Gida  (m. 
Gimba  (f.) 
Guiwa  (m.) 
Gujia  (f.) 
Gwaza  (f.) 
Hanu  (m.) 
Kango  (m.) 
Kulu  (m.) 
Kusurua  (m.) 


Je  and  ye 

filaye 

gainyaye,  gainye 

gadaje,  gadodi 

gautaye 

gawaye 

gidaje,  gidadaje 

gimbaye 

guiwaye 

gujeye,  gujiyoyi 

gwazoyi,  gwazuna 

hanaye,  haniia*  (K) 

kangaye,  kangogi 

kulaye 

kusuroyi 


cultivated  plain 

leaf 

bed 

egg-plant 

charcoal 

house 

seed  used  as  a  bead 

knee 

ground  nut  (also  geda) 

sweet  potato 

hand 

ruin 

whip  mark 

corner 


NOUN 


35 


iiua  (m.) 
Suna  (m.) 
Soro  (tsoro)  (m.) 
Wuya  (wiya)  (m.  or  f.) 
Waje  (woje)  (m.) 

ruaye,  ruwaiwai 
sunaye,*  sunanaki 
soraye 
wiyayi 
wosashe  (wojaje) 

water 
name 
porch,  etc. 
neck 
side,  place 

Ka,  Ke,  Ki 


Gona  (f.) 

gonaki 

farm 

Kauye  (m.) 

kauyuka 

hamlet 

Kwabri  (m.) 
or  Kauri 

kwabruka                       f 
kaurori                             ( 

dead  tree 

Kwana  (m.) 

kwanaki,*  kwanuka 

day  of  twenty-four  hours 

Rai  (m.) 

raiuka,  raiu 

life 

Rana  (f.) 

ranaki,*  ranuka, 

day 

ranakai 

Suna  (m.) 

sunanaki,  sunaye, 

name 

Banna 

Tsuma  (f.) 

tsumoki 

rags 

Wake  (m.) 

wakeke,  wakuna 

bean 

Wuka  (f.) 

wukake 

knife 

Zaure  (m.) 

zauruka 

porch 

Nouns  that  admit  of  a  broken  stem 

SINGULAR 

BROKEN   STEM    FORM    OTHER   FORMS               ENGLISH 

Aiki,  (m.) 

ayuka,  ayuyuka,          aikuna 

work 

aikoki 

Akoshi  (m.) 

akusa 

wooden  dish 

Aska  (f.) 

asaki                               askoki 

razor 

Bashi  (m.) 

basusuka 

debt 

Chiawa  (f.) 

cbiayi 

grass 

Damcbi  (m.) 

damasa 

upper  arm 

Duchi  (m.) 

duatsu 

rock 

Faifai  (m.) 

fiyafai 

woven  fan  or  dish- 

cover 

Farichi  (m.) 

faruta  (S) 

finger-nail 

Galma  (f.) 

galemi                          galemun 

a         j  aa  vseogrf  ff*'oe 

Gulbi  (m.) 

gulabo 

river,  lake 

Gumki  (m.) 

gumakai 

idol 

Itachi  (m.) 

itatua  (K)                     itshuna 

(S)    tree 

(itchi) 

Jijia  (f.) 

jiwoyi 

vein 

Jirigi  (m.) 

jirage 

boat 

Kabaki  (m.) 

kaboka 

heap 

Kai  (m.) 

kawuna,  kauna, 

head 

kawana,  kanua 

36 


THE    HAUSA   LANGUAGE 


SINGULAR        BROKEN   STEM   FORM        OTHER  FORMS 


ENGLISH 


Kaimi  (m.) 

kayami 

spur 

Karifi  (m.) 

karafa                            karifuna 

strength,  iron 

Kasko  (m.) 

kasaki                            kasku 

pot,  cup 

Litafi  (m.) 

litatafi 

book 

Mafuchi  (m.) 

mafelfechi 

fan 

Rijia  (m.) 

rijoyi 

well 

Rotsi  (m.) 

ratsa 

blow 

Takobi  (m.) 

takuba 

sword 

Tukunia  (f.) 

tukuane  (tukwani) 

pot 

Wuri  (m.) 

kurdi,  kudi 

cowry 

Zuchia  (f.) 

zukata                            zutochi 

heart 

Plurals  unclassified 

SINGULAR 

PLURALS 

EKGLISH 

Abu  (m.) 

abubua 

thing 

Algarib  (m.) 

algaribi 

red  and  black  seeds 

of  a  certain  plant. 

Alhari  (m.) 

alharini 

silk 

Birni  (m.) 

birane  and  birnua 

city 

Bobawa  (f.) 

bobaiyi 

foreign  speech   (in 

a  bad  sense) 

Chiawa  (m.) 

chiayi 

grass 

Gare  (m.) 

garuruka 

white  tobe 

Gari  (m.) 

garurua,  garu-              garigaru 

town 

ruka 

Garkua  (f.) 

gariki 

shield 

Gashi  (m.) 

gasusuka 

hair,  u-ool 

Gatari  (m.) 

gatara,  gatura              gatarua 

hatchet 

Geme  (m.) 

gema 

beard 

Gera  (gira)  (f.), 

gerare,  gerori 

eyebrow 

Giginia  (f.) 

gigangani,     gigin-       giginai 

fan  palm 

yoyi 

(  1.   gourd   used   as 

Gora  (f.) 

gororo 

water-bottle 

I  2.   walking-cane 

Goro  (m.) 

gworra 

kola  nut 

Habaichi  (m.) 

habaitai 

abuse,  secret  signs 

Habaki  (m.) 

habaka 

cloud  of  smoke 

Haki  (m.) 

hakukua 

grass 

Hakori  (m.) 

hakora 

tooth 

Ido  (m.) 

idanu  (K)                      idanduna 

eye 

Ijia  (f.) 

ido  (S) 

pupil  of  eye 

Kafa  (f.) 

kafafua,  kafufu 

foot 

Kafo  (m.) 

kafoni                            kafuna 

horn 

Kama  (m.  and 

karaanu 

likeness 

f.  (rare)) 

Kashi  (m.) 

kasusua,  kassa 

bone 

NOUN 


37 


STNOTTLAE  PLURALS 

Kasa  (m.  and     kasashc,*  kasaisai 


Kasko  (m.) 

kasku 

Karkara  (f.) 

Kaya  (m.) 

kayayeki 

Kaya  (f.) 

kayayua 

Kibia  (f.) 

kibao 

Kufai  (m.) 

kufaifai 

Kune  (m.) 

kunua 

Kurji  (m.) 

kuraji 

Kushewa  (ku- 

kusheyi 

sheya)  (f.) 

Kwoi  (m.) 

kwoinyaye 

Magana  (m. 

maganganu 

and  f.) 

Magani  (m.) 

maganguna, 

magunguna 

Rafi  (m.) 

rafufuka 

Rafonia  (f.) 

rafoni 

Rufogo  (m.) 

rufogi 

Tafia  (f.) 

tafifia 

Tulu  (m.) 

tuluna 

Tumfafi  (m.) 

tumfafia 

Turumi  (m.) 

turami 

Wada  (f.) 

wadata 

Wata  (m.) 

watani,*  wdtanai 

Zane  (m.) 

zaniiwa,  zanoa 

kasaki 
kakarori 


kiboyi 
kurareji 


rafuna 


watasbi 


ENGLISH 
land,  country 

cup,  pot 

plain 

load 

thorn 

arrow 

ruins 

ear 

scab 

grave 

egg 

word, language 

medicine 

stream 
storeroom 
storehouse 
going,  travel 
pot 

a    tree    producing 
fibre  for  rope 
a  mortar 
riches 
month 
cloth 


VERBAL  NOUNS— PLURAL 
Infinitives 

The  infinitive  when  used  as  a  noun  forms  the  plural  by 
reduplication  with  a  change  of  form — 


Chi 

Sha 

Gudu 

Koyo 

Rubutu 

Karat  u 


chiy6-chiy6  eating 

8haye-8hay6  drinking 

fuje-guj6  running 

oyd-koy6  learning 

rubuche-rubuch6  writing 

karanch6-karanche  reading 


Verbal  Nouns  in  "  -ia  " 

This  form  takes  the  plural  termination  "  -o-i." 
Tafia  tafiyoyi  travelling 


38 


THE    HAUSA   LANGUAGE 


KANO 


Baiwa 

baiwoyi 

Batawa 

batawoyi 

Chirawa 

chirawoyi 

Chidawa 

chidawoyi 

Fitaswa 

fitaswoyi 

Jefawa 

jefuwoyi 

Sayowa 

sayowoyi 

Sayaswa 

sayaswoyi 

Tarawa 

tarawoyi 

Yasuwa 

yasuwoyi 

Ziibawa 

ziibuwoyi 

SOKOTO 

basuwa        basuwoyi 

bataswa       bataswoyi 

chersuwa     chersuwoyi 

chisuwa       chisuwoyi 

fisuwa 

jefaswa 

sayoya 


fisuwoyi 

jefaswoyi 

sayawoyi 

saysuwa      saysuwoyi 

tarsuwa 

yazwa 


tarsuwoyi 
yazuwoyi 
ziibsuwa      ziibsuwoyi 


giving 

losing 

saving 

feeding 

pulling  out 

throwing 

buying 

setting 

assembling 

throwing  away 

pouring  out 


PLURALS  or  COMPOUND  NOUNS  FORMED  WITH  PARTICLES 

Ba 


MASC. 

FEM. 

PLURAL 

ENGLISH  OF 

MASC.   SINGULAR 

Ba-haushe 

ba-hausa 

hausawa 

Hausa 

Ba-larabe 

ba-laraba 

larabawa 

Arab 

Ba-fulache 

ba-fulata 

fulani  (fulbe  is 

Fula 

(Ba-filache) 

the  Fula  plural) 

Ba-ture 

baturia 

turawa 

European 

Ba-tone 

batonia,  ba-tona 

tonawa 

Ashanti 

Ba-gobiri 

ba-gobiria 

gobirawa 

Gobir  man  (Gobir 

is  part  of  Hausa) 

Ba-sudani 

ba-sudania 

sudanawa 

Sudanese 

Ba-kano 

kanawa,  kanowa 

Kano  man 

Ba-zabarimi 

zabarimawa 

Songhay  man 

(Zabarimi  is  the 

eastern  part  of 

Songhay) 

Ba-askare  J 

askarawa 

soldier 

Ba-fadi  l  (or 

fadawa 

counsellor 

bafada) 

Da 

Da-n-kano 

ya-1-kano 

yaya-n-kano 

Kano  man 

Da-n-alaro 

ya-1-alaro 

yaya-n-alaro 

carrier 

Da-n-alkaria 

ya-1-alkaria 

yaya-n-alkaria 

villager 

Da-m-banza 

ya-1-banza 

yaya-n-banza 

worthless  person 

1  The  association  of  "  ba-"  with  any  other  than  a  place  name 
is  rare. 


NOUN 


39 


MASC. 

Da-m-birni 

Da-n-daki 

Da-n-doki 

Da-n-gari 

Da-n-rago 

Da-n-su 

Da-n-uwa 


ya-1-birni 

ya-1-daki 

ya-1-doki 

ya-1-gari 

ya-1-tumkia 

ya-l-su 


PLURAL 

yaya-n-birni 

yaya-n-daki 

yaya-n-doki 

yaya-n-gari 

yaya-n-rago 

yaya-n-su 


ENGLISH  OF 
MASC.  SINGULAR 
citizen 
servant 
colt 

townsman 
lamb 
fisherman     with 


hand  net 
ya-n-uwa    (short  brother 
for  yaya-n-uwa) 

Mai 


All  are  common  gender  in  singular,  and  masculine  in 
plural,  as  are  all  nouns — 


Mai-aiki  masu-aiki 

Mai-chi  masu-chi 

Mai-daki  masu-daki 

Mai-doki  masu-doki  (masu- 

dawaki) 

Mai-gaskia  masu-gaskia 

Mai  gona  masu-gona 

Mai-karia  masu-karia 

Mai-magani  masu-magani 

Mai-yaki  masu-yaki 

Mai-hankali  masu-hankali 

Ma 

Persons 


MASC.  FEM.  PLURAL 

Madumki  madumkai 

Makiyi  makiya 

Mahaife  mahaifa 

Mafada  mafadawa 

Makafo  makafi 

Suffix  -chi  (m.),  -chia  (f  ).     (The  "  ma- 

Machiuchi  machiuchia         mdchiuta 

Mafauchi  mafauchia  mafauta 

Mahaukacbi  mahaukachia      mahaukata 

Makofchi  makofchia  makofta 

(makubchi) 

Makaranchi  makaranchia      makaranta 

Marubuchi  marubuchia        marubuta 

Masallachi  masallachia         masallata 

Masunchi  masunchia  masunta 


worker 

eater  or  big  eater 

house-owner 

horseman 

speaker  of  truth 
cultivator   or  owner   of 

farm 
liar 
doctor 
fighter 
wise  man 


ENGLISH 

tailor 

personal  enemy 
parent 
counsellor 
blind  man 
is  accented.) 
sick  person 
butcher 
madman 
neighbour 

schoolboy 
writer 

praying  person 
fisher 


40 


THE    HAUSA   LANGUAGE 


MASC.  and  FEM. 

Madafa  (f.) 
Madaffa  (f.) 
Machidi  (m.) 
Mafari  (m.) 
Mafuti  (m.) 
Magani  (m.) 
Makari  (m.) 
Mahayi  (m.) 
Mariki 

Masallachi  (m.) 
Mashayi  (m.) 
Mazamni  (m.) 


Mafauta  (f.) 
Machiuta  (f.) 
Mahaukata  (f.) 
Makaranta  (f.) 
Masunta  (f.) 


Things 
PLURAL 

madafai 

madaffai 

machidai 

mafarai 

mafutai 

maganai 

makarai 

mahayai,  mahayoyi 

marika 

masalatai 

mashayai 

mazamnai 


cannon 

kitchen 

feeding-place 

beginning 

resting-place 

outlook 

end 

step 

handle 

mosque 

drinking -place 

seat 


Suffix  -ta  (singular),  -tai  (plural) 

mafautai  slaughter -place 

place  of  sickness 


machiutai 
mahaukatai 
makarantai 
masuntai 


place  for  mad  people 

school 

fishing-place 


No  prefix 

Suffix  -ta  (singular),  -tochi  (plural) 
(ch  is  in  lieu  of  "  t  "  before  "  i  ") 

Chiuta  (f.)  chiutochi  sickness 

Fauta  (f.)  fautochi  slaughter 

Haukata  (f.)  haukatochi  madness 

Karanta  (f )  karantochi  schooling 

Sallata  (f.)  sallatochi  worship 

Sunta  (f.)  suntochi  fishery 

The  foregoing  are  examples  of  three  meanings  derived 
from  the  same  stem — the  person,  the  place,  the  action, 
the  latter,  however,  being  without  a  prefix.  The  plurals 
of  abstract  nouns  are  rarely  used  in  practice. 

PLURALS  OF  OTHER  ABSTRACT  NOUNS  WITHOUT  PREFIX 

Suffix  -ncM  (m.),  -ntaka  (/.) 

The  first  is  of  Kano  origin  and  the  other  of  Sokoto  origin. 
Abstract  nouns  with  these  terminations  can  from  their 
nature  be  but  rarely  put  in  the  plural — 

Sarkanchi     sarkantochi  sarkantaka     sarkantakoki       kingship 


NOUN  41 

A  list  of  some  of  these  nouns  is  given  under  the  deriva- 
tion of  the  noun. 

It  is  to  be  noted  that  both  forms  take  the  plural 
termination  "-o-i"  adapted  with  the  proper  consonant. 

PLUBALS  or  COMPOUND  NOUNS 

Prefix  Abi-n- 

Compound  nouns  formed  with  this  prefix  do  not  usually 
take  a  plural.  The  plural  of  "  abi-n-tsoro  "  could  be 
rendered  "  abubua-n-tsoro  " — that  is,  things  to  fear  ;  but 
this  rather  directs  the  emphasis  to  the  word  "  thing,"  and 
the  compound  practically  becomes  dissolved. 

The  words  "  abinchi,"  food,  and  "  abinsha,"  drink,  are 
in  such  common  use,  however,  that  they  have  ceased  to 
be  regarded  as  having  component  parts,  and  so  the  plurals 
are  formed  on  lines  as  if  they  were  simple  nouns,  as — 

Abinchi  abinchai,  abintochi 

Abinsha  abinshai 

Prefix  Wuri-n- 

If  nouns  compounded  with  this  word  are  put  in  the 
plural,  "  wuri- "  takes  its  ordinary  plural  form,  and,  as 
with  "  abi-n-,  the  compound  noun  becomes  dissolved. 
Wuri-n-kwana         wurare-n-kwana        sleeping-place 

OTHER  COMPOUND  NOUNS 

Other  compound  nouns  which  do  not  take  a  plural  to 
the  first  part  of  the  word  are  rare — 

Kandaki  (kai-n-daki)         kandakuna         upper  storey 

NOUNS  WITHOUT  PLURAL 

There  are  a  great  many  nouns  which  do  not  admit  of 
a  plural. 

1.  Nouns  denoting  mass  cannot  form  a  plural — 

Zinaria  (f.)       gold         Hazi  corn  Kura  (f.)  dust 

Azurufa  (f.)      silver       Alkama  (f.)    wheat          Zumua  (m.)  or 

Shinkafa  (f.)  rice  Rua-n-zumua  honey 


42  THE   HAUSA   LANGUAGE 

2.  Parts  of  the  body — 

Jini  (m.)       blood  Nama  (m.)      flesh  Nono  (m.)        milk 

3.  Abstract  nouns  expressing  faculties  of  the  mind — 

Yirda  (f.)  belief,  etc.  Murna  (f.)  joy 

Tsoro  (m.)        fear  Tamaha  (m.)        hope 

4.  Most  abstract  nouns  cannot  form  a  plural  (and  others 
only  rarely) — 

Mugunta  (f.)    badness       Keau  (m.)     beauty       Tsarki  (m.)     holiness 
Bauta  (f.)         slavery        Gaskia  truth 

5.  Nouns  of  position — 

Bisa  (m.  and  f.)         top  Tsaka  (m.  and  f.)         middle 

6.  Designations  of  time — 

Safe  (m.)  or  safia  (f.)         morning  Mareche  (m.)  evening 

7.  Sundry — 

Kama  (f.)         cubit  Zaka  (f.)         land  tax 

NOUNS    WITHOUT    A   SINGULAR 

Nouns  without  a  singular  are  rare.  The  following  are 
some  of  which  no  singular  form  can  be  traced  — 

Dasashi  (K),  dasori  (S)  gums  of  the  mouth 

Kekarai  swelling  in  the  hand.t 

Tuguai,  tuguaye,  taguaye         twins 

USE  OF  SINGULAR  FOR  PLURAL 

There  is  a  strong  tendency  among  the  Hausa  people  to 
use  the  singular  for  the  plural.  In  this  tendency  they  are 
only  following  the  common  practice  of  other  West  African 
languages,  in  which  the  plural  suffix  is  an  independent 
word  or  particle,  and  is  movable  to  the  last  word  in  a 
sequence  of  words,  it  being  incorrect,  and  indeed  impossible, 
to  affix  it  to  more  than  one  word.  In  such  languages 
the  phrase  "ten  big  things"  becomes  "thing  big  ten," 
or  "  thing  bigs  "  for  "  big  things."  The  numeral  or  some 


NOUN  43 

similar  word  takes  the  place  of  the  plural  suffix,  but 
cannot  accompany  it. 

In  the  chapter  on  the  adjective  it  will,  however,  be  seen 
that  Hausa  does  not  fall  in  with  these  languages  beyond 
having  the  preference  for  the  singular  form  over  the  plural 
form,  and  in  this  respect  it  lies  closer  to  European 
languages  in  its  construction. 

It  is  only  in  very  correct  Hausa,  indeed  it  might  be 
called  pedantic,  for  the  noun  to  be  put  into  the  plural 
form  when  there  are  qualifying  words.  When  the  noun 
stands  alone  it  must  of  course  be  put  in  the  plural  number 
to  complete  the  sense.  Otherwise  it  is  correct  to  use 
the  singular. 

Examples 

Mutum  biu  sun  zo  Two  men  have  come 

Sarakuna  sun  zo  The  chiefs  have  come 

Hainya-r-nan  da   duchi  (or  da     This  road  is  rocky 

duatsu). 

Ya  yi  shekara  biu  ban  ganka  ba     It  is  two  years  since  I  saw  you 
Kwana-mu  goma  muna  tafia  We  have  been  ten  days  travelling 

Ku  dauki  kaya  Take  up  your  loads 

Andamre  kaya  duka  ?  Are  all  the  loads  tied  up  ? 

Muka  beri  kaya-mu  a  wanigari      We  have  left  our  loads  in  another 

town  (i.e.,  all  together) 

(If  the  plural  were  used  here,  it  would  refer  to  each  one's  individual 
load  separately. ) 

Shi  ne  ya  fadi  ku  mutane  dan  He  it  is  he  tells  (you)  you  sons  of 

Adam  Adam 

Shekaru  -  n  -  ka    nawa  ?      Saura  How  old  are  you  ?    In  three  months 

wata    uku    en   yi   (or    chika)  /  shall  be  twenty  years  old 

shekara  ashirin 

Saura    kwana   uku   ku   gamma  In  three  days  more  you  will  have 

aikinku  finished  your  work 

Mugunta  da  suka  yi  ta  komo  The  evil  that  they  did  came  back 

bisa  kainsu  upon  their  own  heads 

PLURAL  FORMS  WITH  A  SINGULAR  MEANING 

There  are  few  plural  forms  of  nouns  in  Hausa  which 
are  used  with  a  singular  meaning  in  a  slightly  different 
sense,  as — 

1. 

Mache         woman  mata         women 


44  THE    HAUSA   LANGUAGE 

but  "  mata "  is  commonly  used  as  a  term  of  respect  in 
addressing  any  woman — 

Sanu,  mata  ?         How  do  you  do,  madam  ? 

"  Mache  "  is  never  used  in  such  a  way. 

"  Mata "  also  means   wife,  as  which  it  takes  a  plural, 

"mataye,"  etc. — 

Enna  matanka  ?         Where  is  your  wife  ? 
certainly  not  "  Where  are  your  women  ?  "     But — 

Mata  nan  suna  noma  ;  bayi  ne         These  women  are  ploughing  ;  they 

are  slaves 

2. 

Wuri         cowry  shell  kurdi         cowries 

but  "  kurdi  "  is  commonly  used  meaning  money  or  price. 

PART  IV 
CASE 

There  is  no  inflection  of  the  noun  for  case. 

As  in  English,  the  position  of  the  substantive  with 
regard  to  the  verb  decides  whether  it  is  nominative  or 
accusative ;  and  what  would  be  the  genitive,  dative, 
ablative,  or  locative  cases  are  indicated  by  prepositions. 

It  is  under  prepositions,  therefore,  that  this  subject  is 
in  reality  treated. 

The  following,  however,  is  a  brief  outline  of  the 
declension  of  the  noun  with  appropriate  prepositions : — 

SINGULAR 

Nom.  mutum  man 

Voc.     kai  mutum  you  man 

ke  yarinia  you  girl 

Ace.     mutum  man 

Oen.     -n-mutum  (  =  na  mutum)  of  a  (or  the)  man 

Dot.     ga  mutum  to  a  (or  the)  man 

Abl.     da  mutum  with  a  (or  the)  man 

Loc.     a  bainya  on  the  road 

PLURAL 

Nom.  mutane  men 

Voc.     ku  mutane  you  men 

kai  mutane  you  men 


NOUN  45 

Ace.  mutane  men 

Gen.  -n-mutane  (na  mutane)  of  men 

Dat.  ga  mutane  to  the  men 

Abl.  da  mutane  with  men  or  with  the  men 

Loc. 

SYNTAX  OF  THE  CASES 

The  nominative  and  accusative  are  used  in  the  same 
position  in  a  sentence  as  they  are  in  English. 

Mutum  ya  chi  nama  The  man  ate  the  meat 

Mutane  sun  chi  nama         The  men  ate  the  meat 

Vocative 

In  the  vocative  the  pronoun  "  you "  precedes  an 
unqualified  noun,  and  is  distinguished  for  gender. 

In  the  plural  the  singular  pronoun  masculine  may  be 
used  as  well  as  the  plural  pronoun.  This  usage  points  to 
the  supposition  that  the  pronoun  has  degenerated  into 
an  interjection  pure  and  simple — 

Kai  yaro  I  ka  zo  1  You  boy  I  come  ! 

Ke  yarinia  !  ki  zo  !  You  girl  t  come  I 

Miji  na  1    Mi  ya  sameka  ?     My  husband  !    What  has  happened  to  you  ? 

In  formal  address  the  Arabic  interjection  "  ya "  may 
precede  the  pronoun  or  noun,  as — 

Ya  sidi !  0  sir  ! 

Ya  ku  Israilawa  !         0  you  Israelites  I 

Genitive  i 

This  case  is  formed  by  two  substantives  connected  by 
the  preposition  "  na,"  of,  the  possessed  object  standing 
first,  the  possessor  last,  or  it  may  be  formed  by  two  nouns 
in  apposition  in  the  same  order  but  with  no  copulative. 
The  latter  construction  is  perhaps  less  common  on  the 
whole. 

"Na"  in  the  masculine  becomes  "ta"  in  the  feminine. 
These  long  forms  are  not  very  frequently  met  with, 

1  See  particularly  under  Preposition  "  na." 


46  THE    HAUSA   LANGUAGE 

however,  but  are  shortened  and  vary  for  euphony  as 
follows  :  — 

Masc.  "  Na  "  =  "  n,"  "  m,"  "  d,"  or  omitted  if  the  last 
vowel  of  the  noun  preceding  is  "a." 

Fern.  "  Ta"  =  "  t,"  "  r,"  "  1,"  according  to  dialect  as  well 
as  euphony.  In  Kano  "  r  "  and  "  t  "  are  preferred,  but 
in  Sokoto  "  1."  In  Kano  "  n  "  is  also  used.  Fre- 
quently the  "  r  "  is  scarcely  heard,  and  so  it  seems  as 
if  there  were  two  nouns  in  juxtaposition,  as  is 
common  in  other  West  African  languages  —  e.g., 
Yoruba,  Igara,  Nupe,  etc.  Also  the  masculine 
form  <;  n  "  is  commonly  heard  where  the  feminine 
would  be  technically  accurate. 

Plural.  In  the  plural  "  n  "  alone  is  used,  in  accordance 
with  the  rule  of  the  language  that  gender  is  not 
recognised  in  the  plural  number. 

Examples 

Yaro-n-sariki  the  boy  of  the  king 

Yara-n-saraki  the  boys  of  the  kings 

Da-n-uwana  The  son  of  my  mother  —  i.e.,  brother,  cousin,  etc. 

Ya-t-malam  ~\ 


J  ihe  Priest'8 
Ya-n-malam  J 

Yaya-n-malam  the  priest's  daughters 

Yaya-n-malamai  the  daughters  of  the  priests 

Akwia-r-bako  the  stranger's  she-goat 

Awaki-n-bako  the  stranger's  she-goats 

Mutume-n-sariki  the  chief's  man 

It  is  to  be  noted  that  the  accent  on  the  word  represent- 
ing the  object  possessed  is  changed,  as  — 

Yarinia  the  girl 

Yarinia-t-sariki  the  chief's  girl 

Another  way  of  expressing  the  genitive  is  the  use  of 
a  possessive  pronoun. 

Sariki  matansa         the  chief  his  wife 

Example  of  Nouns  in  apposition 

Bako  gari  ba  ka  zo  dadai  ba  A  strange  city  to  which  you  have 

never  before  come 


NOUN  47 

Dative 

To  express  the  dative  the  usual  prepositions  are  "  ga  " 
and  "  ma." 

Ya  fadi  ga  bature  or  Ya  fadi  ma  bature       He  said  to  the  white  man 
Ya  bayes  rua  ga  dokinsa  He  gave  water  to  his  horse 

If  a  place  name  is  mentioned  the  preposition  is  omitted — 

Ya  tafia  Kano         He  went  to  Kano 
Otherwise  it  is  inserted — 

Sun  tafi  ga  wani  gari         They  went  to  another  town 

After  the  verb  "  to  give,"  the  preposition  is  often 
omitted  and  the  position  of  accusative  and  dative  inter- 
changeable— 

Ba  yaro  keauta         Qive  the  boy  a  present 

Ba  da  uwalsa  Give  the  child  to  its  mother 

If  for  a  simple  noun  in  the  dative  case  there  is  sub- 
stituted a  series  of  nouns  in  apposition,  the  preposition 
may  still  be  dropped — 

Shi  ne  ya  fadi  ku  mutane  dan  Adam          He  it  is  who  speaks  to  you, 

you  sons  of  Adam 

Ablative 

It  is  not  always  possible  to  express  this  case  directly  in 
Hausa.  In  other  West  African  languages  the  difficulty  is 
even  greater,  and  from  the  English  point  of  view  a  circum- 
locution has  to  be  made  use  of,  as :  "  He  took-it-out  his 
hand  "  f or  "  He  took  it  from  him  "  ;  "  He  got  up  at  Kano 
he  went  Sokoto  "  for  "  He  went  from  Kano  to  Sokoto  "— 

Na  fi to  daga  Bornu  /  come  from  Bornu 

Yaushe  ka  samu  wotsika  gare-sa  ?  When  did  you  receive  the  letter 

from  him  ?  lit.,  towards 
him  (the  idea  of  motion 
being  represented  by 
"  samu  ") 

Compare  the  contrary  idea — 

Yaushe  ka  aike  wotsika  gare-sa  ?  When  did  you  send  the  letter 

to  him  ? 
Anema  dayawa  gare-sa  There  will  be  required  much 

from  (lit.,  towards)  him 


48  THE    HAUSA   LANGUAGE 

Locative  case 

The  equivalent  of  the  locative  is  effected  by  many  pre- 
positions of  place,  but  especially  by  "a" — 

Doki  shina  tsaye  a  huinya         The  horse  stands  in  the  road 

Baya-n-gida  behind  the  house 

A  baya-n-gida  behind  the  house  (but  more  emphati- 

cally in  one  locality  behind  the 
house) 


CHAPTER   III 
ADJECTIVE 

APART  from  numeral  adjectives,  which  will  be  treated 
separately,  the  adjective  is  of  two  kinds  —  simple  and 
compound. 

Simple  adjectives  show  gender  and  number,  but  not 
case. 

Compound  adjectives  do  so  also,  except  those  com- 
pounded with  "  da,"  which  show  neither. 

GENDER 

The  feminine  gender  is  formed  from  the  masculine  of 
simple  adjectives  by  the  addition  of  "  a,"  "  ia  "  ("  iya  "),  or 
"  ua  "  ("  uwa  ")  to  the  stem,  the  final  vowel  of  the  masculine 
form,  whatever  it  may  be,  being  dropped. 

In  compound  adjectives  either  the  same  rule  may  be 
followed  or  there  may  be  no  change,  but  in  the  single 
case  of  "  nagari,"  good,  there  is  an  initial  change. 

PLURAL 

In  the  plural  there  is  no  indication  of  gender  at  all. 
The  plural  is  formed  in  the  same  way  as  with  nouns,  but 
there  is  a  preference  for  the  vowel  "  u  "  as  a  termination. 

DERIVATION 

Simple  adjectives  are  those  which  cannot  be  derived 
from  other  parts  of  speech. 

49  P 


50 


THE    HAUSA   LANGUAGE 


Compound  adjectives  are  formed  from  nouns  with  the 
prefixes  "  na-,"  of,  "  mai-  "  =  owner,  "  mai-ras"  or  "ma-ras," 
the  contrary  of  "mai-,"  "  da- "  =  with,  and  "  babu-,"  without. 

In  addition  to  the  foregoing  the  present  and  past 
participles  are  treated  as  adjectives.  The  present 
participle  is  formed  by  "mai-"  or  "ma-"  being  prefixed 
to  the  verb  stem.  The  past  participle  is  formed  by  an 
amplification  of  the  stem. 


MASO. 

Algashi 

Baki 

Baba 


Banza 
Dainye 
Dogo 
Fan 

Gajere 

Gurgu 

Ja 

Karami 

Kankane 
Kadan 
Kakabra 
Kekashe 

Kore 
Mugu 
Rama, 
ramame 
Rawaya 
Sabo 
Shudi 
Tsofa 
Wofi 
Yofi 
Yarani 

Duka 


FEM. 


baka 
baba 


SIMPLE  ADJECTIVES 


algasai,  algasu 
babaku  (S),  babaki  (K) 
babuna,  mainya 


green 
black 


("baba"  is  in  reality  a  noun  meaning  greatness) 


banza 

banzaizai  (S),  banzayi  (S) 

worthless 

dainya 

dainyu,  dainyoyi 

fresh 

dogua 

dogaye  (S),  doguna  (K) 

tall 

fara 

farfaru  or  farfaru  (S),  farfare 

white 

(K),  faraye,  farare 

gajera  (S), 

gajeru,  gajerai 

short 

gajeria  (K) 

gurgua 

guragu 

lame 

ja 

jajaye 

red 

karama, 

karama,  karamai 

small 

karamia 

kankanwa 

kanana,  kankana  (K) 

small 

kadan 

kadan 

little,  few 

kakabra 

kabrara 

fat 

kekasa, 

kekasu 

dry,  dried 

kekasashia 

koria 

kworre 

green 

mugunia 

miyagu 

bad 

ramamia 

thin 

rawaya 

rawayu  (S),  rawayai  (S) 

yellow 

sabua 

sababi.  sabui 

new 

shudia 

shudodi,  shuduna 

light  blue 

tsofua 

tsofafi,  tsofi 

old 

wofi 

wofuna  (K) 

empty 

yofi 

yofaifai  (Zanf) 

empty 

yarana 

yaranai,  yaranoni  (both  S) 

ydlo  w 

dayawa 

many 

duka 

duka 

every,  all 

ADJECTIVE 


51 


COMPOUND  ADJECTIVES 

1.  Formed  with  "na,"  o/,  with  a  noun.  These  are  very 
few,  but  see,  also  ordinal  numerals,  which  are  formed  also 
by  this  method — 


Na-gari 
Na-kwarai 


ta-gari 
ta-kwarai 


na-gargaru 


good 
correct 


2.  Formed  with  "mai"=owwer  of,  and  a  noun.     The 
construction   is   obvious,    and    an    unlimited    number   of 
adjectives  can  be  made  in  this  way — 

FROM 

anfani  =  wse 

ar  aha = cheapness 

fadi= breadth 

gaskia= truth 

hankali=care,  etc. 

karifi  =  irow,  strength 

keao  =  beauty 

r&i=life 

tsada  =  dearness 

zuchia= heart 

zurufi= depth 

3.  The  contrary  of  the  foregoing  class  of  compound 
adjectives  is  formed  by  suffixing  the  particle  "  -rasa  "  to 
"  mai,"  and  an  equally  large  number  of  adjectives  can 
be  formed  in  this  way. 

For  "  mai-rasa  "  "  maras  "  x  is  often  used,  the  meaning 
being  the  same,  but  "  mairasa  "  is  not  changed  for  gender, 
whereas  "  maras  "  becomes  "  marashia  "  in  the  feminine — 


use.  and  FEM. 

PLURAL 

ENGLISH 

Mai-anfani 

masu-anfani 

useful 

Mai-araha 

masu-araha 

cheap 

Mai-fadi 

masu-fadi 

broad 

Mai-gaskia 

masu-gaskia 

true 

Mai-hankali 

masu-hankali 

prudent 

Mai-karifi 

masu-karifi 

strong 

Mai-keao 

masu-keao 

fine 

Mai-rai 

masu-rai 

living 

Mai-tsada 

raasu-tsada 

dear 

Mai-zuchia 

masu-zuchia 

brave 

Mai-zurufi 

masu-zurufi 

deep 

MASC. 

Mai-rasa-karifi 

Maras-kariii  or 

marashi-n-karifi 
Maras-hankali 
Maras-kachia 


FEM. 
mai-rasa-karifi 

marashia-karifi 
marashia-bankali 


PLURAL 
masu  -  rasa- 

karifi 
marasa-karifi 


ENGLISH 
powerless 

powerless 


marasa-hankali  foolish 
marasa-kachia  uncircumcised 

4.  "  Da,"  urith,  compounded  with  nouns,  makes  adjectives. 
These  adjectives  can  only  be  used  predicatively  and  never 
attributively.  They  are  without  any  idea  of  gender  and 


1  Often  pronounced  "  mara." 


52  THE    HAUSA   LANGUAGE 

number.     An  unlimited  number  of  adjectives  can  be  made 
in  this  way — 

Da-keao  fine  Da-hankali          careful 

Da-anfani  useful  Da-nauyi  heavy 

Da-araha  cheap  Da-rai  alive 

Da-bam  different         Da-yungwa         hungry 

Da-yawa  (shortened  to  diawa)  many 

The  opposite  of  these  meanings  is  effected  by  the  use 
of  "babu,"  without  (lit.,  "  ba,"  not;  "abu,"  a  thing)— 

Babu-keao  no  good 

Babu-anfani  useless 

PRESENT  PARTICIPLE 

The  present  participle  (so  -  called)  is  formed  by  the 
prefixes  "  mai- "  and  "  ma-,"  the  former  being  of  Sokoto 
origin,  the  latter  of  Kano.1  With  the  former  the  verb 
stem  remains  unchanged,  but  with  the  latter  the  stem 
is  changed  for  gender  and  number — 

ENGLISH 

working 
fasting 

lending 
borrowing 

,,         lending 
loving 


This  participle  is  further  treated  under  the  verb. 

PAST  PARTICIPLE 

The  past  participle  passive,  as  in  all  languages,  can  be 
used  as  an  adjective.  Its  formation  is  examined  under 
the  verb— 

MASC.  FEM.  PLURAL  ENGLISH 

Arare  araria  ararit  lent  or  borrowed 

Ramtache         ramtachia          ramtatu  „ 

The  formation  of  the  feminine  and  plural  is  strictly 
regular. 

1  According  to  Mischlich. 


MASO. 

FEM. 

PLURAL 

Mai-aiki 

mai-aiki 

masu-aiki 

Ma-aikachi 

ma-aikachia 

ma-aikata 

Mai-azumi 

mai-azumi 

masu-azumi 

Ma-azumchi 

ma-azumchia 

ma-azumta 

Mai-ara 

mai-ara 

masu-ara 

Mai-aro 

mai-aro 

masu-aro 

Ma-ari 

ma-aria 

ma-ara 

Mai-so 

mai-so 

masu-so 

Ma-soyi 

ma-soyia 

ma-soya, 

masowa 

ADJECTIVE  53 

USE  OF  NOUNS  AS  ADJECTIVES 

Names  of  countries  ending  in  "  -chi "  can  be  used  as 
adjectives,  but  unchanged  for  gender  or  number — 

Hausanchi  Hausa 

Larabachi  (K),  Larabanchi  (S)  Arab 

Fulanchi  Fula 

Turanchi  European 

Sudanchi  African 

As 

Magana  larabachi  Arab  speech 

Daki-n-sudanchi  Soudanese  hut 

Dakuna-n-sudanchi  Soudanese  huts  (houses) 
but 

Biga-1-hausa  Hausa  cloth 

Riguna-n-hausa  Hausa  cloths 

For  living  things  these  forms  are  not  used.  The  personal 
forms  are  used  in  apposition,  and  show  gender  and  number — 

Doki  ba-larabe  Arab  horse 

Dawaki  larabawa  Arab  horses 

Rago  ba-haushe  Hausa  ram 

Raguna  hausawa  Hausa  rams 

Akwia  hausa  Hausa  she-goat 

Awaki  hausawa  Hausa  she-goats 
or  awaki  hausa 

REDUPLICATION 

Simple  adjectives  can  be  reduplicated.  Their  meaning 
may  be  in  some  cases  emphasised  thereby,  but  equally 
the  idea  to  be  conveyed  is  "  somewhat "  or  "  something 
like."  This  can  be  best  seen  from  examples — 

Kadan  kadan         very  little  or  very  small 
but 

Yaro  mugu  mugu  shi  ke  =  Shina  He  is  like  a  bad  boy 

kaman  yaro  mugu 

Dogo    dogo     shi     ke    =  =    Shina  He  is  tallish 

kaman  dogo 

Sabo  sabo  shi  ke  =  Shina  kaman  sabo  It  is  like  a  new  one 

Baki-baki  blackish  or  dark  bluish 

Bakin  kerrin  very  black 

Fari-fari  whitish  or  grey 

Ja-ja  reddish 

Shudi-shudi  light  bluish 

Kore-kore  light  green 

NOTE. — The  masculine  singular  form  seems  alone  to  be  used. 


54  THE   HAUSA   LANGUAGE 

Compare  also — 

Kul  kusa  very  near 

Ina  da  wata  turuba  keokeowa  /  have  (know)  another  path,  a 

very  good  one 

SYNTAX 

1.  When  the  adjective  is  used  attributively  it  may 
either  follow  the  noun  it  qualifies,  agreeing  with  it  in 
gender  and  number,  or  it  may  precede  the  noun  with  the 
copulative  preposition  "  n  "  ("  na  "),  of,  agreeing  in  gender 
and  number.  With  the  latter  method,  however,  the 
plural  is  less  commonly  found. 

Examples  of  adjective  following 

MASCULINE   SINGULAR. 

Ta  gani  gida  maikeao  She  saw  a  fine  house 

Kai  mutum  maigaskia  ne  You  are  a  man  of  truth 

Ta  sa  zane  maizinaria  ?  Does  she  put  on  garments  of  gold  ? 

Minene    dawa  ?     Wani  iri-n-ja-  What  is  guinea  corn  ?      A   small 

n-kwaya  kankane    (Note  con-  kind  of  grain 

struction  with  two  adjectives) 

Ta  zuba  rua  kadan  She  poured  out  a  little  water 

Suka   sa   ta    chiki-n-wani   daki  They  put  her  into  an  unpleasant 

babu  keao  room 

Mutum    maras-kurdi     kama-  n-  A  poor  man  is  like  a  king  with- 

sariki  maras-karifi  shi  ke  out  power 

FEMININE    SINGULAR 

Mache    tagari     tana     kula    da  A  good    woman  takes  care  of  her 

iyalinta  family 

Ke  dia  takwarai  che  You  are  a  good  daughter 

Mache    mai-azume  tana   zamne  A  fasting  woman  sits  yonder 

chan 


Dia-n-itache  ninanu  anchiresu  The  ripe  fruits  are  plucked 

Ki  ba  su  dia-n-durumi  ninanu  Give  them    the    ripe  fruits    of   the 

"  durumi  "  tree 

Dawaki  masugudu  suna  chan  Yonder  are  galloping  horses 

Ga  dawaki  masugudu  chan  See  the  horses  galloping  there 

Bature  dayawa  ya  mutu    (Note  Many  white  men  died 
the  construction) 


ADJECTIVE  55 

Examples  of  adjectives  preceding  noun  : — 


MASCULINE   SINGULAR 

Baba  -  n  -  mutum  ba  shi  yi  -  n  -  A  great  man  would  not  do  so 

hakka 

Nauyi-n-kaya-n-nan  ya  fi  kari-  This  heavy  load  is  too  much  for  me 

fina 

Ni  karami-n-yaro  gara  ka  bani  I  am  a  small  boy  ;  you  ought  to  give 

karami-n-kaya  me  a  small  load 

Bani  tafasashe-n-rua  Give  me  boiled  water 

Ya  kai  su  ga  dogo-n-daji  He  led  them  to  a  large  forest 

Ya  kasshie  baba-n-bunsuru  He  killed  a  large  he-goat 

Karifi  -  n  -  mache   sai  yawa  -  n  -  The  strength  of  a  woman  is  much 

magana  (proverb)  talk 

Duka-n-mutane   suka   gan'    shi  All  men  saw  him  going 

yana  tafia 


PLURAL 

Wani  iri  -  n  -  abinchi  babake  -  n-     What  kind  of  food  do  black  men 
n  i  ut  a  in-  su  ke  chi  ?  eat  ? 

2.  The   possessive  pronoun  is  appended  to  the  noun, 
not  to  the  adjective — 

Ta  tafi  ga  wuri-n-ta  dafari  enda     She    went    to   the  first    place    she 

ta  fito  had  come  from 

Ya  che  ga  dia-r-sa  baba  He  said  to  his  eldest  daughter  (lit., 

he  said  to  his  daughter — the  big 

one) 

3.  "  Duka,"  which  has  no  feminine  nor  plural  form,  can 
be  attached  to  either  a  singular  or  plural  noun — 

Ya  fi  gida  duka  It  surpasses  every  house 

Gari  duka  ya  mutu  The.  whole  town  died 

Abu  duka  da  ni  ke  da  shi  ya  He  has  received  everything  I  had 
karba 

See  also  example  in  par.  1. 

Rana  duka  All  day 

Sun  tafi  duka  They  have  all  gone 


56 


THE    HAUSA   LANGUAGE 


Predicative  Use  of  the  Adjective 

The  verb  "  to  be  "  is  employed,  the  form  "  ne  "  being 
enclitic,  as  also  is  its  feminine  form  "  che "  ;  but  the 
form  "  ke  "  is  used  with  a  pronoun — 


Ni  talaka  ne 
Daki-n-nan  kankane  ne 
Karre  da  kurege  ramamu  su  ke 
Masa  -  n  -  nan   antoya   su  ?    ii, 

toyayu  ne 
Ba  duka  mutane  su  ke  miagu  ba 


/  am  poor 

This  room  is  small 

The  dog  and  the  fox  were  lean 

Are  these  cakes  baked  ?     Yes,  they 

are  baked 
Not  all  men  are  bad 


All  adjectives  formed  with  "  da,"  being  from  their  nature 
only  predicative,  the  verb  "  to  be  "  is  usually  implied. 

The  form  of  pronoun  that  is  used  is  that  ending  in 
"na"  for  the  most  part.  It  is  to  be  noted  that  in  the 
negative  form  the  "  na  "  is  cast  off— 


Shina  da  keao 

Suna  dabam 

Bisa  tana  da  rai  tukun 

Shina  da  araha  (tsada) 

Doki  maigudu  shina  da  anfani 

kwarai 

Ba  ni  da  yungwa 
Ba  shi  da  nauyi  kama-n-saura- 

n-kaya 


It  is  fine  (lit.,  It  is  with  fineness) 

They  are  different 

The  animal  is  still  alive 

It  is  cheap  (dear) 

A    horse  which  gallops  well  is  of 

great  use 
I  am  not  hungry 
It  is  not  heavy  like  the  rest  of  the 

loads 


Circumlocution  to  avoid  Use  of  Adjectives 

In  most  West  African  languages  it  is  found  that  the 
number  of  adjectives  is  very  small. 

They  are  numerous  in  Hausa,  but,  nevertheless,  many 
compound  words  which  are  treated  as  adjectives  are 
readily  divisible  into  their  component  parts  which  are 
not  adjectives,  and  any  idea  that  an  adjective  is  being 
made  use  of  can  be  cast  aside. 

Besides  the  use  of  "  da,"  the  two  commonest  methods 
in  Hausa  for  expressing  the  equivalent  of  the  adjective 
is  the  use  of  the  preposition  "gare,"  to,  towards,  with 
a  noun,  and  to  use  the  verb  "yi  "  also  with  a  noun.  The 


ADJECTIVE 


57 


verb  "ji,"  to  hear,  feel,  is  also  so  used,  but  to  a  more 
limited  extent : — 

Gare 


Abinchi-n-nan  zafi  gare  shi  for 
Abinchi-n-nan  shina  da  zafi 

Zuma  dadi  gare  ta 

Mutume-n-wofi  ba  ya  taba  fada- 
n-gaskia  ba,  reshi  -  n  -  kumia 
gare  shi 


This  food  is  hot 

Honey  is  sweet 

A  worthless  man  never  speaks  the 
truth  ;  he  is  shameless 


Yi 


Na  yi  murna 
Ya  yi  mini  kunche 
Ruanga   shina   da   zafi,    bai  yi 
sanyi  ba 

Na  ji  dadi 


/  am  glad  (lit.,  I  make  joy) 
It  is  (too)  narrow  for  me 
This  water  is  hot,  and  not  cold 


Ji 


I  am  happy  (lit.,  I  feel  sweetness) 


COMPARISON 

The  degrees  of  comparison  are  expressed  by  a  circum- 
locution in  Hausa  the  same  as  in  other  languages  in  West 
Africa. 

Comparative  Degree 


1.  Use  of  "fi,"  surpass,  with  an  abstract  noun. 


Ya  fi  ni  karifi 

Ya  fi  ni  da  karifi 
Doki  ya  fi  rago  girinia 
Ya    fi   shi   karami  or  ya  fi 
kankanta 


shi 


Ya  fi  kowa  girima 

Daki-n-nan   ya    fi    daki-n-chan 

girima 

Mi  kuna  so  ya  fi  wannan  ? 
Riga-1-nan  ta  fi  wachan  keao 
Dana  ya  fi  naka  tsawo,  amma 

naka  ya  fi  nawa  kauri 


Mutum  wand  a  ya  bi  ta  gaskia 
ya  fi  wanda  ke 
fari-n-zuchia 


,-a  fi  wanda  ke  ratso  hainya 


Shi  maifadda  ne,  amma  matasa 
ta  fi  shi  yawa-n-magana 


hr 


He   is    stronger    than    I    (lit., 

surpasses  me  (in)  strength) 
(Not  so  good  as  the  foregoing) 
A  horse  is  bigger  than  a  ram 
He  is  smaller  than  he     (The  latter 
is  the  more  correct  usage,  "  kan- 
kanta "  being  a  noun,  whereas 
"  karami "  is  an  adjective) 
He  is  greater  than  any  one 
This  room  is  bigger  than  that 

What  do  you  want  better  than  this  ? 

This  coat  is  better  than  that 

My  son    is  taller  than  yours,  but 

yours  is  stouter  than  mine 
The   man   who    pursues    truth    is 

happier    than    he    who    follows 

error 
He  is  a  quarrelsome  man,  but  his 

wife  can  wrangle  more  than  he 


58  THE    HAUSA   LANGUAGE 

Tafia  da  rana  ta  fi  tafia  da  fari-  Travelling  by  day  is  more  tiring 

n-wata  gajia  than  travelling  by  moonlight 

Minene  ka  ke  so  wanda  ya  fi  What  do  you  want  better  than  this  ? 
wannan  ? 

In  sentences  where  in  English  comparison  is  expressed 
by  adverbs,  "  fi "  with  an  abstract  noun  is  used  in 
Hausa — 

Da-n-chiako-n-zabua  ya  fi  da-n-  The  young  guinea-fowl  grows  more 
chiako-n-kaza  samli-n-girima  quickly  than  the  young  chicken 

(sainli  -  n  -  girima  =quickness   of 

growth) 
Jiki  ya  fi  kune  ji  (proverb)  The  body  hears  better  than  the  ear 

Ka  fi  shi  yi-n-chiniki,  don  You  trade  better  than  he,  for  this 
wannan  na  fi  sonka  da  shi  reason  I  prefer  you  to  him 

Note  also— 
Allah  akber  da  ku  God  is  more  powerful  than  you 

2.  To  compare  ideas,  not  things,  the  words  "  gara " 
and  "guma"  ("gwoma")  are  used;  also  "gwanda"  in  a 
similar  sense  in  Kano  principally — 

Gara  hakka  It  is  better  so 

Guma  yao  da  jia  Better  to-day  than  yesterday 

Da  na  yi  karia  gara  en  mutu  /  would  rather  die  than  tell  a  lie 

Da  na  amre  shi  guma  mugu-n-  Rather  than  marry  him  may  an  evil 

chiwo  ya  kama  ni  sickness  seize  me 

Da  babu  wawa  gwanda  da  wawa  It  is  better  to  have  a  fool  than  no 

(proverb)  one 

3.  "  Better "  as  applied  to  health  is  expressed  by  the 
nouns  "dama"  and  "rongomi"  with  "ji,"  to  feel. 

Ka  ji  dama  ya  fi  jia  ?  Do  you  feel  better  than  yesterday  ? 

Na  ji  rongomi  yao  /  feel  better  to-day 

Na  ji  dama  yanzu  ;    zazabi  ya  /  feel  better  now  ;  the  fever  has  left 

sake  ni  me 

Ka  ji  dama  kadan  ?  Do  you  feel  a  little  better  ? 

Shi   talaka   ne,    ni   ma,   ina  da  He   is   a  poor   man,    but   I    have 

kurdi  da  dama  money  in  moderation 

4.  To   express   the   English    "too"   with   an   adjective 
several  methods  are  adopted  : — 

(a)  Combination  of  the    material  particle    "  ma " 
with  the  verb  "  fi,"  to  surpass — 

Mafi  kunche  Too  narrow 


ADJECTIVE  59 

(6)  "  Yi,"  to  do,  followed  by  the  preposition  "  ma  "- 

Ya  yi  mini  (for  ma  ni)  wuya  It  is  too  difficult  for  me 

Kurdi-n-sa  ia  yi  mini  yawa  The  price  is  too  much  for  me 

The  meaning  of  "  very  "  is  equally  conveyed  — 
Tsia  ta  yi  masa  yawa     He  was  very  poor 

(c)  By  the  use  of  "fi." 

Ya  fi  ni  wuya  It  is  too  difficult  for  me 

Nauyi  -  n  -  kaya  -  n  -  nan   ya    fi     This  heavy  load  is  too  much  for  my 
karifina  strength 

(d)  By  the  verb  "  faskare,"  overcome,  etc. — 

Ya  faskare  ni  dauka  It  is  too  heavy  for  me  to  lift  (lit., 

It  is  beyond  my  strength  (to)  lift) 

Babu  abinda  ya  faskare  mutane     Nothing    is   too    difficult    for    the 
Engliz  English 

5.  The   verb  "faye,"  exceed,  is  used  as  an  equivalent 
for  "  fi."     It  may  also  be  translated  "  very  "  or  "  too  " 

Yara  sun  faye  da  worigi  The  boys  were  very  fond  of  play 

Gidanga  ya  faye  kankanta  This  house  is  too  small 

Ka  fayi  barikonchi  You  jest  too  much 

6.  "Too"  and  "very"  may  also  be  expressed  by  the 
preposition  "gare,"  towards  — 

Abinchi-n-nan  zafi  gareshi  This  food   is   hot    (implying    too 

hot  to  eat) 

It  may  here  be  observed  that  where  in  English  words 
of  a  comparative  force  are  used,  in  African  languages 
exactly  the  same  meaning  is  conveyed  by  merely  making  a 
positive  statement,  of  which  the  foregoing  is  an  example. 

7.  "  More  "  used  absolutely  in  English  can  be  expressed 
by  the  noun  "  kari,'  abundance. 

Ba  na  so  kari ;  ya  issa  /  do  not  want  more  ;  it  is  enough 

8.  "Yi,"do,  may  also  be  used  in  the  sense  of  "equal  to"- 

K  m  .1  ta  fi   (hum's. i   karifi-n-jiki,     The   hyaena   is   stronger    than    the 
amma  ba  ta  yi  ita  hanzeri  ba         leopard,  but  is  not  equal  to  her 

in  activity 


60  THE    HAUSA   LANGUAGE 

Superlative  Degree 
The  superlative  degree  is  expressed  by  :— 

1.  "  Fi,"  to  surpass,  followed  by  "duka,"  all— 

Ya  fi  duka  karifi  He  is  the  strongest  (lit.,  He  excels 

all  (in)  strength) 
Mutume  -  n  -  nan    ya    fi    duka     This  man  is  the  cleverest  of  all 

hankali 

Allah  yi  fi  duka  girima  God  is  the  greatest  of  all 

Wannan  ya  fi  duka  nauyi  This  is  the  heaviest 

2.  By  "  gaba-n-duka  da,"  before  all— 

Yana    (or   shi  ne)   gaba-n-duka     He  is  the  strongest 

da  karifi 
Shi  ne  gaba-n-su  duka  He  is  the  greatest 

3.  By  "gaba  ga  duka,"  before  all — 

Amma  Tebib  shina  da  bara,  shi     But  Tebib  had  a  servant  who  was 
ne   baba   gaba    ga    baruansa         chief  of  all  the  servants 
duka 

4.  By  "  ga,"  to,  only— 

Yana    (or   shi  ne)   da   karifi  ga     He  is  strongest 
duka 

5.  A  reduplicated  form   of  "fi"  is  sometimes  used  in 
forming  either  comparative  degree  or  superlative — 

Wannan  mafifichi  daga  wadanan     This  (is)  the  best  of  these 

6.  The  word  "very"  in  English  maybe  expressed  by 
"  faye,"  and  in  other  ways  as  seen  under  the  comparative — 
Makafi  sun  faye  talauchi  Blind  men  are  very  poor 

It  may  also  be  expressed  by  reduplication — 
Kadan  kadan  Very  little 

NUMERALS 

The  Cardinals 
(Those  given  first  are  in  commonest  use) 

1  Daia  (pronounced  generally  "  dea  "),  guda 

2  Biu 

3  Uku 


ADJECTIVE  61 

4  Fudu  (hudu  in  Katsina  dialect) 

5  Biar,  bial,  biat  (in  Sokoto) 

6  Shidda 

7  Bokoi.     Written  bakoi 

8  Tokos.     Written  takos 

9  Tara 

10  Goma 

11  Goma  sha  daia  or,  in  continuous  counting,  "  sha  daia  "  for  short 

12  Goma  sha  biu  or  sha  biu 

13  Goma  sha  uku  or  sha  uku 

14  Goma  sha  fudu  or  sha  fudu 

15  Goma  sha  biar  or  sha  biar 

16  Goma  sha  shidda  or  sha  shidda 

17  Goma  sha  bokoi  or  sha  bokoi 

18  Ashirin  biu  babu  or  ashirin  gaira  biu 

19  Ashirin  daia  babu  or  ashirin  gaira  daia  or  babu  daia 

20  Ashirin,  ishirin ;  hauya ;  laso  (S)  ;  gomia  biu 

21  Ashirin  da  daia 

22  Ashirin  da  biu 

28  Talatin  biu  babu 

29  Talatin  daia  babu 

30  Talatin;  gomia  uku;  laso  da  goma ;  hauya  da  goma 
40  Arbain  ;  gomia  fudu 

50  Hamsin 
60  Sittin 
70  Sebbain 
80  Tamanin 
90  Tissain 

The  foregoing  decades  can  also  be  constructed  with  gomia,  laso, 
and  hauya 

98  Dari  gaira  biu  ;  dari  biu  babu 

99  Dari  gaira  daia  or  dari  daia  babu 
100  Dari  (deri) ;  mia ;   minya ;  zangu 
150  Mia  wa  hamsin  or  dari  da  hamsin 
200  Metin;   me  tain     (Not  dari  biu) 
300  Dari  uku 

400  Arba  mia ;  arba  minya 

500  Hamsa  mia ;  hamsa  minya ;  dari  biar 

600  Dari  shidda 

700  Dari  bokoi 

800  Dari  tokos 

900  Alu  gaira  mia 

1,000  Dubu  ;  alif  ;  zambar  (rare) ;  zangu  goma 
1,100  Alu  wa  minya 
1,200  Alu  wa  metin 
1,300  Dubu  (or  alif)  da  dari  uku 
1,400  Alu  wa  arba  mia 
1,500  Alu  wa  hamsa  mia  (or  minya) 
1,600  Dubu  da  dari  shidda 
1,700  Dubu  da  dari  bokoi 


62  THE    HAUSA    LANGUAGE 

1,800  Alfin  gaira  me  tin 

1,900  Alfin  gaira  minya  (or  mia) ;  alfin  gaira  dari 

2,000  Alfin;  alfain  ;  zambar  biu     (Not  dubu  biu) 

3,000  Talata ;  zambar  uku 

4,000  Arba  ;  zambar  f  udu 

5,000  Hamsa ;  zambar  biar 

6,000  Sitta  ;  zambar  shidda 

7,000  Sebaa ;  zambar  bokoi 

8,000  Tamania ;  zambar  tokos 

9,000  Tessaa ;  zambar  tara 

10,000  Zambar  goma 

100,000  Zambar  dari 

200,000  Zambar  metin 

1,000,000  Zambar  dubu :  zambar  alif 


(1)  Notes  on  the  Cardinals 

Guda. — The  word  "guda"  means  head  or  unit.  It  is 
often  used  together  with  the  .other  numerals  below  ten,  as 
well  as  being  used  alone  instead  of  "daia,"  as — "guda 
daia"  or  "guda"  simply,  1;  "gudu  uku,"  3;  ashirin 
da  guda  biar,  25.  (See  further  under  syntax  of  numerals.) 

Goma  sha  daia,  etc. — In  counting  the  "goma"  is  com- 
monly omitted  for  brevity,  a  feature  which  is  also  found 
in  most  other  West  African  languages  where  the  expres- 
sion is  too  long  or  cumbersome. 

Ashirin  biu  babu. — The  two  numbers  next  below  the 
decades  are  expressed  by  using  "  babu,"  nothing  or  without, 
or  "gaira,"  less,  as— "talatin  daia  babu,"  29;  "dari  gaira 
biu,"  98.  This  system  is  also  applied  to  the  two  decades 
below  the  hundreds  after  the  first  hundred,  as  "metin 
gaira  ashirin,"  180. 

Hauya. — The  meaning  is  a  score,  and  it  is  only  used  in 
counting  cowries,  as — "  hauya  biu,"  40 ;  "  hauya  uku,"  60. 

Laso,  20,  is  also  used  in  counting  cowries. 

Zangu,  100 — Used  in  counting  cowries. 

Gomia. — The  pure  Hausa  plural  form  of  "goma."  It 
was  the  form  in  use  before  the  introduction  and  common 
acceptance  of  the  Arabic  forms  for  all  numerals  between 
20  and  100.  It  is  still  preferred  among  parts  of 
the  population  that  have  come  less  under  the  Arabic 
influence  and  are  uneducated.  The  merchants,  educated 


ADJECTIVE  63 

persons,  mallams,  etc.,  naturally  affect  the  Arabic  forms 
for  preference. 

Kororo. — This  word  is  used  south  and  west  of  Zaria  to 
denote  a  bag  containing  20,000  cowries. 

Numerals  of  Arabic  Origin.  —  In  some  of  the  higher 
numerals  the  Arabic  form  has  so  far  taken  the  place  of 
the  pure  Hausa  forms  that  it  is  quite  incorrect  to  use  the 
latter,  which  are  obsolete.  This  applies,  amongst  others, 
to  the  numerals  200,  400,  900. 

Compound  Numbers. — The  rule  for  forming  compound 
numbers  is  to  place  the  largest  numbers  first  and  connect 
each  succeeding  numeral  by  inserting  "  da,"  and,  as — "  dubu 
da  dari  tokos  da  ashirin  da  daia,"  1821.  The  only  excep- 
tion is  that  " sha "  takes  the  place  of  "da  "  from  11  to  17. 

Wa  is  the  Arabic  for  "  and."  It  is  used  when  all  the 
numerals  are  of  Arabic  origin. 

(2)  Cardinal  Numerals — Gender  and  Number 

The  cardinal  numerals  do  not  vary  for  gender,  but  those 
up  to  ten  can  take  a  plural  form  on  rare  occasions.  The 
plurals  are : — 

Daia  none  Shidda  shidodi 

Biu  biunai  Bokoi  bakoa 

Uku  ukoki  Tokos  takoshi 

Fudu  fudodi  Tara  tarori 

Biar  biani  Goma  gomia 

(3)  Combination  of  Cardinal  Numerals  with  Personal 
Pronouns 

Daia-n-mu  or  daia-mu  one  of  us 

Biu-n-mu  two  of  us 

Uku-n-mu  three  of  us 

Fudu-n-mu  four  of  us 

Biani-n-mu  five  of  us 

Shidda-n-mu  six  of  us 

Bakoa- n-mu  seven  of  us 

Takoshi-n-mu  eight  of  us 

Tara-n-mu  nine  of  us 

Goma-n-mu  ten  of  us 

Ashirini-n-mu  twenty  of  us 

Hamsini-n-mu  fifty  of  us 


64  THE    HAUSA   LANGUAGE 

Tissaini-n-mu  ninety  of  us 

Dari-n-mu  or  darini-n-mu          a  hundred  of  us 
Alifi-n-mu  a  thousand  of  us 

"  Ku  "  you,  "  su,"  them,  may  be  substituted  for  "  mu  "  as  necessary, 
as — 

Daia-n-ku         one  of  you  daia-n-su         one  of  them 

Biu-n-su  two  of  them 

For  the  numbers  above  "  two,"  however,  it  would  seem 
to  be  better,  and  certainly  more  usual,  to  use  a  more 
extended  phrase,  as — 

Fudu  daga  chiki-n-ku  four  of  you 

Biu  daga  chiki-n-mu  two  of  us 

Daia-n-su  shina  chewa  wannan  One  of  them  was  saying  this  meat 

na  ma  da  kiba  is  fat 

When  the  cardinal  number  represents  the  whole  of  the 
assemblage  instead  of  a  portion,  as  above,  the  suffix  "  -di " 
is  added. 

Daiadi-n-nan  this  one 

Biudi-n-nan  these  two 

Duka  ukudi-n-nan  all  three  of  these 

Fududi-n-su  the  four  of  them 

Biardi  the  five 

Shiddadi  the  six 

Bokoidi  the  seven 

Tokosdi  the  eight 

Taradi  the  nine 

Gomadi  the  ten 

Daridi  the  hundred 

Dubudi  the  thousand 

(4)  Syntax  of  Cardinal  Numerals 

The  cardinal  numerals  usually  follow  the  noun  they 
qualify.  The  noun  as  a  rule  takes  the  plural  form,  though 
this  is  not  invariably  the  practice,  and  the  numeral  "  two  " 
especially  almost  invariably  follows  the  noun  in  the  singular 
number. 

If  the  numeral  precedes,  it  on>y  does  so  in  such  cases  as 
those  given  hi  the  previous  paragraph,  and  "  n  "  is  used  as 
a  copulative. 

Mutum  biu  two  men 

Shina  da  bindiga  da  baki  biu         He  has  a  double-barrelled  gun 

Ka    ani  awaki  talatin  Give  me  thirty  goats 


ADJECTIVE  65 

Ki    kawo    mini    moda    zinaria  Bring  me  a  million  gold  cups 

zambar  dubu 

Ina   tamaha   mutane    da   suka  /  think  the  people  who  were  caught 

kama  tare  da  ni  ba  su  fi  ba  with  me  were  not  more  than  two 

dari  biu  ko  dari  uku  or  three  hundred 

Na  gani  taguaye  biu  anyashie  /  saw  two  twin  children  thrown  on 

su  bisa  hainya  suna  kuka  the  road  crying 

Rakuminmu  daia  One  of  our  camels 

Su  duka  biu  sun  mutu  The  two  of  them  died 

After  such  nouns  as  those  compounded  with  "mai"  a 
simple  noun  may  be  inserted  before  the  numeral — 

Masu-gaskia  mutum  ashirin  da  daia  Twenty-one  righteous  men 

When  the  noun  is  qualified  by  both  an  adjective  and  a 
cardinal  numeral,  the  numeral  may  be  placed  immediately 
after  the  noun  with  the  adjective  next,  the  latter  being 
treated  as  in  apposition  to  the  noun — 

Ido-n-sa  daia,  mai-girima,  ga  One  of  his  eyes,  a  large  one,  was 

tsaka-n-hanchi  on  the  middle  of  the  nose 

Muka  tafi  da  barua  -  n  -  Tebib  We  went  with  two  of  Tebib's  servants, 

biu,  da  bara-n-sariki  tare  da  and  with  the  king's  servant,  lo- 

bawa-n-sa  daia,  kuruma  gether  with  a  slave  who  was  deaf 

Guda. — The  following  are  examples  of  the  uses  of  "guda," 
one — 

Guda  nawa  ?  How  many  ? 

Kwoi  guda  nawa  na  sayerua  ne  ?  How  many  eggs  are  there  for  sale  ? 

Guda  .  .  .  guda  One  ,  .  .  another 

Shi  do  guda,  guda  ta  tsire  (//)  he  takes  one,  the  other  escapes 

Guda  guda  =  daia  daia  One  at  a  time 

Daia. — "  Daia,"  when  used  correlatively,  corresponds  with 
the  expression  "the  one  .  .  .  the  other "- 

Mache  daia  tana  da  dukia  da-  One  woman  had  much  property, 
yawa,  mache  daia  tana  da  the  other  woman  had  but  little 
dukia  kadan  property 

"  Daia  "  can  also  be  translated  "  the  same  " — 

Mu  duka  muka  zamna  ga  wuri  daia      We  all  sat  at  the  same  place 
Su  duka  daia  ne  They  are  all  the  same 


66  THE    HAUSA   LANGUAGE 

"  Daia  "  can  never  be  used  independently  as  a  noun  as 
it  may  be  in  English.  A  concrete  noun  must  always 
be  added — 

Mutum  daia  shina  kora  mutum     One   man  is  driving  two  before 
biu  him 

The  cardinals  can  be  used  as  adverbs. 

Ya  yi  kuka  daia.     Ya  yi  kuka     He  cried  out  once.     He  cried  out 
biu  twice.    This  is  literally  He  made 

one  cry,  etc. 
Na  ji  daia  daia  /  understand  a  little 

The  verb  "  to  be  "  is  used  with  numerals  as  follows — 

Kurdinsa    ba  su    dayawa ;    zam     Its    price    is    not    much ;    it    is 
bar  dari  da  hamsin  ne  150,000  cowries 

( 100,050 =zambar  dari  da  guda  hamsin) 

5.  Etymology  of  Numerals 

Taking  the  languages  of  West  Africa  as  a  whole,  the 
commonest  system  of  numeration  is  on  a  base  of  five, 
more  or  less  disguised  or  evident,  with  the  higher  numbers 
on  the  basis  of  twenties  (scores). 

The  Hausa  numeration,  on  the  other  hand,  is  purely 
denary,  like  several  languages  to  the  southward  of  it  and 
to  the  south-eastward.  In  Hausa,  though  the  introduction 
of  the  Arabic  has  dispossessed  many  of  the  purely  indigenous 
names,  the  older  names  are  still  used  for  counting  cowries, 
which  it  is  more  convenient  to  deal  with  in  twenties — that 
is,  the  sum  of  all  the  fingers  and  toes,  making  "  one  man 
complete." 

The  following  are  the  etymologies  of  most  of  the 
numerals : — 

Daia. — Uncertain  and  difficult  to  trace,  as  is  the  word 
for  "one"  in  very  many  languages. 

Guda. — Compare  "gudio"  in  Doai;  "gade"  in  Bode; 
"gadsi"  in  Ngodsin. 

Biu.— Compare  "  ful "  in  Ron ;  "  vul "  in  Sura ;  "  bolo  " 
in  Bolanchi ;  "  vuel "  in  Montol ;  "  vel "  in  Ankwe ;  "  flo  " 
in  Gurka ;  "  bab  "  in  Angas. 

Uku. — Compare  "kun"  ("  kul ")  in  Sura  "kun"  in 
Montol,  Ankwe,  and  Gurka  ;  "  kunu  "  in  Bolanchi,  Tangale, 


ADJECTIVE  67 

and  Awok;  "kwan"  in  Angas ;  "koan"  in  Ngodsin; 
"akoan"  in  Bode;  "ko"  in  Doai;  "kuji  "  in  Buta. 

Fudu. — Compare  "fudu"  in  Ngodsin,  Doai,  and  Bode; 
"fudi"  in  Buta;  "fodo"  in  Bolanchi ;  "pu"  in  Ron; 
"feir"  in  Sura;  "fer"  in  Ankwe  and  Montol;  "fier" 
in  Angas. 

Biar.— Compare  "  beddi "  ("  badi ")  in  Bolanchi ;  "  pad  " 
("pat")  in  Sura;  "pad"  in  Montol,  Ankwe;  "pfad"in 
Doai;  "fad"  in  Ngodsin;  "pate"  in  Angas;  "puat"  in 
Tangale  and  Awok. 

Shidda. — Of  Arabic  origin. 

Bokoi  (bakoi). — If  the  numerals  seven  and  eight,  as  well 
as  sometimes  six  and  nine,  are  examined  in  the  languages 
mentioned  in  connection  with  the  foregoing  numerals,  it 
is  found  that  the  following  syllables  represent  "  five "  : 
Sura,  "po";  Bolanchi,  "bau,"  "bo";  Montol,  "pa"; 
Ankwe,  "po,"  "pu";  Angas,  "po."  There  is  in  these 
syllables  some  similarity  to  "ba"  in  "bakoi,"  but  this 
syllable  is  not  found  in  Hausa  in  any  other  numeral.  As 
to  the  second  syllable  in  "  bokoi,"  it  seems  to  have  no 
relationship  anywhere. 

Tokos. — No  sure  etymology  seems  to  offer  itself  for  this 
numeral  either.  "To"  is  the  root  for  "five"  in  the 
BaNtu  languages,  and  "kos"  may  be  connected  with 
"uku."  It  would  require  to  be  explained,  though,  how 
a  BaNtu  root  should  have  come  in. 

Tar  a, .  — Nothing . 

Goma. — Compare  "guma"  in  Ngodsin;  "goma"  in 
Doai ;  "  guamo  "  in  Tangale. 

The  decades  twenty  to  ninety  are  all  of  Arabic  origin, 
but  little  changed. 

Dari  is  a  pure  Hausa  word. 

Minya  and  mia. — Both  of  Arabic  origin. 

Zangu. — Uncertain. 

Metin  and  metain. — Arabic. 

Dubuis  also  found  in  Kanuri  as  "dubu";  "debu"  in 
Teda,  Bagirmi,  Longone,  Mandara ;  and  "thba"  in  Coptic. 

Alif. — Arabic. 

Ziambar. — Compare  "  diomber  "  in  Songhay. 

A  Ifin.— Arabic. 


68  THE    HAUSA   LANGUAGE 


OBDINAL  NUMBERS 

The  ordinal  numbers  are  formed  by  prefixing  the 
genitive  particle  to  the  cardinals,  "na"  for  the  masculine, 
"ta"  for  the  feminine  (there  being  no  plural),  with  one 
exception. 

This  exception  is  "  the  first,"  and,  as  is  customary  in  most 
languages,  West  African  included,  it  is  not  formed  from 
the  word  "  one."  In  Hausa  the  word  "  na-fari "  is  derived 
from  the  verb  "fara,"  to  begin — 

MASC.  FEM.  ENGLISH 

na-fari  ta-fari  first 

na-biu  ta-biu  second 

na-uku  ta-uku,  etc.  third 

As  in  other  West  African  languages,  after  "ten,"  when 
the  numerals  become  compound  words,  the  ordinal  form  is 
commonly  dropped,  and  the  cardinals  are  reverted  to. 

Connected  with  the  ordinal  numbers  and  formed  in  the 
same  way  are  some  adjectives — 

MASC.  FEM.  ENGLISH 

Na-baya  ta-baya  last 

Na-gaba  ta-gaba  foremost 

Na-tsaka  ta-tsaka  middle 

Na-bisa  ta-bisa  upper 

Na-kasa  ta-kasa  lower 

Also 

Farko        first  Karshe         last 

Examples  of  Syntax  of  Ordinals 

Na  zamna  ga  wurina  na-fari  /  sat  down  in  my  place  first 

Mutum  uku  su  tashi,  biu  daga  Let  three  men  get  up,  two  of  them 

chiki-n-su  su  dauko  rua,  na-  to  draw  water,  the  third  one  to 

uku-n-su  shi  nemo  itache  fetch  wood 

Farko-n-dawaki  The  first  of  the  horses 

Karshe- n-dawaki  The  last  of  the  horses 

Da   sunka   ketare    daia,   biu,   a  When  they  had  crossed  one,  two,  at 

na-uku  sunka  issa  wuri-n-kasa  the  third  they  reached  dry  land 

Yaro  ya  yi  sukua  rakumi   so-  The  boy  galloped   the  camel  three 

uku,    a   na-fudu   ya   tafo    ya  times,  at  the  fourth  he  came,  he 

dauki  yarinia  ya   ajieta  bisa  took  up  the  girl,  he  put  her  on 

rakuininsa  his  camel 


ADJECTIVE  69 

ADVERBIAL  NUMBERS  OR  MULTIPUCATIVES 

These  are  formed  by  prefixing  to  the  cardinals  "so," 
or,  as  it  is  sometimes  pronounced,  "  sau  " — 

So-daia        once  So-biu        twice  So-uku     three  times 

So-goma       ten  times        So-dari       hundred  times 

Derivation 

This  seems  to  be  the  same  word  as  "  sau,"  foot-print  or 
sole  of  the  foot,  and  so  in  combination  with  the  numerals 
it  acquires  the  idea  of  a  step.  Compare  the  corresponding 
use  in  Twi  of  "  peng,"  a  stroke ;  in  Mende  "  heima,"  sitting 
down;  in  Angas  "  shi,"  a  foot :  all  of  which  go  to  prove 
that  "  so  "  is  a  noun. 

Syntax 

So-daia  kuma  Once  again 

So-nawa  ka  tafi  Sokoto  ?  Na     How  often  have  you  been  to  Sokoto  ? 

tafi  Sokoto  so-uku  /  have  been  to  Sokoto  three  times 

Uku-uku  biu  nawa  ke  nan  ?  Twice  three  are  how  many  ? 

DISTRIBUTIVES 

The  distributive  numerals  are  formed  by  repeating  the 
cardinals — 

Ya  kedaya  shilling  goma  gotna  He  counted  them  out  by  ten  shillings 

(Kedaya  (S)=kirga  (K)) 

Ya   bada  riguna    biar  biar  ga  He  gave  five  cloths  to  each  of  the 

yara-n-sariki  chief's  sons 

Ya  aikesu  biu  biu  He  sent  them  two  by  two 

Ya  bada  daia  daia  ga  kowane-  He  gave  one  to  each  of  them 

n-su 

Kada  ka  kirga  kurdinka  shidda  Do  not  count  your  cowries  in  sixes 

shidda,  kirgasu  biar  biar  count  them  in  fives 

I'.iasn  dubu  dubu  Pay  them  a  thousand  each 

Examples  akin 

Nawa  nawa  ?  How  many  each  f 

Guda  nawa  T  How  many  f 

Kwoi   guda    nawa    na   saycrua  How  many  eggs  are  there  for  sale  ? 

ne  ? 

Nawa    nawa    anasayerua  T    (or  How  much  are  they  sold  for  each  f 

akesayesda  su) 


70  THE    HAUSA   LANGUAGE 

Nawa  anasayesda  su  ?  How  much  are  they  (as  a  whole)  ? 

Ni  kan    ba    ma-aikitana   kurdi  /  give  my  servants  two  hundred  and 

metin     da     hamsin     hamsin  fifty  cowries  each  daily 

kwana  daia  daia 

Massara  kurdinsa  goma  sha  bial  Indian  corn  is  fifteen  cowries  a-piece 

sha  bial  ne  kwanaki-n-damana  in  the  wet  season 

Doiya  guda  nawa  ka  sayo  ?    Ta  How   many   yams    did    you    buy  ? 

dari    uku   a   baki  -  n  -  hamsin  Three  hundred  cowries'  worth  at 

hamsin  fifty  (cowries  each) 

It  will  be  noticed  from  the  above  sentences  that  in 
repeating  the  numeral  to  form  the  distributive  idea,  if  it 
is  compound  only  the  latter  part  is  repeated. 

FRACTIONAL  NUMBERS 

These  are,  with  the  exception  of  "  a  half,"  borrowed 
from  the  Arabic,  and  are  rarely  used. 

"  Half  "  is  expressed  by  "  shashi,"  of  which  the  etymology 
is  not  known,  or  "rabi,"  from  "raba,"  to  divide.  Each 
of  these  words  may  be  translated  by  "  a  part  "  instead  of 
an  exact  "  half,"  and  this  is  found  to  be  also  the  case  in 
many  other  West  African  languages. 

The  fractions  of  Arabic  origin  are — 

Sulusi  a  third 

Rubui  a  fourth,  a  quarter 

Humusi  a  fifth 

Sudusi  a  sixth 

Subui  a  seventh 

Sumuni  or  tumuni  an  eighth 

Tusui  a  ninth 

Ushuri  a  tenth 

The  plurals  are  "  sulusai,"  "  rubuai,"  "  ushurai,"  etc. 

All  these  numbers  can  be  expressed  by  a  circumlocution, 
which  is  always  resorted  to  for  fractional  parts  smaller 
than  a  tenth. 

One-eleventh  =  daia  (or  guda)  chiki-n-goma  sha  daia 
One-twelfth  =  daia  (or  guda)  chiki-n-goma  sha  biu 
One- thirteenth  =  daia  (guda)  chiki-n-goma  sha  uku 
Three-sevenths =subuai  uku 

"  A  tenth  "  as  applied  to  a  tithe  or  land  tax  is  called 
"  zaka." 


ADJECTIVE  71 

Syntax 

Ya  bani  sashi  He  gave  me  half 

Sun  bani  sashi- n-uku  They  gave  me  the  third  part 

Na  raba  shi  uku,  na  ba  kowa     I  divided  it  into  three  parts,  I  gave 
rabo-n-sa  each  his  portion.     (Note,  in  this 

the  cardinal  is  used) 
Mun  yi  tafia  shashi-n-rana  We  travelled  half  the  day 


CHAPTER   IV 
THE    PRONOUN 

The  pronoun  is  divided  into  the  following  classes  : — 

1.  Personal. 

2.  Relative. 

3.  Demonstrative. 

4.  Interrogative. 

5.  Indefinite. 

6.  Reflexive. 

7.  Emphatic. 

8.  Reciprocal. 

1.  THE  PERSONAL  PRONOUN 

The  personal  pronoun  shows  gender,  number,  and  case. 

(1)  Gender. — This  is  distinguished  in  the  2nd  and  3rd 
persons  singular  only.     All  the  other  persons,  singular  and 
plural,  are  of  common  gender. 

(2)  Number. — The    plural    pronouns  are  indicated    by 
different  words  from  the  singular,  and  are  not  formed  from 
the  singular  by  the  addition  of  regular  plural  terminations. 
The  2nd  person  is,  however,  possibly  an  exception. 

(3)  Case.  —  The  vocative  is  distinguished  in  the  2nd 
person  singular,  as  "kai!"  masc.,   "ke!"   fern.,  though 
these  are  in  reality  only  the  disjunctive  forms  of  the 
personal  pronoun.     The  objective  case  has  different  forms 
from  the  nominative  in  the  singular,  but  not  in  the  plural. 
The  genitive  case  is  formed  in  all  persons  except  the  1st, 
by  the  use  of  the  preposition  "of"  "n"  ("na")  masc., 
"  t "  ("  ta ")  fern.,  with  phonetic  variation,  as  a  prefix 

72 


PRONOUN 


73 


to  the  objective  form.  The  1st  person  singular  has  a 
separate  form,  as  will  be  seen.  The  dative  is  formed 
with  the  preposition  "ma"  to  the  objective  form. 

Special  Uses  of  the  Personal  Pronoun 

The  3rd  personal  pronoun  is  used  in  Hausa  not  only 
as  a  substitute  for  the  noun,  but  also  as  a  necessary 
complement  to  it  when  nominative.  It  thus  assists  to 
identify  the  gender  of  the  noun.  The  tense  of  the 
verb  is  also  dependent  upon  the  pronoun,  which  takes 
different  forms,  either  with  or  without  the  assistance  of 
particles. 

Tabular  Statement  of  the  Various  Forms  of  Personal  Pronoun 


SING. 
1 

2(m.) 
2(f.) 
3(m. 
3(f.) 

PLTT. 
1 
2 
3 

SING. 

1 

2(m.) 
2  £.) 

3(m.) 


3(f.) 
PLTT. 
1 


A 

ni,  nia 1 
kai 
ke 
shi 
ita 


mu 
ku 

su 


B 
ni 

ka ;  kai 

ki 

shi ;  sa  ;  i 

ta 


mu 
ku 
su 


C  D 

na  na 

ka  ka 

ki  kin 

ya;  i  (ye)  ya, 

ta  ta 


mu 
ku 

su 

F 


kana 
kina 

shina ;  yana ; : 
yina,  yena 

tana 

Minna 
kuna 
suna 


ka 
kika 
ya,  yeka 

ta 


mun 
kun 
sun 

G 

naa,  na;    ni 

(Sokoto) 
kaa,  ka 
kii,  k! 

sli ii,  shi 

yaa,  yfi 

tail,  tfl 


munka ;  muka 3  muu,  mu  also 
lima,  ML. 

kunka ;  kuka  kuu,  ku  also 
kua 

sunka ;  suka  suu,  su  also  sua, 

sa 


1  "  Nia"  is  interrogative.     See  under  interrogative  pronouns. 

2  "  Yana  "  is  commonly  written,  but  rare  in  conversation. 
a  "  Munka"  is  of  Sokoto  origin ;  "  muka  "  of  Kano  origin. 


74 


SING. 
1 

2(m) 
2(f.) 
3(m.) 
3(f.) 

PLTJ. 
1 

2 
3 

SING. 
1 

2(m.) 

2(1.) 

3(m.) 

3(f.) 

PLIJ. 
1 

2 
3 


H  I 

-na  -ta 

-n-ka-  -r-ka ;  -1-ka  or  -t-ka 

-n-ki  -r-ki;  -1-ki,  etc. 

-n-sa ;  -n-shi  -1-sa ;  -1-shi 

-n-ta  1-ta 

-n-mu  -1-mu 

-n-ku  -1-ku 

-n-su  -1-su 

K  L 

tawa  mani,  mini,  mana 

taka  maka,  ma 

taki  maki,  miki 

tasa  ;  tai.  tashi  masa;     mashi; 

mis  hi ;   mai 

tata  mata 


nawa 

naka 

naki 

nasa;  nashi;  nai 

nata 

nainu 
naku 
nasu 

M 

ni  na 
kai  ka 
ke  ki 
shi  ya 

ita  ta 


tamu 

taku 
tasu 


m  a  m  u  ; 
muna : 


m  u  m  u 
mana 


maku ;   muku 


masu ;    musu 


ku 


mu 

munka 

ku 

kunka 
su 

sunka 


I.  "1,"  "t,"  "r,"  are  interchangeable  for  euphony. 

H  and  I.  The  copulative  may  be  omitted. 

3rd  person  "  sa  "  is  of  Kano  origin ;  "  shi "  of  Bornu 
origin.  Both  are  in  general  use,  but  "  i "  is  more 
commonly  heard  in  Sokoto  and  Katsina. 

In  Kano  "mass"  is  heard  for  "masa";  "tass"  for 
"tasa,"  etc. 


Uses  of  Foregoing  Forms 

Used  in  answer  to  question  "  who  ?  " 

Simple  form. 


A.  Disjunctive. 

B.  Objective. 

C.  Used  with  aorist  tense. 

D.  Used  with  past  tense. 

E.  Continuous   tense,    usually    present.      It 
special   verb   construction  which   is  examined 
verb. 

P.  Used  with  narrative  perfect  tense. 
G.  Used  with  future  (i.). 


entails    a 
under  the 


PRONOUN 


75 


H.  Possessive  inseparable,  when  thing  possessed  is 
masculine. 

I.  Possessive  inseparable,  when  thing  possessed  is 
feminine. 

J.  Possessive  separable  when  thing  possessed  is  masculine. 

K.  ,,  „  ,.  feminine. 

L.  Dative. 

M.  Reduplicated. 

Example  of  Possessive  Pronoun  in  Combination  with  Noun 

Plu.  ubanena 
ubanenka 
ubanenki 
ubanensa 
ubanenta 
ubanenmu 
ubanenku 
ubanensu 

uwayena 

uwayenka 

uwayenki 

uwayensa 

uwayenta 

uwayenmu 

uwayenku 

uwayensu 

Notes 

(1)  In  "uwalka,"  etc.,  for  "1"  with  other  nouns  "r"  or 
"t"  may  be  used  for  euphony.     In  these  forms  "n"  is 
often  substituted  for  "  t "  or  its  variants  if  the  possessor 
is  a  man.     It  seems  as  if  there  is  an  objection  on  the 
part  of  a  man  to  apply  a  feminine  form  to  himself,  however 
correct  gramatically.     A  similar  disinclination  is   observ- 
able  in  other  languages,  as  in   French  when  after  "  son 
excellence"    "elle"   would   be  strictly    correct,   but  the 
tendency    is   to    revert    to    "  il "    at    the    first    possible 
opportunity. 

(2)  Forms  without  copulative.      These  are  in  common 
use,  and  are  a  reversion  to  the  statement  of  the  possessive 
phase  by  words  in  apposition  only,  as  has  been  discussed 


My  father 

ubana 

ubana 

Your  (m.)  father 

ubanka 

ubaka 

Your  (£.)  father 

ubanki 

ubaki 

His  father 

ubansa 

ubasa 

Her  father 

ubanta 

ubata 

Our  father 

ubanmu 

ubamu 

Your  father 

ubanku 

ubaku 

Their  father 

ubansu 

ubasu 

My  mother 

uwata 

uwata 

Your  (ra.)  mother 

uwalka 

uwaka 

Your  (t.)  mother 

II  W.  tiki 

uwaki 

His  mother 

uwalsa 

uwasa 

Her  mother 

uwalta 

uwata 

Our  mother 

uwalmu 

uwamu 

Your  mother 

uwalku 

uwaku 

Their  mother 

uwalsu 

uwasu 

76  THE    HAUSA   LANGUAGE 

under  the  noun.  Or  it  may  be  that  both  "  n  "  and  "  t " 
have  been  modified  for  euphony  into  "r,"  which  after 
long  "a"  is  scarcely  heard. 

(3)  The  possessive  pronoun  is  incorporated  in  the  word, 
and  the  accent  is  thus  moved  to  the  new  penultimate' — 
as,  "ubanmu,"  "uwasa,"  "ubanensu." 

Syntax  of  Personal  Pronouns — Nominative 

1.  The  pronoun  agrees  with  the  subject  with  which  it 
is  in  apposition  in  person,  gender,  and  number — 

Yaro  ya  gani  The  boy  sees 

Yara  ba  su  gani  mutum  ba  The  boys  do  not  see  the  man 

Mache  ta  tafo  The  woman  comes 

Mata  ba  su  tafo  ba  The  women  do  not  come 

2.  The  same  rule  is  observed  when  there  are  more  than 
two  predicates  belonging  to  the  same  subject. 

Kura  ta  tafo,  ta  kawo  nama,  ta  The  hycena  came,  she  brought  meat, 

bayes  ga  dianta,  da  ita  kua  she  gave  it  to  her  offspring,  and 

ta  taba  kadan  she  too  tasted  a  tittle 

Namiji  ya  kama  babe,  ya  dar-  The  man  caught  a  locust,  he  tied  it 

ime  shi,  ya  aje  up,  he  laid  (it)  aside 

3.  Two  or  more  nouns  in  apposition  are  followed  by 
a  pronoun  in  the  plural — 

Yaroda  ubansasuna  zuafarauta     The  boy  and  his  father  are  going 

(lit.,  coming)  hunting 

Yarinia  du  uwata,  su  duka  biu,     The  girl  and  her  mother,  both  of 
zuchiansu  ta  bache  them,  their  heart  was  broken 

The  omission  of  the  3rd  personal  pronoun  is  very  rare 
except  (1)  in  poetry  or  proverbs ;  (2)  before  "  na,"  i.e., 
"shina,"  etc.,  are  shortened  to  "na";  (3)  with  the  verb 
"to  be,"  "ke"  or  "ne"— 

Yaro-n-nanyache  bawa-n-sariki  The  boy  said  the  chief's  slave  had 

ke  (or  shi  ke)  da  doki  the  horse 

Gama  kafirawa  kan  yerda  suabo  Because  the  heathen  believe  in  evil 

(poetic)  (non-religion) 

Yarona  na  da  mirda-n-chiki,  ba  My  boy  has  gripes,  he  cannot  ease 

shi  iya  baya-n-gida  himself 

Wuyana  na  yi  mini  zogi  My  neck  hurts  me 


PRONOUN  77 

Rashi-n-tuo   kan  chi  wake  ak      Having  no  "  tuo"  one  must  eat  beans 
wana  before    going    to   bed      ("  Tuo " 

is  a  sort  of  porridge  of  guinea 
corn — a  staple  dish.) 

Wani     machiji     baki     na     nan     A  black  snake  was  lying  there 
kwanche 

Combination  of  pronouns — 
Mu  je  da  ni  Let  us  go,  you  and  I 

Examples  of  Syntax  of  Possessive  Pronoun 

INSEPAEABLE 

Diarku  Your  (plu.)  daughter 

Abi-na  My  thing  (i.e.,  my  property) 

Ya-r-uwamu  Our  sister 

Zuchiata  ba  ta  so  ba  wari-n-rua     (lit.,  my  heart)  did  not  like  the  smell 

of  the  water 
Mata-r-wanene  ke  nan  ?    Matata      Whose  wife  is  this  ?     She  is  mine 

che 

Enna  abokinka  ?  Where  is  your  friend  ? 

Ka  zamna  ga  hanu-n-damana         Sit  at  my  right  hand 
Mugu-n-gatarinka  ya  fi  sare  ka     A  bad  axe  is  better  than  an  offer  to 

bani  (proverb)  cut  (lit.,  Your  bad  axe  is  better 

than  the  cutting  you  give  me  or 
will  do  for  me) 

Garinsu  ba  da  giritna  ba  Their  town  was  not  large 

Kada    ku    kafa    gida  -  n  -  zane  -     Do  not  pitch  my  tent  there 

na  nan 
Enna  matanka  ?  Where  is  your  wife  ? 

Although  "  mata  "  is  feminine,  "n"  is  commonly  used. 
The  more  correct  use  is  "  mata-ka  "  or  "  mata-r-ka."  If  the 
meaning  were  "  Where  are  your  women  ?  "  "  mata,"  being 
the  plural  of  "  mache,"  "  n  "  would  be  correctly  used.  As 
will,  however,  be  seen  under  prepositions,  there  is  a  tendency 
to  use  the  masculine  form  "na"  and  to  ignore  the 
feminine. 

SEPARABLE 

Ya  tasa  His  sister 

Ka  bani  nawa  Give  me  my  own 

Ni  baka  naka  /  shall  give  you  yours 

Suka  che,  na  wani  nc  ?  ta  che  They  said  Whose  is  it  ?     She  said 
masu,  naau  duka  to  them,  For  all  of  you 


78  THE    HAUSA   LANGUAGE 

Mache  ta  che,  yariniata  tana  da  The  woman  said,  my  daughter  is 
keao,  taki  ba  ta  da  keao  ba  beautiful,  (but)  yours  is  not 

beautiful 

Akwia  nan  tawa  che  The  goat  is  mine 

Gidanga  naku  ko  nasu  ne  ?  Ba  7s  this  house  yours  or  theirs  ?  It 
namu  ba  ne  is  not  ours 

Tamu  che  It  is  ours  (i.e.,  a  thing  of  feminine 

gender) 

Kowa  ya  chi  shinkafa-r-ranche  Whoever  eats  borrowed  rice  it  is  hit 
tasa  ya  chi  (proverb)  own  he  eats 

Suka  tashi  da  ita  da  baiwa  tata     They  arose  both  she  and  her  slave 

Instead  of  the  possessive  or  genitive  case  the  dative 
may  be  found — 

Chiawa  da  ka  rena  ita  ta  kan  The  grass  you  despise  may  pierce 
tsokane  maka  idanu  (proverb)  your  eyes 

Plural  Possessive  Pronouns 

It  has  been  seen  that  in  the  adjective  there  is  no 
distinction  of  gender  in  the  plural  number.  The  same 
applies  to  the  possessive  pronouns.  Nouns  which  are 
feminine  in  the  singular  are  therefore  without  gender 
in  the  plural. 

The  following  examples  illustrate  this — 

Mata  tasa  His  wife 

Mata-n-sa  His  wife  and  also  his  wives 

Dokata  My  command 

Dokokina  My  commands 

Kafa  tasa  His  leg 

Kafafu-n-sa  His  legs 

Mata  tasa  ta  bata  amre  His  wife  spoilt  her  marriage,  i.e., 

broke  her  marriage  vows 

Mata-n-sa  suka  beri  shi  His  wives  left  him 

Other  examples  of  the  possessive  pronoun,  and  some 
of  its  idiomatic  uses,  are  given  under  the  preposition  "  na." 
The  objective  pronoun  follows  the  verb — 

Ya  ba  ni  He  gave  it  me 

Ka  ba  ni  dana  Give  me  my  child 

Na  ba  ka  /  give  (it)  you 

Sai  ya  gani  kai  Until  he  saw  you  (with  emphasis 

on  "  you  ") 

Na  son  kai  /  like  you 

Mu  kama  shi  We  caught  him 


PRONOUN  79 

Muna  kama-n-sa  We  are  catching  him 

Kura  ta  bi  shi  The  hycena  followed  him 

Kura  tana  bi-n-sa  The  hycena  is  following  him 

Rana  duka  ina  nema-n-sa,  ban  All  day  I  am  seeking  him,  I  do  not 
same  sa  ba  find  him 

The  peculiar  construction  that  follows  the  verbal  pronoun 
ending  in  "  na "  is  to  be  observed.  It  is  more  fully 
examined  under  the  verb,  but  it  may  be  here  mentioned 
that  a  noun  form  of  the  verb  is  produced  thereby,  which 
requires  for  its  full  amplification  that  a  possessive  pronoun 
be  added.  The  above  sentences  are  therefore  literally 
we  (are)  of-his-catching,  or  "on"  for  "of,"  etc. 


The  objective  pronoun  3rd  person  singular  is  often 
omitted  where  it  can  be  readily  understood  from  the 
context,  and  also  in  poetry — 

Mache  ta  manche  danta  chiki-n-  The  woman  forgets  her  child  in  the 

daji;  kura  ta  gani,  ta  dauka,  bush;  the  hycena  saw  (it),  took 

ta  kai,  ta  boye  (it),  carried  (it),  (and)  hid  (it) 

Giso  ya  dauka  sanda-sa,  ya  aje  The  spider  took  his  stick,  he  laid 

kiisa  kansa  (it)  close  to  his  head 

Kawo  kori-n-ka,  kawo  baka-n-  Bring  your  bows  and  arrows  if  such 

ka  en  ta  wada  ma  (ma  =  maka)  are  your  treasured  possessions 

Indirect  Object  for  Direct  Object  in  English 

Ya  bada  mani  =  ya  ba  ni  He  gave  me 

Su  bayes  garesa  =  su  ba  shi  They  gave  him 

This  is  because  these  forms  of  the  verb,  as  shown  in 
the  chapter  on  the  verb,  only  admit  of  an  indirect  object. 

Combination  of  Personal  Pronouns 

When  two  pronouns  are  combined  the  first  is  in  the 
plural  number,  and  they  are  connected  with  "  da,"  and. 
With  the  exception  of  the  connecting  link,  this  idiom  is 
found  as  far  off  as  the  Mende  language — 

Gobe  mu  tafi  da  kai  en  gani        To-morrow  you  and  I  will  go  and  see 


THE   HAUSA   LANGUAGE 


2.  RELATIVE  PRONOUNS 

Simple  form  without  copulative — 
m.,  f.,  and  plu.  da 

,,  with  copulative — 

masc.  and  plu.  -n-da, 

fern.  -r-da 

Compound — 

masculine  wanda 

feminine  wadda 

plural  wadanda 

The  short  and  the  long  forms  are  commonly  inter- 
changeable to  suit  the  euphony  or  emphasis  of  a  sentence. 
In  the  short  form  the  copulative  preposition  "n,"  of,  may 
be  inserted  or  omitted,  euphony  being  here  also  the 
principal  influence  — 

Mutum    wanda    shina    zua    or         The  man  who  is  coming 

Mutume-n-da  shina  zua 
Mache     wadda     tana     zua     or         The  woman  who  is  coming 

Mache  da  tana  zua 
Mutane   wadanda   suna  zua  or         The  people  who  are  coming 

Mutane-n-da  suna  zua 
Doki    da   ya   gudu   ya   fadi   or         The  horse  that  ran  away  fell 

Doki-n-da  ya  gudu  ya  fadi 

For  "  abu  wanda,"  the  thing  which,  the  abbreviated  form 
is  the  one  in  common  use — "  abinda." 

Objective  Case 

In  the  objective  case  a  pronoun  may  or  may  not  follow 
the  verb — 

Abinda    na    gani    zani   fadi   or     What  I  have  seen  I  will  relate 

Abinda  na  ganishi  zani  fadi 
Dakinda  ankagina  ya  rushe  jia  or     The  house  which  was  built  collapsed 

Dakinda  ankagina  shi  ya  rushe         yesterday 

jia 
Akwia  da  ka  gani  or  Akwia-r-da     The  goat  which  you  saw 

ka  gani 


PRONOUN  81 

Addition  of  Personal  Pronoun 

When  the  relative  pronoun  is  used  with  a  noun  in  the 
nominative  case  it  is  followed  by  the  personal  pronoun 
the  same  as  is  the  simple  noun — 

Yaro  wanda  ya  gudu  The  boy  that  ran  away 

Exceptions  are  found — 

Ita  che  da   ke  yin  hankali  ga     She   it   was  who  was  kind  to  the 
bayi  slaves 

Etymology 

A  clue  to  the  etymology  of  the  relative  pronouns  is 
furnished  by  the  optional  use  of  the  personal  pronoun 
in  the  objective  case  in  such  a  sentence  as — 

Mutum   wanda  ka  nemeshi  for     The  man  whom  you  sought 
mutum  wanda  ka  nema 

In  most  West  African  languages  the  relative  pronoun  is 
absolutely  non-existent,  or  at  least  very  poorly  indicated, 
co-ordinate  sentences  being  universally  used.  If,  there- 
fore, from  this  analogy  "  da "  be  no  more  than  the  con- 
junction "and,"  Hausa  furnishes  an  example  of  a  language 
in  which  the  primitive  construction  is  in  use  side  by  side 
with  the  more  advanced  which  has  been  developed  from 
it.  Accordingly,  the  above  quoted  sentence  can  be  trans- 
lated in  the  form  in  which  the  objective  pronoun  is  used — 
Mutum  da  ka  nemeshi  The  man  and  you  seek  him 

This  is  also  shown  in  the  following  sentence — 

Da  kaya  da  mu  ke  da  su          And  the  loads  which  we  have 
Mashi  -  n  -  nan  da  na  soki        The   spear   with    which   I  pierced 
ubanki  da  shi  your  father 

What  the  "  wa  "  in  the  longer  forms  may  mean  exactly 
is  obscure,  but  it  is  the  same  word  as  is  found  in  the 
lengthened  forms  of  the  demonstrative  pronouns  and  in 
the  indefinite  pronouns.  That  it  has  an  independent 

F 


82  THE  HAUSA  LANGUAGE 

value  is  seen  from  studying  the  action  of  the  genitive 
copulative  embodied  in  the  words. 

In  "wa-n-da,"  the  masculine  form,  "n,"  i.e.,  "na," 
remains  unchanged  as  it  must  when  following  words 
having  a  masculine  meaning. 

In  "wa-d-da,"  "wa"  seems  to  acquire  a  feminine 
meaning  from  the  word  in  the  feminine  gender  which 
it  follows.  The  "n"  therefore  becomes  a  modification 
of  "t,"  as  "1"  or  "r,"  etc.  "Wadda"  is  therefore 
derived  from  "  wa-l-da,"  or  "  wa-t-da,"  etc.,  and  the 
intervening  additional  consonant  has  the  effect  of  ensuring 
that  the  vowel  of  "  wa  "  shall  be  short  as  it  is  in  "  wadda." 

In  the  plural,  which  is  of  course  the  same  for  both 
genders,  the  same  peculiar  plural  termination  "  da "  is 
found  which  is  also  found  in  the  demonstrative  pronouns, 
"^adanda"  is  therefore  composed  of  "wa-da  (da=plu. 
suffix)  -n-da." 

The  plural  form  "wadanda"  is  contracted  in  Katsena 
and  Sokoto  to  "  wa'anda,"  and  in  Kano  and  Zaria  to 
"  wanda." 

Further  Examples 

Nominative  relative,  long  form,  dependent — 

Fada  wanda  ba  ka  iya  ba  amaisai  The  fight  which  you  find  too  much 

wasa  (prov.)  for  you  turn  into  play 

Abubua   chan   wadanda    na  ga  The  things  that  I  see  moving  yonder, 

motsinsu,    ko    birayi    ne    ko  are  they  monkeys  or  dogs  ? 

karnuka  ? 

Abinda    na   gani,   wanda  ya   fi  In  my  opinion  the  best  thing  for  us 

anfani  sai  niu  tail  to  do  is  to  go 

Objective  relative,  long  form,  dependent — 

Abinchi  wanda  shi  ke  so  The  food  he  likes 

Matatai  daia  wadda  ya  ke  so  One  of  his  wives  whom  he  loved 

Ba  su  kashe  mutume  nan  wanda  They  do  not  kill  the  man  who  stole 

ya  sache  doki  the  horse 

Dambaria  ya  chainye  gutsiata  The  mouse  has  eaten  my  nuts  which 

wadda  ni  ke  so-n-chi  gobe  /  wanted  to  eat  to-morrow 

Short  form  nominative  dependent — 

Abinda   ba    naka    ba    ne,   kaka     The  thing  that  is   not   yours   how 
zaka  bayes  T  can  you  give  it  away  ? 


PRONOUN  83 

Short  form,  objective,  dependent — 

Wani  gari  ne  da  uwaka  zata  Where  is  the  town  to  which  your 
kaika  ?  mother  is  going  to  take  you  ? 

Riga-n-da  ka  bani  ta  tsofa  The.  coat  which  you  gave  me  is  old 

Ya  tafi  gari-n-nan  da  ya  soki  He  went  to  that  town  where  he 
sariki  ya  mutu  stabbed  the  chief  so  that  he  died 

Sun  goda  masa  bayinda  suka  They  showed  him  the  slaves  which 
kama  they  had  caught 

Ba  ni  da  rakuma  da  zan  baka  /  have  no  camels  to  give  you 

Independent  form  nominative — 

Wanda  kana  yi  masa  alheri,  shi  He  to  whom  you  do  kindness  and 

ko,  ya  kan  ki  yi  -  n  -  godia,  he  refuses  to  be  grateful  is  a  boor 
butulu  ne  (prov.) 

Wanda  ya  sayemu  daga  Bornu  He  who  bought  us  in  Bornu 

Independent  form  objective — 

Ta  basu  rua  da  faraufarau  She  gave  them  water  which  was  very 

clear 
Ina  so  wanda  uwaka  ta  ba  ka         /  want  that  which  your  mother  gave 

(Sokoto)  you 

Ba  ni  da  wanda  uwaka  ta  baka,  /  have  not  that  which  your  mother 
sai  ina  da  wanda  wana  ya  bani  gave  you,  I  have  only  that  which 

my  elder  brother  gave  me 

Mata-m-Bornu  aikinsu  daia  ko  As  to  the  women  of  Bornu  there  is 
nan  wanda  na  sani  one  kind  of  work  they  do  which 

I  know 

Two    co-ordinates    sentences    may   be    substituted  for 
the  use  of  the  relative — 

Ga  jirigi,  suanene  suna  chiki  ?         See  that  boat,  who  are  in  it  f  for 

Who  are  in  the  boat  which  I  see  ? 

Use  of  "  mai-  "— 
Mu  masuaiki  mugunta  We  who  work  iniquity 


3.  DEMONSTRATIVE  1*110 NOUN 

The  demonstrative  pronoun  has  two  forms.     One  stands 
before  the  noun  and  the  syllable  "  wa  "   enters  into  its 


84 


THE    HAUSA   LANGUAGE 


composition ;  the  other  follows  the  noun  and  is  the  same 
word  less  the  "  wa." 


FORM  STANDING  BEFORE  THE  NOUN  FORM  FOLLOWING 

MASC.  FEM.  MASC.  FEM. 


-n-nan,  n-ga     -1-nan,  -1-j 
-r-ga 


This  wannan  wa-nan 

wa-ga, 
wanga  wa-r-ga 

These  wada-n-nan        wada-n-nan    -n-nan,  -nga    -n-nan,  -nga 

wadanga  wadanga 

That  wa-n-chan  wa-chan,          -n-chan  -1-chan, 

wa-r-chan  r-chan 

Those          wada-n-chan       wada-n-chan  -n-chan  -n-chan 


INDEFINITE  PLURAL 
wada  wada 


Examples 

This  horse       wannan  doki  doki-n-nan 

wanga  doki  dokinga 

This  mare  wanan  godia-1-nan 

godia  godia-1-ga 

waga  godia 

These  horses  wadannan  dawaki  dawaki-n-nan, 

wadanga  dawaki  dawaki-nga 

These  mares  wadannan  godiyoyi-n- 

godiyoyi,  nan, 

wadanga  godiyoyi- 

godiyoyi  nga 

That  horse      wanchan  doki  doki-n-chan 

doki  chan 


Other  Examples 

Litafi-n-nan,  litafinga  CHAN        hainya-r-chan 

Mutane-n-nan  yaro-n-chan 

Mache-nan 

Mutume-n-nan,  mutumenga  mutume-n-chan 

Kofalga 

Abi-n-nan  abi-n-chan 

Kasanga 


PRONOUN  85 

Etymology 

"Nan,"  "chan,"  and  "ga"  are  the  equivalents  of  the 
adverbs  "  here  "  and  "  there."  That  they  are  not  adverbs 
at  all  in  Hausa  may  be  deduced  from  their  employment. 
They  are  in  fact  nouns,  and  are  treated  as  such.  Hence 
the  copulative  "  n  "  ;  so  that  literally  translated — 

Litafi-n-nan,  litafi-n-ga  mean  the  book  of  this  place 
Litafi-n-chan  „     the  book  of  that  place 

Riga-1-chan  ,,      the  coat  of  that  place 

The  same  construction  is  in  "  wa-n-nan,"  and  "  wa-n-ga," 
though  what  "wa"  may  be  precisely  requires  further 
examination. 

As  has  been  explained  under  nouns,  the  copulative  may 
be  omitted,  leaving  the  two  nouns  in  apposition.  Hence 
the  following  equivalents  are  equally  correct — 

Wanan  for  wannan  Litafi  nan  for  litafi-n-nan 

Riga  chan  for  riga-1-chan 

When  it  sounds  better  the  copulative  is  commonly 
omitted. 

The  fact  that  "  nan  "  and  "  chan  "  are  nouns  is  further 
borne  out  by  their  uses  with  predicates. 

"  Shina  nan."  He  is  at  this  place.  Compare  "  shina 
gida."  He  is  at  home.  It  is  to  be  noted  that  whenever 
a  verb  has  to  be  placed  after  the  pronoun  ending  in  "  na," 
the  verb  becomes  a  substantive.  This  is  explained  under 
the  verb. 

That  "  nan  "  is  not  an  adverb  of  place  is  still  further 
borne  out  in  the  phrase  "shi  ke  nan,"  so  it  is. 

These  words  "  nan  "  and  "  chan  "  are  probably  in  them- 
selves compound  words.  The  parts  "na"  and  "cha" 
represent  present  and  distant  position.  "  N "  is  a 
formative  suffix  of  some  kind.  It  may  be  connected  with 
the  locative  suffix  of  Kanuri,  also  "n,"  or  it  may  be  the 
preposition  "  n,"  of,  with  a  somewhat  different  usage. 
That  the  final  "n"  is  variable  and  separable  is  borne 
out  by  one  example  "  miji-nal-mata "  in  a  poem  called 
"Mutane  zina "  (footnote  given  in  Charlton's  "Hausa 
Reading  Book"). 


86  THE    HAUSA   LANGUAGE 

From  the  foregoing  it  can  be  seen  that  any  change  for 
gender  depends  on  the  copulative  alone,  but  in  the  long 
forms  "wanga,"  "wa-ga,"  or  "wa-r-ga"  it  is  not  quite 
apparent  why/  there  should  be  any  change,  as  the  gender 
of  the  copulative  depends  upon  the  unchanged  preceding 
syllable  or  word  "wa." 

Remarks  on  Usages,  etc. 

The  longer  are  naturally  more  emphatic  than  the  shorter. 

"  Nga  "  is  a  dialectic  variation  of  "  nan." 

"  Wanga,"  "  waga"  are  Sokoto  and  Zanfara  forms. 

"Wainen"  (masc.)  and  "wai'en"  (fern.)  are  Katsina 
forms  of  "  Wannan,"  etc.,  to  which  place  they  are  rather 
strictly  confined. 

"  Wankai "  is  a  Zaria  form  for  "  wanchan,"  without 
inflection  for  gender  used  by  the  "  talakawa  Zaria." 

Examples  of  Syntax 

Wannan  mutum  talaka  ne  This  man  is  poor 

Ki  koiya  mani  waka  nan  Teach  me  that  song 

Yaronga  shina  *yin  fada  That  boy  is  fighting 

Whilst  "chan"  expresses  strongly  distance  "nan"  is 
commonly  indefinite. 

Dokinga  nika  ba  na  iya  sayinsa  This  horse  of  yours  I  cannot  buy  it 

Ba  na  so-n-chi-n-tuo-n-nan  /  cannot  eat  that  food 

Masu-kaya  biunga  su  sake  ka-  These   two    carriers    have   changed 

yansu  their  loads 

In  the  translation  of  the  Lord's  Prayer  "  nan  "  is  given 
an  emphatic  use,  as,  "  Ka  ba  niu  rananga  abinchi-n-yao 
da  gobe."  Give  us  this  day  our  daily  bread. 

Mu  wadanan  uku  anhaifc  mu  ga  We   three   were   born   at   the  same 

gari  daia  place 

Da   ya   tashi   dawuri    wadanan  Had  he  started  early  the  horsemen 

masudawaki    dfi    ba   su   tar-  would  not  have  overtaken  him 

sheshi  ba 

(In  the  last  sentence  "  wadanan  "  is  essentially  weak.) 
• 


PRONOUN  87 

Abubua  nan  These  things 

Yaranga  suna  yi-n-fada  Those  boys  are  fighting  • 

Ya  rasulu  allahi  deddi  fadi  shi  0  prophet!  it  wa/ God's  saying  of 

ke  wada  suka  kada  maulana —  old  that  those  'who  despised  the 

master — 

Mu  gani  kaka  aboki  nan  n?wa  We  see  how  this*  my  friend  if  he 

en  ya  zo  ya  ji  tsoro  comes  will  be  afraid 

Kurdi  kadan  nan  ne  This  money  is  not  enough  (is  small) 

Na  baka  dia  nan  tawa  /  give  you  this  my  daughter 

In  many  of  its  usages  the  demonstrative  "nan"  has 
very  little  demonstrating  power  as  regards  place.  It  is 
more  easily  translated  by  the  definite  article  in  English. 

In  this  way  some  compensation  is  made  for  an  apparent 
deficiency  in  the  Hausa  language.  In  Kanuri  it  is  also 
found  that  a  weakened  demonstrative  does  duty  for  a 
definite  article. 

Mutume-n-nan   da    ya    manche  The  man  who  forgot  his  stick  has 

sandansa  ya  dawoyo  come  back 

Ta  dauki  hazi  nan  She  took  the  millet 

Labaringa  ke  nan  (Sokoto)  This  is  the  news 
Labarin  ke  nan  (Kano  and  Zaria) 

Abinnan  yana  wurina  The  thing  is  with  me 

Amma    Bitrus    ya    tashi   tsaye  But  Peter  stood  up  with  the  eleven 

tare  da  goma  sha  daia-n-nan 


Correlatives 

"  Wannan  .  .  .  wannan "  and  "  -nan  .  .  .  -nan " ;   are 
equivalent  to  "  this  .  .  .  that " — 

Ka  so  wannan  litafi  ko  wannan  1     Do  you  like  this  book  or  that  ?       ( 
Wannan  and  nan  for  wannan  .  .   .  wannan 

Wannan  ba  nan  ba  ni  ke  so  This  not  that  I  want 

Wannan   mutum   ba  nan  ba  ni     /  want  this  man,  not  that 


ke  so 


Other  Examples 


En  wannan  ba  ya  yi  maka  dadi  //  this  does  not  please  you,  perhaps 

ba,  halama  wanchan  ya  yi  that  will 

Zabua  nan  ta  yi  kwoi  goma  sha  This  guinea  fowl  laid  thirteen  eggs 

uku  bar  ta  dena,  wachan  ma  and  has  ceased  ;  that  one  how- 

tana  nema-n-guribi  ever  is  seeking  a  place  to  lay  in 


88  THE    HAUSA   LANGUAGE 

Wannan  can  be  used  independently  as  a  noun — 

Wannan  ya  kare  This  has  finished 

Wannan  ba  na  so  shi  ba  This  (man)  I  do  not  like  him 

Wannan  ne  wayo  da  na  baki  This  is  the  advice  which  I  give  you 

Wannan  barao  ne  This  is  a  thief 

Wannan  namiji  ba  mache  ne  This  is  a  male  not  a  female 

Wanene  wannan  a  kof  a-r-dakina  Who   is   that   at   the   door   of    my 

house ? 

FINAL  "N" 

It  may  here  be  noticed  that  a  final  "n"  is  sometimes 
added  to  nouns,  especially  at  the  end  of  a  phrase  or  sentence. 
It  is  not  a  firmly  expressed  "n,"  and  is  somewhat  nasal. 
It  is  possibly  primarily  euphonic,  but  it  commonly  has 
the  effect  of  expressing  emphasis,  and  so  puts  the  noun 
into  the  definite  state,  or,  in  other  words,  it  has  the  effect 
of  the  definite  article.  Its  use  is  optional. 

This  final  "n"was  not  recognised  by  the  older  writers 
on  Hausa,  possibly  because  it  is  more  commonly  used  in 
the  centres  of  the  Hausa  country  to  which  they  had  not 
access,  and  because  it  is  more  apparent  in  writing  than 
in  speaking. 

As  it  is  a  detail  of  the  language  that  has  received  much 
discussion  of  late,  it  may  be  here  stated  that  a  not 
dissimilar  use  of  "n"  is  found  in  at  least  one  other 
West  African  language.  In  far  distant  Temne,  for  in- 
stance, "ng"  occurs  at  the  end  of  some  pronouns  and 
adverbs  to  make  a  convenient  termination  when  they 
are  used  at  the  end  of  a  preposition  or  absolutely. 
Also  as  an  extension  of  this  use  it  expresses  emphasis. 
It  is,  however,  quite  distinct  from  the  article  which  is 
a  prefix  in  that  language.  If,  therefore,  this  use  of  "n" 
exists  in  one  other  language  besides  Hausa,  there  will 
undoubtedly  be  found  other  languages  which  have  a 
similar  practice. 

This  "n"  in  Hausa  is  not  to  be  confused  with  the 
preposition  "of."  The  latter  is  often  written  at  the  end 
of  a  noun  when  in  reality  it  is  connected  with  the 
noun  that  follows.  Writing  it  attached  to  the  first  of 
two  nouns  is  merely  a  convention.  It  must,  however, 


PRONOUN  89 

be  added  that  in  some  instances  it  is  hard  to  say  whether 
the  "n"  is  really  the  preposition  or  the  special  "n" 
here  referred  to — 

Uban  ya  che  da  keao  The  father  said,  all  right 

Ya  che  da  uban  He  said  to  the  (or  his)  father 

Ya  fita  a  garin  He  left  the  town 

Daga  bayan  Musa  ya  yi  yaki  After  this  (or  behind  them)   Musu 

made  war 

Ban  sami  maganin  ba  /  did  not  find  the  medicine 

Duka  garin  ba  mache  maikeao  In   the  whole   town   there  was  no 

kama  tata  woman  as  beautiful  as  she 

Ya  tafo  ga  wurin  enda  machiji  He  went  to  the  place  where  the  snake 

shi  ke  was 

Ya  che  da  matan  kun  gama  aiki-  He  said   to   the   women,  have  you 

n-abinchin  ?  finished  preparing  the  food  ? 

Mutumen  ya  che  da  sariki  The  man  said  to  the  chief 

With  Words  other  than  Nouns 

Domin  ta  hanbare  ka  ga  addini      That  it  may  kick  you   away  from 

religion 

Ku  yi  abinchi   "  iri-iri "   kamin     Make    ready   every    kind    of  food 
en  zo  before  I  come 

Examples  of  the   absence   of   final  "  n "  are  numerous 
in  this  grammar. 

4.  INTERROGATIVE  PRONOUN 

The  following  pronouns  are  used  in  asking  questions  : — 
Independent  Forms 


SINGULAR                                  PLURAL 

MASC 

FEM.                       MASC. 

FEM 

Who,  which 
What 

wa, 
wane, 
wanene 
mi, 

wa, 
wache, 
wacheche 

suwa, 
suwane, 
suwanene 

mine. 

minene 

Attached  Forms 

Which 

wane 

wache 

wadane 

Etymology. — The   longer   forms   are  made   up  with  the 
masculine  and  feminine  forms  of  the  verb  "  to  be  "  suffixed 


90  THE    HAUSA   LANGUAGE 

to  "wa"  and  duplicated  in  the  longest  forms  for 
emphasis. 

Plural. — The  plural  of  the  independent  forms  is  made 
by  the  personal  pronoun  "  su,"  they,  prefixed  to  the  stem 
"  wa."  This  use  of  "they"  to  form  the  plural  of  nouns,  etc., 
is  found  in  other  languages  in  West  Africa,  and  is  dis- 
cussed in  the  chapters  on  the  plural  and  the  pronoun  in 
"  The  Languages  of  West  Africa." 

Independent  Forms. — When  used  independently  before  a 
verb  they  require  the  3rd  personal  pronoun  as  if  they 
were  nouns.  Where  the  latter  is  omitted  the  reasons 
are  the  same  as  those  given  for  the  nouns  under  personal 
pronouns. 

Examples  of  Syntax 

(MASCULINE  FORMS) 

Wa  ke  chan  ?  or  Wane  ke  chan  ?  Who  is  there  ? 

Wa  ka  ke  ?  or  Wane  ka  ke  ?  Who  are  you  ? 

Kai  wanene  ?  Who  are  you  ? 

Wa  ya  yi  wannan  ?  Who  has  done  this  ? 

Wane  ya  yi  wannan  ?  Who  has  done  this  ? 

Mutume-n-nan,  wanene  ?  Who  is  this  man? 

En  ji  wa  Let  me  hear  who!  i.e  ,  who   says 

so  ?  This  is  in  answer  to  the 
summons,  "  wai  ka  zo,"  you  are 
told  to  come 

Wanene  wannan  ?  Who  is  this  ? 

Wanene  chiki-n-su  ?  Which  of  them  ? 

Wanene    (or    wane)    shina    iya  Who  can  buy  it  ? 

saiyensa  ? 

Chiki-n-ku  wa  ke  zua  farauta  da  Which  of  you  is  coming  hunting 

ni  ?  with  me  ? 

Wa  ya  fada  maka  labari  nan  ?  Who  has  told  you  this  news  ? 

Wane  maikiddi  ?  Who  is  the  drummer  ? 

Wa  je  shiga  rijia  ?  Who  will  enter  the  water-hole  ? 

Dan  wanene  8onof"who-is-it";  son  of  so-and-so 

Wa  ke  da  litafi-n-sariki  ?  Who  has  the  chief's  book? 

Wanene  na  ku  duka  ya  chainye  Which  of   you   has   eaten   all   the 

nama  duka  ?  meat  ? 

It  will  be  noticed  from  the  foregoing  examples  that  the 
different  forms  "  wa,"  "  wane,"  and  "  wanene  "are  largely 
used  to  suit  the  euphony  of  the  sentence. 


PRONOUN  91 

The  following  are  all  equally  correct  — 

Wa  ya  che  maka  haka  ?         \ 

Wane  ya  che  maka  haka  ?      I  Who  said  so  to  you  ? 

Wanene  ya  che  maka  haka  ?J 

Of  these  the  first  and  the  third  are  said  to  be  the 
commonest  except  in  Zaria. 

The  difference  between  them  depends  on  no  more  than 
the  pleonastic  insertion  of  the  verb  "  to  be,"  which  can  also 
be  done  in  English,  as,  Who  said  so  to  you,  or,  Who  is 
it  that  said  so  to  you  ? 

Idiomatic  Use  of  "  wane  " 


is  it,  may  be  used  as  a  substantive  in 
the  sense  of  "  so-and-so  ";  as  — 

Enna  wane  ?  Where  is  so-and-so  ?    This  is  liter- 

ally Where  is  "  who  -is  -it"  ?  the 
name  not  being  known. 

The  corresponding  word  to  "  wane  "  in  respect  to  things 
is  "kaza  "  — 

Na  bashi  abu  kaza  /  give  him  such-and-such  a  thing 

Muka  yi  kaza  da  kaza  We  did  thus  and  thus 

Independent  Forms,  Feminine 

Wacho  che  chan  ?  Who  is  there  ? 

Wache  ta  yi  wannan  ?  Who  has  done  this  ? 

Wache  chiki-n-su  ?  Which  of  them  ? 

Mache  nan,  wache  che  ?  Who  is  this  woman  ? 

Wacheche  mache  tafari  ?  Who  was  the  first  woman  ? 

Independent  Forms,  Plural 

Suwa     kc     chan  ?     suwane     ke  Who  are  there  ?     The  latter  is  the 

chan  ?  more  harmonious. 

Suwanene  ?  Who  are  they  ? 

Wadanan  mutanc,  suwancnc  ?  Who  are  these  men  ? 

The  following  is  an  irregular  usage  — 

Wane  mutane  ku  nan  ?  Who  are  these  men 

(NOTE.  —  Miller  writes  "  woni.") 


92 


THE    HAUSA   LANGUAGE 


Independent  Form  applied  to  Things 


NO    RENDER    AND    NO    PLURAL 


Mi  ya  fadi  ?    Mine  ya  fadi  ? 

Minene  ya  fadi  ? 

Kana  yi-n-mine  ? 

Minene  wannan  ? 

Mine  ya  sa  ka  zo  ? 

Minene  shina  chi  tumaki-na  ? 

Mine  da  Engliz  ? 

Fada  mani  minene  su  ? 

Mi  ya  faru  ? 

Mi  zani  yi  yao  ? 

Minene  wani  abin-nan  ? 

Gudu-n-mi  ki  ke  yi  ? 

Kuka-n-mi  ku  ke  yi 


What  did  he  say  ? 

What  is  it  he  said  ? 

What  are  you  doing  ? 

What  is  this  ? 

What  has  made  you  come  ? 

What  is  it  that  destroys  my  sheep  ? 

What  is  it  in  English  ? 

Tell  me  what  they  are  ? 

What  has  happened  ? 

What  shall  I  do  to-day  ? 

What  is  that  other  thing  ? 

What  are  you  running  away  for  ? 

What  are  you  shouting  for  ? 


Forms  coupled  with  the  Noun — Masculiue  Singular 


Wane  mutum  ya  gudu  ? 
Wane  yaro  shi  ke  da  hima  ? 

Wane  launi  tsuntsu  shi  ke  da 

shi? 
Wane  lokachi  ya  zo  ? 

Wane    mutum   ke    nan    wanda 

akakama  jia  ? 
Wane  iri-n-hali  garesa  ? 
Wane  lokachi  ne  yanzu  ? 


Which  man  has  run  away  ? 
Which   is   the  diligent  boy  ?     lit., 

Which  boy  he  is  with  diligence 
What  colour  is  the  bird  f 

What     time    did     he     come  ?     or 

When  .  .  .? 
Who   is  the  man  that  was  caught 

yesterday  ? 

What  sort  of  character  has  he  ? 
What  is  the  time  now  ? 


Here  "  wane  "  is  masculine  to  agree  with  "  hali."  If  a 
feminine  word  is  substituted  for  "hali,"  "wane"  takes 
the  feminine  form. 

An  exception  as  to  agreement  occurs  with  the  word 
"iri,"  kind,  in  the  phrase  "  what  kind  of."  To  all  intents 
and  purposes  its  existence  is  ignored  as  to  gender,  and  it 
is  treated  as  part  of  the  interrogative  pronoun  itself  — 


Wane  iri-n-mutum  ? 
Wache  iri-n-mache  ? 
Wadane  iri-n-mutane 


What  kind  of  man  ? 
What  kind  of  woman  ? 
What  kind  of  men  f 


PRONOUN  93 


Forms  coupled  with  the  Noun — Feminine  Singular 

Wache  yarinia  ta  ke  da  hima  ?  Which  girl  is  diligent  ? 

Wache  hainya  ya  tafi  ?  Which  road  has  he  gone  ? 

Wache       mache       che      wanan  What  woman  is  this  that  comes  ? 

wadda  ta  zo  ? 

Wache  iri-n-fitila  ke  nan  ?  What  sort  of  lamp  is  this  ? 

Mutum  maidukia,  wache   iri-n-  As  regards  a  rich  man,  what  kind 

riga  shi  kan  sa  ?  of  dress  does  he  put  on  ? 


Form  joined  to  the  Noun,  Plural 

Wadane  mutane  ke  nan  ?  What  men  are  these  ? 

or — 

Wadanan  mutane,  suanene  ?  What  men  are  these  ? 

Wadane  mata  suna  kuka  ?  Which  women  are  screaming  ? 


Possessive  Interrogative  Pronoun 

This  is  formed  by  putting  "na,"  of,  before  the  inter- 
rogative pronoun. 

If  standing  alone  the  longer  forms  are  used  —  "  na- 
wane  ?  "  "  na-wanene  ?  "  "  na -wache  ?  "  etc. 

If  accompanied  by  a  noun  the  short  form  is  commonly 
used,  "  n-wa  "  following  the  noun. 

If  the  object  possessed  is  feminine  the  preposition  "  n  " 
becomes  "  1,"  etc.,  as  with  nouns. 

In  the  plural,  "  -n-wa  "  is  found,  of  course,  irrespective 
of  gender — 

Na-wanene  ya  bache  ?  Whose  is  lost  ? 

Doki-n-wanene     ke    nan?  or     Whose  horse  is  this? 

Doki-n-nan  na  wanene  ? 

Doki-n-wa  ke  nan  ?  „ 

Dia-r-wacheche  ki  ko  ?  Whose  daughter  are  you  ? 

Dia-l-wa  ki  ke  ?  ,, 

Dia-t-wa  ki  ko  ?  „ 
Yaya-n-wa  sunka  yi  worigi  nan  ?      Whose  children  have  played  here  ? 

Mata-n-wa  ta  kawa  gishiri  ?  Whose  wife  was  turned  into  salt  ? 


94 


THE    HAUSA    LANGUAGE 


Ban  sani  ba  na  wanene 
Tumaki-n-wa  ke  nan  ? 


I  do  not  know  whose 
Whose  sheep  are  these  ? 


Interrogative  1st  Personal  Pronoun 

The    1st   personal   pronoun  has  a  special  interrogative 
form.     It  is  chiefly  used  in  answer  to  a  question. 


Nia? 

Nia  na  fada  maka  ? 

Nia  che  ? 


Is  it  I  ? 

Is  it  I  who  said  so  ? 

Is  it  I  !  (fern.) 


5.  INDEFINITE  PRONOUNS 


SINGULAR 


Someone,   something,    a  wani  wata 

certain  person  or  thing. 

Used  adjectivally  and 

pronominally 

Another  wani  wata 

Any  one,  every  one,  each  kowa,  kowa, 

one.  Used  as  a  pronoun      kowane,         kowache: 

kowaneno      kowachechc 
Any,  every.    Used  as  an  kowane  kowache 

adjective,  and  it  pre- 
cedes the  noun 
Anything,         everything  komi,. 

whatsoever  it  be,  what-       komine  «. 

soever  kominene 


PLURAL 
BOTH  GENDERS 

wadansu, 
wansu,  wasu 


wadansu 


It  will  be  noticed  that  the  indefinite  pronouns  which  are 
composed  with  the  particle  "  ko  "  have  the  same  forms 
as  the  interrogative  pronouns — 


So-and-so 

Such  and  such  a  thing 

The  one  .  .  .  the  other 

Some  .  .  .  others 

No  one 

No  one  ivho 

Nothing 


wa  ne 

kaza 

wani  .  .  .  wani     wata  .  . 

wasu  .  .  .  wasu     wadansu 

ba  kowa,  babu  kowa 

ba  wanda,  babu  wanda 

ba  komi,  babu  komi 


wata 

.  .  wadansu 


PRONOUN  95 

"Kowane  "  is  combined  with  the  plurals  of  the  personal 
pronouns — 

Kowane-n-mu 
Kowane-n-ku 
Kowane-n-su 

FEMININE 

Kowache-n-mu  each  of  us 

Kowache-n-ku  each  of  you 

Kowache-n-su  each  of  them 

In  the  same  way  that  the  particle  "ko"  is  prefixed 
to  the  interrogative  pronouns  to  form  the  indefinite 
pronouns,  it  may  further  be  prefixed  to  certain  adverbs 
taking  away  their  interrogative  force  and  substituting  an 
indefinite  or  distributive  idea — 

Enna  ?  where  Koenna  anywhere,  everywhere,  wherever 

Yaushe  ?  when  Koyausho  at  any  time,  always,  whenever 

Yanzu  now  Koyanzu  even  now,  immediately 

Kaka  ?  how  ?  Kokaka  anyhow  however 

It  is  to  be  noted  that  attached  to  "yanzu"  which  has 
not  an  interrogative  force,  "ko "  has  a  different  force  also. 

Gender  and  Number 

Gender  and  number  are  but  secondary  considerations 
in  the  indefinite  pronouns,  especially  when  used  as 
substantives. 

Kowa,  etc.,  pronominal 

Kowa  ya  sani  sarki  Every  one  knows  the  chief 

Akoi  kowa  chiki-n-daki  ?  Is  there  any  one  in  the  house  ? 

Kowa  ya  gane  shi  Somebody  has  seen  him 

Kowa   ya    zo  nan   gobe,    en  yi  Any  one  who  comes  here  to-morrow, 

masa  keauta  /  will  give  him  a  present 

Kada  ka  fadi  ga  kowa,  kadan  na  Do  not  tell  any  one,  if  I  hear  you 

ji  ka  fadi  ga  wani  ina  buganka         have  told  any  one  I  will  beat  you 

Kowa  ba  shi  ganc  shi  ba  No  one  has  seen  him 

Babu  kowa  chan  There  is  no  one  there 

Ba  kowansu  (Sokoto)  Not  one  of  them 

Ba  kowa  achikinsu  (Zaria) 

Kowane  ya  tafi  hainya  dabam  Each  one  went  a  different  road 

Kowane-n-mu  Each  of  us 

Kowache  ta  tafi  hainyanta  Each  woman  went  her  way 

Kowane  da  zaya  zo  nan  gobe  en  Whoever   comes   here   to-morrow  1 

yi  masa  keauta  will  give  him  a  present 


96  THE    HAUSA    LANGUAGE 

Kowane,  etc.,  adjectival 

Kowane    yaro    ya   tafi    hainya  Each  boy  went  a  different,  road 

dabam 

Kowache   yarinia   ta  tafi  hain-  Each  girl  went  her  road 

yanta 

Kowache   safia   anadada    muna  Each  morning  blessings  are  added 

albarka  to  us 

Examples  of  Syntax 

Wani,  etc.,  adjectivally 

Wani  mutum  ya  yi  karia  Some  man  has  lied 

Wata  mache  ta  yi  karia  Some  woman  has  lied 

Wasu  mutane  sun  yi  karia  Some  men  have  lied 

Mu    rubuta    magana  -  n  -  wani  Let   us  write  the  story  of  a  man, 

mutum  da  na  ji  daga  Bornu  which  I  heard  in  Bornu 

Ban  tafi  wani  wuri  ba  /  did  not  go  anywhere 

Doki-n-wani  mutum  ya  mutu  Some  one's  horse  is  dead 

Nan    garin   dai,    ba   wani   mai-  Here  in  this  town,  indeed,  there  was 

saida  zuma  sai  wane  no  one  sold  honey  except  so-and-so 

Wani,  pronominally 

Masallachi     nan,     akwoi    wani  That  mosque,  is  there  any  one  in- 

achiki  ?     Aa,  ba  kowa  side  ?     No,  no  one 

Ni  koiya  ga  wadansu  /  shall  teach  others 

Wani  ya  tafo  daga  Hadija  Some  one  has  come  from  Hadija 

W a ni  =  another,  others  adjectivally 

Babu  wani  sarki  dunia  There  is  no  other  king  in  the  world 

Wata  rana  Another  day 

Wani,  another,  pronominally 

Naka  ba  ya  fi  na  wani  ba  Yours  is  not  heavier  than  any  other's 

Ni  koiya  ga  wadansu  I  shall  teach  others 

Use  of  wani  in  singular  for  plural  (Sokoto) 

Wani   mutane   ya    tafi    gari-n-     Some   people   went  to   the  country 
Bauchi  tari  tari  of  Bauchi  in  large  numbers 

Komi,  etc. 

Akoi  komi  chiki-n-rami  I  Is  there  anything  in  the  hole  ? 

Ya  fadi  komi  am  ma  ban  ji  ba  He  said  something  but  I  did  not 

hear 

Komine    ta   roko   Allah,   Allah  Whatever   it   was   she   asked   God, 

ya  bata  God  gave  her 

Komi  da  ka  bani  ni  ke  so  Whatever  you  give  me  I  like  it 

Komi  ka  yi  na  BQ  Whatever  you  do  I  like  it 


PRONOUN  97 

Abinda  ka  ke  yi  duka  .  .  .  Whatever  you  do  .  .  . 

Babu  komi  chiki-n-rami  Nothing  in  the  hole 

Ba  shi  fadi  komi  ba  He  said  nothing 

Ba  shi  yi  maki  komi  He  will  do  you  no  harm 

Sarikin  Kano  ya  fada  masu  babu  The  chief  of  Kano  said  nothing  to 

komi  them 

Ba  su  che  ba  komi  They  did  not  say  anything 

Ba  ya  beri  komi  sai  gasusuka  He  left  nothing  but  the  feathers 

Wa-ne 
This  is  literally  "  Who  is  it  ?  " 

Enna  wane  ?  Where  is  what's  his  name  ? 

Ya  che,  daga  gari  sarakin  wane      He  said — (/  come  from)  the  country 

of    King   Somebody.     ("  King " 

is  in  plural) 

Wani  .  .  .  wani,  etc. 

Wani  farke  ya  tafi  Kano,  wani  One   trader  goes  to   Kano,  one  to 

ya  tafi  Sokoto  Sokoto 

Wata  mache  ta  yi  daria,   wata  One  woman  laughed,  the  other  cried 

ta  yi  kuka 

Wadansu  suna  chi-n-nama,  wad-  Some  eat  meat,  others  do  not  eat  it 

ansu  ba  su  clii  ba 

Wadansu    mutane    suna     kiwo  Some  mind  camels,  others  work  the 

rakuma,  wadansu  suna  noma  farms 

Sundry  Negative  Idioms  (see  also  under  Adverbs) 

Ba  abinda  babu  There  is  nothing  short 

Babu     daiansu.       Babu     daia     Not  one  of  them 
chikinsu 

Ba  wanda  for  ba  kowa 

"  Wanda,"  the  relative  pronoun,  is  made  use  of  instead 
of  "kowa"  in  negative  sentences.    Such  short  sentences 
as    "  Ba    kowa    chan,"    etc.,    are    exceptions.     With    a 
dependent  sentence  "  ba  wanda "  is  used. 
Ba  wanda  zaya  yi  shi  sai  ni  No  one  shall  do  it  but  me 

Here  "  ba  kowa  "  would  be  quite  incorrect. 

"Ba  kowa"  may  be  translated  by  "nobody,"  but  "ba 
wanda  ya "  =  "  there  is  no  one  who."  In  the  latter 
phrase  in  both  English  and  Hausa  there  is  a  relative 
idea  instead  of  two  co-ordinate  sentences — 

Babu  wanda  ya  san'  shi  There  was  no  one  knew  him 

Abinda     fadawa    sun    fadi    ba      What  the  king's  council  orders  no 
wanda  shi  ke  da  iko  shi  sake          one  has  the  power  to  change 

Q 


98 


THE   HAUSA   LANGUAGE 


6.  REFLEXIVE  PRONOUN 

The  reflexive  pronoun  is  formed  with  the  aid  of  the 
noun  "kai,"  head. 


Kaina 

Kainka 

Kainki 

Kainsa 

Kainta 

Kainmu 

Kainku 

Kainsu 


or  kanka 
or  kanki 
or  kansa 
or  kanta 
or  kanmu 
or  kanku 
or  kansu 


myself 
yourself  (m.) 
yourself  (f.) 
himself 
herself 
ourselves 
yourselves 
themselves 


Examples  of  Syntax 


So   kainka,    wani   ya  kika;    ki 

kainka  wani  ya  soka 
Ba  ya  kula  da  kainsa  ba,  ya  sa 

kainsa  (or   ya   maida  hanka- 

linsa)  garin  cheton  wadansu 
Ya  bata  kansa 
Ta    gamu   da   kuda    suna   dafa 

kansu 


Love  yourself,  others  will  _hate  you  ; 

hate  yourself,  others  will  love  you 
He  cared  not  for  himself  but  he  set 

himself  to  save  others 

He  destroyed  himself 
She  met  some  flies  who  were  cook- 
ing  for  themselves  (story) 


7.  EMPHATIC  PRONOUN 

These  are,  similarly  to  the  reflexive  pronouns,  formed 
with  "kai,"  head,  with  the  addition  of  the  preposition 
"da,"  with  — 

Ni  dakaina  /  myself 

Kai  dakainka  or  kai  dakanka  you  yourself  (m.) 

Ke  dakainki  or  ke  dakanki  you  yourself  (f.) 

Shi  dakainsa  or  shi  dakansa  he  himself 

Ita  dakainta  or  ita  dakanta  she  herself 
Mu  dakaimu  or  mu  dakainmu  or  mu  dakanmu          we  ourselves 

Ku  dakainku  or  ku  dakanku  you  yourselves 

Su  dakainsu  or  su  dakansu  they  themselves 

The  objective  forms  of  the  foregoing  only  differ  in 
the  2nd  singular  and  3rd  feminine  singular,  which  are 
"ka  dakainka,"  "ki  dakainki,"  "ta  dakainta." 


PRONOUN  99 

In  syntax  the  personal  pronoun  follows  the  foregoing 
when  it  is  the  subject  of  the  verb — 

Ni  dakaina  na  tali 

Ke  dakainki  ki  ke  da  laifi 

Ko  ni  dakaina  sai  ina  tafia  ga 

kafata 
Su  dakansu    ba    su   so    su  sha-     They    themselves   did   not   like    to 

rua  nan  drink  of  that  water 

"Kadai,"  only,  alone,  is  also  used  with  the  personal 
pronoun.  Possibly  "  kadai "  is  derived  from  "  kai," 
head,  and  "daia,"  one — 

Ni  kadai  /  alone 

Kai  kadai  you  alone,  (in.) 

Ko  kadai  you  alone  (f.) 

Shi  kadai  he  alone 

Ita  kadai  she  alone 

Mu  kadai  we  alone 

Ku  kadai  you  alone 

Su  kadai  they  alone 


8.  RECIPROCAL  PRONOUN 

There  is  only  one  reciprocal  pronoun,  "  juna." 

It  is  unchanged  for  gender  or  number. 

With  the  past  tenses  "juna"  often  stands  alone  at 
the  end  of  the  sentence,  but  with  present  and  future 
tenses  it  is  joined  with  the  personal  pronouns  plural  by 
"n"  or  by  "da,"  sometimes  also  by  "ga." 

"  Juna  "  alone 

Sun  fada  juna  They  spoke  together 

Sabada   girimansu    ba    su    iya     They  cannot  pass  each  other  on 
wucho  juna  account  of  their  size 

With  "n" 

Ba  su  so  juna-n-su  ba  They  do  not  love  each  other 

Muna  yi-n-fada  juna-n-inu  We  are  fighting  amongst  ourselves 

Zaku  yi-n-fada  juna-n-su  They  will  fight  amongst  themselves 


100 


THE    HAUSA   LANGUAGE 


With  "da" 


Mun  yi  murna  da  juna 
Zaku  yi-n-fada  da  juna 
Muna  soyeya  da  juna-mu,  gama 
kowa  yana  ba  abokinsa  gaskia 


We  rejoiced  with  one  another 
You  will  fight  with  one  another 
We   are    at  fellowship    with   each 

other    because    each    trusts    his 

friend 


With  "ga 


Suna  raba  kurdi  ga  junansu 


They    divide 
themselves 


the    money    among 


CHAPTER   V 
THE    VERB 

PART  I 
DERIVATION 

There  are  in  Hausa  primitive  and  derived  verbs. 

The  origin  of  the  former  cannot  be  ascertained  from  the 
language  itself.  Amongst  them  are  such  verbs  as  "  chi," 
eat;  "sha,"  dnnk;  "ji,"  hear. 

Derived  verbs  are  formed  in  a  variety  of  ways.  It  is 
always  by  the  addition  of  a  suffix,  either  with  or  without 
some  modification  of  the  stem,  never  by  means  of  a 
prefix. 

Class  1 

An  indeterminate  root  receives  a  final  vowel  expressing 
rest,  or  motion  to,  or  motion  from,  as — 

Dauki,  take  up ;  dauko,  take  up  and  give  me ;  dauka,  lake  up  and 
take  away. 

Kawo,  carry  to  me ;  kai,  carry  or  carry  away. 

Class  2 
Suffix  "ta  "  to  form  verbs  from  nouns,  as — 

Tsorata,  to  frighten  one,  from  "  taoro,"  fear. 
101 


102  THE    HAUSA   LANGUAGE 

Class  3 

Reduplication  to  form  frequentative  or  intensitive  verbs, 
as — 

Buge-buge,  from  "  buga,"  strike. 

Or  by  part  reduplication,  as — 

Raraba,  scatter,  from  "raba,"  divide. 


To  an  indeterminate  root  "  che  "  or  "  ta  "  is  added,  the 
former  having  rather  present  and  future  meanings,  and 
being  frequently  intransitive,  and  the  latter  having  a  past 
meaning  and  a  transitive  sense,  as — 

Manche  and  manta,  to  forget. 

Glass  5 

Certain  primitive  verbs  take  a  number  of  suffixes.  There 
is  practically  little  or  no  change  of  meaning  attached,  but 
they  have  special  uses,  and  may  change  the  verb  from  a 
transitive  one  to  an  intransitive  one,  and  vice  versa.  As 
each  form  can  be  conjugated,  they  can  be  treated  as 
separate  verbs  as  much  as  are  the  verbs  in  Class  1. 

The  suffixes  in  question  are :  "  -da,"  "  -shi,"  "  -yes," 
"  -s,"  "  -sda,"  as— 

Ba,  bada,  bashi,  bayes,  bayesda,  to  give. 
Zuba,  zubas,  zubasda,  to  pour. 

Class  6 

"Nye"  may  be  added  together  with  some  slight 
modification  of  the  vowel  of  the  root.  It  is  an  intensitive 
particle. 

Chi,  to  eat ;  chainye,  to  devour. 

Class! 

A  noun  is  seldom  used  as  a  verb,  but  many 
verbs  in  English  can  only  be  translated  into  Hausa 


VERB  103 

by  the  use  of  a  noun  with   "yi,"  make,  or   "ji,"  hear, 
feel. 

Yi  girima,  to  grow,  lit.,  make  greatness. 

Ji  dadi,  to  be  pleased,  lit.,  feel  happiness  or  sweetness. 

Class  8 

Some  derived  verbs  are  nouns  without  change  of  form, 
but  it  is  always  doubtful  whether  to  assume  that  the  verb 
is  derived  from  a  noun  or  that  the  noun  is  derived  from 
a  verb— 

Man,  a  blow  or  to  strike.          Tashi,  rising  or  to  rise. 
So,  love  or  to  love. 

Class  9 

To  some  verbs,  but  not  all,  the  termination  "  -a  "  may 
be  added,  the  stem  being  unchanged.  A  sort  of  present 
participial  form  is  so  produced,  but  though  this  form  may 
be  translated  as  a  verb  in  English  it  is  in  reality  a  noun, 
and  has,  accordingly,  been  treated  as  such.  See  under 
derived  nouns,  Class  8. 

This  termination  may  be  written  as  " wa "  after  "a," 
"e,"  "o,"  "u,"  and  "ya"  after  "i." 


Derived  Verbs- — Class  1 

The  terminal  vowels  are  modified  to  indicate  change  of 
meaning. 

"  A  "  =  motion  from  the  speaker.  The  accent  is  on  the 
last  syllable. 

"0"=motion  to  the  speaker.  The  accent  is  on  the 
last  syllable. 

"  I,"  "e,"  or  "  u  "  =  indicate  rest  or  uncertain  direction, 
but  they  are  also  interchanged  for  euphony. 

Not  by  any  means  all  verbs  in  the  Hausa  language 
admit  of  these  change  of  vowels.  A  knowledge  of  those 
that  do  can  only  be  acquired  by  practice. 

This  use  of  the  termination  "  u  "  must  not  be  confused 


104  THE    HAUSA   LANGUAGE 

with  the  passive  form,  which  will  be  explained  in  its 
proper  place. 

When  the  pronoun  has  the  termination  "na"  it  is 
generally  found  that  the  verb  ends  in  "a"  also.  (See 
under  this  tense  in  chapter  on  verb.) 

The  following  are  examples  of  the  foregoing  changes 
applied  to  a  certain  number  of  verbs — 

Buga,  strike 

Ya  bugi  yaro  He  struck  the  boy 

Bugi  yaro  !  Hit  the  boy  ! 

Ya  huge  shi  He  beat  him 

Na  huge  duchi  /  struck  a  stone 

Buga  shi !  Beat  him  ! 

Na  buga  kafata  ga  duchi  /  struck  my  foot  against  a  stone 

ina  bugu-n-yaro  I  am  beating  the  boy 

Ina  bugu-n-sa  (or  bugu-n-shi)         I  am  beating  him 

Buga  kofa  1  Knock  at  the  door 

The  termination  "  o  "  does  not  seem  to  occur  with  this 
verb.  In  all  the  examples  of  "  buga  "  given  above  it  is 
seen  that  the  sense  of  direction  scarcely  applies.  It  must 
therefore  be  assumed  that  the  variations  are  all  for 
euphony,  which  will  be  apparent  if  an  attempt  be  made 
to  use  the  wrong  vowel. 

Dauka,  take 

Dauki  I  Take  it  ! 

Dauki  riga  !  Take  the  cloth 

Na  dauke  ta  I  took  it 

Dauka  ta  !  Take  it ! 

Ya  dauka  kaya  He  took  up  the  load 

Zani  dauka-1-riga  /  am  going  to  take  the  cloth 

Dauko  !  Take  and  bring  it  here 

Dauko  shi !  Take  it  down 

Ya  dauke  shi  He  took  it  up 

Dauke  su  !  Take  them  away  ! 

Ku  dauki  kaya  Take  up  your  loads 

Dauki  sabuni  mai-issa  Take  enough  soap 

Same. 

Ya  sami  riga  He  received  the  cloth 

Sami  riga  Accept  the  cloth 

Na  same  shi  I  have  received  it 


VERB 


105 


Sama  ta ! 
Na  samu  doki 
Na  samu  mutane 


Accept  it ! 

I  have  received  the  horse 

I  found  the  men 


("  Hainya  ta  samu,"  there  is  a  road,  or  the  road  is  found,  or  now  exists. 
This  is  the  passive  verbal  form,  and  has  no  connection  with  the 
scale  of  vowels  indicating  direction,  etc.) 


Mi  ya  same  ka 
Komi  ya  sama  se 
Ba  ya  samu  ya  shiga 
Ya  samu  wata  guda 
Na    samu    rongomi,    na 
dama,   na  samu  sanki 


What  is  the  matter  with  you 
Whatever  befalls  him 
He  could  not  enter 
He  spent  one  month 
I  feel  better 


Kama 


Na  kame  doki 

Na  kama  yaro  a  bisa  doki 

Kama  ! 

Kamo ! 

Ya  kama  hainya 

Ba  ni  kama 

Ya  kamu  kifi 

Kifaye  nawa  munka  kamo  ? 

Daga  gari  nan  kishirua  ta  kamo 

mutane 
Ku  mayes  mamu  rakumamu  da 

kuka  kamu 


/  caught  the  horse 

I  caught  the  boy  on  the  horse 

Catch  it  and  go  ! 

Catch  it  and  come  I 

He  took  his  road 

I  would  not  believe  (it) 

He  caught  the  fish 

How  many  fish  have  we  caught  ? 

In  that  land  thirst  seized  the  people 


Damre 


Na  damre  kaya 

Na  damra  fit ila  a  bisa  kaya 

Adamra      siliyu     dama     hauni 

(poetic) 
Andamre  kaya  duka  ? 


/  tie  the  load 

I  tie  the  lamp  on  the  load 

Chains    shall    be   bound    on   their 

right  and  left  hands 
Are  all  the  loads  tied  up  ? 


Komo 


Komo  1 
Koma  1 

Ya  koma  daki-n-sa 
Ya  komo  dakina 
Tun  ba  akoma  ba 
En  in  11  komo  mu  futa  rana  daia, 
kana  mu  tafi  su 


Come  back  ! 
Oo  back  I 

He  has  returned  to  his  house 
He  has  come  back  to  my  house 
Until  there  is  no  return 
When   we  come  back  we  will  rest 
one  day,  then  we  will  go  fishing 


"  Komo,"  "  koma,"  being  radically  verbs  of  motion,  it  is 
not  possible  for  them  to  take  the  terminations  "i,"  "e," 


106  THE    HAUSA    LANGUAGE 

or  "  u " ;    and  the  same  applies  to  other  verbs   which 
cannot  be  dissociated  from  any  idea  of  motion : — 

Dawoyo 

Dawoyo  !  Return  here  ! 

Dawoya  !  Return  there  I 


Gudu! 
Gudo! 
Kadda  ka  gudu ! 


Gudu 


Fita 


Ya  fita  da  shi  He  went  off  with  it 

Bana  ta  fita  The  sun  has  risen 

Ya  fita  nagari  He  has  turned  out  well 

Fito  !  Come  out  I 

Enda  rana  ta  ke  fitowa  Where  the  sun  comes  out  from 

Nema,  seek 

Bawana  ya  tafi  nema-n-yaro,  My  slave  has  gone  to  look  for  the 

ba  ya  same  shi  ba,  kai  ka  tafi  boy.  He  has  not  found  him. 

ka  nemo  shi  Do  you  go  and  look  for  him 

Suka  che  ku  nemo  masa  mache  They  said  find  a  wife  for  him 

Aiki,  send 

Na  aiki  wani  Kano  /  have  sent  some  one  to  Kano 

Na  aiko  wani  nan  /  sent  some  one  here 

Ya  aikoni  He  sent  me  here 

Ya  aikini  He  sent  me  there 

Sariki  ya  aiko  agaishe  ka  The  chief  has  sent  to  salute  you 

Koiya,  teach     Koiyo,  learn 
Allah  shi  koiya  muna  hainyansa     May  God  teach  us  His  way 

Fada,  tell 

Ya  fada  mani  He  told  me 

Ya  fadi  gaskia  He  spoke  the  truth 

Muna  fadi,  ba  mu  boiye  ba  We  tell  you,  we  do  not  hide  it 

Kun  ji  fa,  mun  fadi  ...  Do  you  listen,  we  say  .  .  . 

Fadi,  fada,  fall 
Ya  fado  daga  bisa  doki  He  fell  off  the  horse 


Sayo 


VERB 

Sayt,  to  buy,  sell,  barter 
Sell  to  me 


107 


Wanke,  wash 
Wanko  Wash  and  bring  it  back 

Rubutu,  write 
Ya  che  ya  iya  rubutu,  ya  rubuta     He  said  he  could  write  ;  he  wrote 

The  following   are    some   other  verbs   that    admit   of 
these  changes — 


Aje  (azhe) 

azha 

put 

Beri 

bero 

leave 

fesa 

feso 

spit 

issa 

isso 

reach 

jefa 

jefo 

throw 

fa  ma 

gamo 

meet 

Karbi 

arba 

karbo 

receive 

Rufe 

rufa 

cover 

sapka 

sapko 

alight 

shiga 

shigo 

enter 

Tafi 

tafo 

go,  come 

Ture 

tura 

thrust 

Some  verbs  appear  in  longer  forms  owing  to  the  final 
vowel  not  being  changed — 

Bi  biyo  follow 

ja  jawo  draw,  towards 

Kai  kawo  carry,  bring 

Kiraye  kira  kirawo  call 

Je  (zhe)  za-(-pronoun)     zo  go,  come 


Derived  Verbs — Class  2 

Suffix  "  ta  "  to  nouns.    These  verbs  are  few  in  number — 

Tsorata  to  frighten  one  from     tsoro        fear 

Taurata  to  harden  oneself  „         tauri        hardness 

Shaworata  to  hold  a  consultation       ,,         shawora  consultation 


108 


THE    HAUSA   LANGUAGE 


Derived  Verbs,  Class  3 

Reduplication  to  form  intensitive  or  frequentative  verbs. 
Either  the  whole  verb  is  repeated,  or  more  commonly  only 
the  first  syllable — 


Buge-buge, 

bubuga,  bubugi 
Chainye-chainye 
Chichika 
Fakake 
Gushe-gushe, 

gurgusa 
Sansanche 

Tsatsaga 

Tatara 

Zazaga 


to  beat  much 

to  be  gluttonous 

to  fill  up 

to  grope  for 

gush  out  frequently 
or  abundantly 

explain  much,  under- 
stand much 

tear  to  pieces 

pick  up  or  out 

to  shake  up,  walk 
about 


from     buga        to  strike 

„         chainye    to  devour 
„         chika        to  fill 
„      ?  fake          to  hide 
to  gush 


gusa 


Sosoke 


to  pierce  with  many 
holes 


tara 
zaga 


soke 


to  know 

tear 

to  gather 

to  shake, 
walk  back- 
wards and 
forwards 

to  pierce, 
prick 


Ya  bubugi  yara 

Mutane  suka  bubuge  ta  ta  mutu 

Munka  soso  ubane-n-mu 

Zasu  rurubuta  takardu 

Ku  kakashe  raguna 

Ya  kakashe  su  duka 

Kaddadai  ajita   yi  sagara  raai- 

kirkira  (poetic) 
Ku  dadauka  abinchi 
Ina  so-n-gagaida  mainya 
Suna  gagani-n-mutane 
Shashafesu  da  tsuma 


He  beat  the  boys  well 

The  men  beat  her  till  she  died 

We  have  loved  our  fathers 

They  are  going  to  write  letters 

Kill  sheep 

He  exterminated  them 

Let  her  not  be  heard  calling  fowls 

with  a  loud  voice 
Each  one  of  you  take  some  food 
I  wish  to  salute  each  of  the  elders 
They  see  men 
Wipe  each  of  them  with  a  rag 


It  is  to  be  noted  that  whenever  there  is  a  reduplicated 
form  of  the  verb  and  the  noun  is  in  the  plural,  the  noun 
usually  has  an  indefinite  sense. 


Derived  Verbs.     Class  4 

In  this  class  are  verbs  which  may  end  either  in  "che  " 
or  "  ta,"  these  terminations  being  added  to  the  root  which 
has  no  separate  existence  as  a  word.  The  meaning  in 


VERB  109 

either  case  is  the   same  in  English,  but  their  uses  are 
slightly  different. 

The  following  are  some  verbs  of  this  nature — 

Manche  manta  forget 

Bache  bata  destroy,  lose 

Kwanche  kwanta  lie  or  lay  down  to  sleep 

Jiche-  jita  turn  upside  down 

Jirkiche  jirkita  „ 

Lalache  lalata  (1)  be  idle ;  (2)  perish 

Rubuchi  rubuta  write 

Rikiche  rikita  (1)  be  confused ;  (2)  confuse 

The  form  ending  in  "  che  "  is  more  commonly  intransitive. 

This  form  is  used  for  preference  with  present  and  future 
meanings.  The  form  in  "ta"  has  for  preference  a 
transitive  and  a  past  meaning. 

Because  a  verb  ends  in  "che"  it  does  not  invariably 
follow  that  there  is  a  form  in  "  ta." 

It  is  further  to  be  noted  that  the  "ta  "  form  can  never 
be  used  as  a  substantive.  The  "  che  "  form  is  commonly 
used  as  such,  however,  as  "  lalachi,"  idleness. 

Na  jiche  koria  /  turn  the  calabash  upside  down 

Na  jita  koria  a  bisa-n-ta  /  turned  a  calabash  upside  down 

over  it 

Na  rubuchi  litafi  /  write  a  book 

Na  rubuta  suna-n-sa  a  bisa  litafi  /  wrote  his  name  upon  the  book 

Kada  ka  manta  Do  not  forget 

Abi-n-nan  ya  bache  mani  /  have  lost  this  thing 

Su  baohe  tare  They  perish  together 

Malika  ya  batansu  The  angel  shall  afflict  them 

Ya  bata  hainya  He  lost  the  way 

Derived  Verbs.     Class  5 

To  the  terminations,  "-da,"  "  -shi,"  "  -s,"  "-yes," 
"  -yesda  "it  is  not  possible  to  assign  any  precise  meaning 
in  English. 

The  effect  of  their  addition  to  the  primitive  verb  is  to 
make  it  transitive,  intransitive,  causative,  or  by  making 
the  word  itself  longer  to  supply  suitable  words  to  make  a 
statement  more  formal  or  dignified. 

All  forms  can  be  conjugated. 


110  THE    HAUSA   LANGUAGE 

Their  effect  upon  the  primitive  verb  can  be  best  seen 
from  illustrations. 

Da. — This  may  be  the  preposition  "with."  In  any  case 
that  rendering  will  satisfy  the  majority  of  instances  of  its 
use  quite  clearly — 

Ba         give  Bada         give  up 

Sayi      barter  Saida         barter  with = sell 

Tara      collect  Tarda        come  up  with,  overtake 

In  monosyllabic  verbs  ending  in  "  i,"  "  da  "  is  sharpened 
to  "ta,"  as— 

Ku  yita  aiki  Get  on  with  your  work 

Bita  hainya  nan         Go  by  this  road 

See  further  examples  under  "yi"  in  chapter  xii. 

Yes  gives  an  intransitive  force— 

Bayes         give  up 

If  "  da  "  is  added  to  "  yes  "  a  transitive  force  is  resumed. 
Na  bayes     /  give  up  Na  bayesdashi     /  give  it  up 

S  gives  intransitive  force. 

Shi  gives  a  transitive  force  to  an  intransitive  primitive 
verb,  but  is  added  to  transitive  verbs  without  change  of 
meaning.  It  takes  a  pronoun  only  as  direct  object,  not 
a  noun. 

Examples 

Ba,  give.     Transitive 

Ya  bani  kurdi        He  gave  me  the  money 
Ya  bashi  ita  He  gave  her  to  him 

NOTE. — "  Ba  "  is  only  followed  by  the  recipient  as  a  second  direct 
object  if  the  latter  is  a  pronoun.  If  a  noun  "  bada  "  is  used.  The 
relative  position  of  the  two  objects  is  changeable. 

"  Bada  "  always  requires  a  preposition  before  the  indirect 
object. 

Ya  bada  kurdi  ga  mutane  He  gave  money  to  the  men 

Na  bada  kurdi  ga  kai  /  gave  the  money  to  you 

Na  bada  ita  gare  shi  7  gave  her  to  him 

Na  bada  shi  ga  kai  /  gave  him  (or  it)  to  you 


VERB 


111 


Other  phrases : — 


Bada  daria 
Bada  tsoro 
Bada  laifi 

Also — 


cause  to  laugh 
inspire  fear 
condemn 


Hainya  ta  badamu  zua  gari 
Muka  bada  fuska  ga  garimu 


bada  girima       honour 
bada  hainya       make  way 
bada  gaskia      justify 


The  road  led  us  to  the  town 

We  turned  our  face  to  our  country 


Examples  of  other  forms  of"ba" 


Na  bashe  shi  ga  kai 
Ya  bayes  (or  bayas) 
Na  bayesda  shi 

Sariki  ya   che  ka  bashi  abinsa. 
To,  na  bayes 


Ba  ka  bashi  tufafinsa  ba  ? 
bayes  or  na  bayesda  su 
Ka  bayes  ga  mutume  chana 
Za-abashieni  sabada  bashi 


Na 


I  give  it  to  you 

He  gave  (it)  up 

I  gave  it  up 

The  chief  says  you  must  give  him 

his  property.     All  right,  I  will 

give  (it) 
Have  you  not  given  him  his  clothes  ? 

I  have  given  them 
Give  it  to  the  man  there 
I  shall  be  given  on  account  of  a 

debt 


Saiya,  barter,  etc. 

Various  forms  :  "  saida,"  "  saishe,"  "  sayes  "  ("  sayas," 
"sayar,"  "sayer "),  "sayesda"  ("sayarda,"  "sayerda"). 
Before  a  pronoun  "saiya"  is  usually  found  as  "saiye." 
"Saiyo"  is  to  buy  and  bring  back. 

The  forms  "  saida,"  "  sayesda  "  (or  "  sayerda  ")  are 
always  transitive. 

"Saiyes"  ("saiyar")  is  intransitive.  The  other  forms 
may  be  both.  "Saishe"  is  only  used  before  a  personal 
pronoun. 


Ina   so    en   saye   rnkumi,   enna 

akesamunsa  ? 
Masu  -  i .ik ii in i    euna    chiki  -  n  - 

kasua,  suna  saye  da  sayerua 
Na  saida  rago  ga  shi 
Na  saida  shi  ga  shi 
Ya  saishe  shi 
Ya  saida  ita 


/  want  to  buy  a  camel.     Where  are 

they  to  be  found 
The  owners  of  the  camels  are  in  the 

market.     They  buy  and  sell 
I  sold  the  ram  to  him 
I  sold  it  to  him 
He  sold  it 
He  sold  her 


112 


THE    HAUSA   LANGUAGE 


Ya  sayes  (sayas) 
Ka  sayes — abinda  ba  ka  iya  so 
Da  Kelowi  sun  saida  ni 
Sun  saye  ni  wuri-n-wani  mutum 
Sun  sayes  ni  ga  Salah  bin  Omer 
Ina  so  ka  kai  zane-n-nan  wuri- 
n-dilali,   shi  saida  shi.     Idan 
ya   sayer  ka   karbi  kurdi  ka 
sayo    mani    rago,    ka    kawo 
saura-n-kurdi 
Doki-n-nan  na  sayerua  ne  ?    Aa, 

ansayesda  shi  jia 
Ka  tafi  ga  wani  ka  saiyo 
Nawa  nawa  akesayesda  su  ? 
Nawa  anasayesda  su  ? 
Suna  sayesua  dukiansu 
Abubua  duka  ambayes  gareni 


He  sold  (it) 

Sell  (it) — whatever  you  may  not  want 
They  sold  me  to  the  Kelowi 
They  sold  me  to  a  certain  man 
They  sold  me  to  Salah  bin  Omer 
I  want  you  to  take  this  cloth  to  the 
broker  to  sell.      When  he  has  sold 
it  take  the  money  and  buy  for  me 
a  ram.     Bring  back  the  rest  of 
the  money 
Is  this  horse  for  sale  ?     No,  it  was 

sold  yesterday 

Go  to  some  one  else  and  buy 
How  much  each  ? 
How  much  are  they  (in  a  lump)  ? 
They  are  selling  their  goods 
All  things  are  delivered  unto  me 


NOTE. — "r"  is  found  as  a  phonetic  variation  for  " s,"  but 
always  employed  at  the  end  of  a  sentence. 


Bata,  to  lose,  spoil 


Ya  bata  da  kurdinsa 

Ya  bata  da  shi 

Ya  batashe  shi 

Ya  batas 

Shi  yaro  ne,  shina  batasua 


He  lost  his  money 

He  lost  him  or  it 

He  lost  him  (or  it) 

He  lost  (it) 

He  is  a  boy  and  will  spoil  it 


Bache,  to  be  spoiled 

The  various  forms  of  "  bata  "  are  used  for  this  verb,  which  in  itself 
admits  of  no  variations — 


Abi-n-nan  ya  bache  mani 
Yaro  ya  bache  mata 


/  have  lost  the  thing 
The  boy  was  lost  to  her 


Fita,  to  take  out,  go  out 


Ya  fita  da  mutum 

Ya  fita  da  shi 

Ya  fishe  ni 

Ya  fitas 

Na  fishe  ka 

Ya  fitasda  riga-sa 

Shi  fishe  mu  aiki  mutane  zina 
(poetic) 

Su  sa  fitasua  kurkono.  ("  Fita- 
sua  "  is  "  fitas  "  with  the  termi- 
nation "  ua  ") 


He  pulled  the  man  out 

He  freed  him 

He  released  me  or  pulled  me  out 

He  pulled  (him)  out 

I  dismiss  you 

He  took  off  his  coat 

He  separates  us  from  the  work  of 

adulterers 
They  made  the  guinea  worm  come 

out 


VERB  113 

Tashi,  to  rise 

Other  forms— "  Tada,"  "tashe,"  "tayes,"   "tayesda," 
"  taso." 

Saidai   shi   tada    haba    yi   jaki  He  would  merely  lift  up  his  chin 

berbera  (poetic)  and  bray  like  an  ass 

Na  tada  manzo  I  sent  a  messenger 

Ka  tasheni  da  sasafe  Wake  me  very  early 

En  na  tashe  yaranku  kua  zo  //  /  raise  up  your  children,  will 

you  come  ? 

Hadari  ya  taso  masu  a  chikin  The  storm   descended   on   them  in 

daji  the  forest 

Chi,  eat 

Ki  cbl  nama  !  Eat  meat  ("  you  "  is  feminine) 

Na  chishe  shi  /  gave  him  to  eat,  I  fed  him 

Ya  chida  doki  da  dawa  He  fed  the  horse  with  guinea  corn 

Ya  chida  shi  da  dawa  He  fed  him  with  corn 

Ya  chiyes  He  has  fed,  or  eaten  (it) 

Jefa,  throw 

Na  jefada  abu  /  threw  a  thing 

Na  jefada  shi  /  threw  it 

Na  jefashe  shi  I  threw  it 

Na  jefas  7  threw 

Other  forms—"  jefshi,"  "  jefasda,"  "  jefda  "  =  "  jefada  "  ; 
also  found  as  "  shepta  "  and  "  shebda." 

Ajefo  bar  takardu-n-aiku  namu      We  shall  be  placed  according  to  the 
(poetic)  list  of  our  deeds 

Yas  or  yes,  to  throw  away 

Na   yada   shi  (yada  =  ya-r-da  =      I  threw  it  away 

yasda 

Na  yashe  shi  7  threw  it  away 

Ya  yas  77e  threw  (it)  away 

Ta  yada  zane  She  threw  off  her  cloth 

Tara,  assemble 

Ya  tara  mutane  He  collected  the  men 

Ya  tarasu  He  collected  them 

Suka  tara  gari  They  are  of  one  town 

Uwa  in  uka  tara  We  have  one  mother 

Ya  tarda  mutane  He  assembled  the  men 

Ya  tara  da  su  He  collected  them. 

H 


114 


THE  HAUSA  LANGUAGE 


Ya  tarshe  su 
Ya  tarda  chiwuta 
Na  tarda  shi 
Ya  taras 

Ka  tarshi  mu  ji  dadi  (poetic) 
Kadadai   ka   tara   hanuka   don 
tsoro-n-beri  (poetic) 


He  assembled  them 
He  will  contract  a  disease  (poetic) 
/  overtook  him 
He  collected  (them) 
Help  us  to  feel  happy 
Although  you  put  both  your  hand* 
to  it  for  fear  of  losing  it 


Tsaya,  stand 
Other  forms — tsai,  tsayi,  tsaishie.  tsaisa 


Na  tsaya  daidai 

Ya  tsaya 

Ni  na  tsaya  ga  litafi  nan 

Malaiku  su  tsaida  zugazuganta 

(poetic) 
Da  ya  fara  chewa  sun  tsaisa  sa 

Na  tsaitse  shi 

Kowane  zashi  tsayesda  wannan 

mutum  zaakasshe  shi 
Sun  sani  mi  ya  tsaishie  ni  haka 


I  stand  upright 

It  is  finished 

I  hit  upon  this  book 

The  angels  will  lift  up  the  bellows 

When    he    began    to     speak    they 

stopped  him 
I  got  before  him 
Whoever  shall  detain  this  man  shall 

be  killed 
They  kneiv  what  delayed  me  so 


Kawo,  bring 

Kauda  (=kawo  da)     take  away,  abrogate; 
kawas,  kaushi 

Chira,  save 


Kawasda,     remove, 


Ya  chirada  mutum  daga  rua 
Ya  chirada  ni  daga  rua 
Ya  chirashe  shi 
Ya  chiras 


He  saved  the  man  from  the  water 
He  saved  me  from  the  water 
He  saved  him 
He  saved  (him) 


Zuba,  pour 


Ya  zubada  rua 
Ya  zubada  shi 
Ya  zubsh6  shi 
Ya  zubas 
Zubasda  mia 

Also — 

Amsa,  amsashi 

Bi,  bishe 

Mu    roke    ta'ala    shi    bishemu 

hainya 
Cheta,  chetas 
Issa,  ishe,  iyes,  iyesda 


He  poured  the  water  out 

He  poured  it  out 

He  poured  it  out 

He  poured  (it)  out  or  It  gushed  out 

To  expectorate  violently 


answer 
follow 
We    beseech    the    Exalted    One   to 

direct  our  steps 
save 


VERB  115 

Gaji,  gasda,  gashi  weary 

Gama,  gamshe  fit,  please,  meet 

Gaya,  gaida,  gaishe  salut 

Kawo,  kauda,  kawasda,  kawas,  carry 

kaushi 

Kada,  kayes  condemn 

Koshi,  kosda,  koshada  satisfy 

Kwanche,  kwanta,  kwantas  lie  down 

Koiya,  koiyas  teach 

Kada  su   koiyas   chikin   sunan  That  they  should  not  teach  again  in 

Isa  the  name  of  Jesus 

Lasa,  lasda,  lashe  lick 

Murda,  murshi  twist 

Sani,  sanasda,  sanda,  sanaswa  know 

Shida,  shishi  descend 

Zarana,  samshi  sit,  set  down 

Ku  samshisu  kasa  hamsinham-  Make  them  sit  down  in  fifties 

sin 

Wohalla,  wohalshi,  wohalda  trouble 


Derived  Verbs — Glass  6 

The  intensitive  particle  unye"  is  added  to  some  slight 
variation  of  the  stem  of  a  primitive  verb — 

Sha         drink  shainye  swallow  greedily 

Chi          eat  chainye,  devour  (as  wild  beasts) 

Taya       help  tainye  help 


Derived  Verbs — Glass  7 

Many  nouns  which  have  not  a  related  verb  form  can  only 
be  used  as  predicates  with  the  aid  of  the  verb  "  yi,"  to  do, 
or  "  ji,"  to  hear.  They  can  only  take  an  indirect  object — 

Muka  yi  zanche  We  conversed 

Yi  girima  To  grow 

Further  examples  of  the  use  of  "yi"  are  given  under 
idiomatic  expressions. 

In  Sokoto,  Zanfara,  and  Katsina  "  wo "  is  commonly 
used  for  "  yi,"  as  "  wo  takarda,"  send  a  letter ,  "  wo  yaki," 
wage  war. 


116  THE  HAUSA  LANGUAGE 

Use  of  "it'" 

V  */ 

The  verb  "  ji "  is  combined  with  substantives  or 
adjectives  similarly  to  "  yi,"  and  must  be  equally  regarded 
as  a  form-word — "  Ji  tsoro,"  to  be  afraid ;  "  ji  haushi,"  be 
angry ;  "  ji  kumia,"  feel  pity  ;  "  ji  dadi,"  be  pleased. 

The  object  which  is  indirect  is  expressed  by  adding  the 
possessive  pronoun  to  the  noun — 

Ba  ka  ji  tausayi  mu  You  felt  no  pity  for  us 

Ba      na      ji-n-dadi-n-hawanki,  I  do  not  feel  comfortable  riding  you, 

kura  hycena 

Ka  ji  dadi-n-hawana  ?  Do  you  like  riding  me  ? 

Derived  Verbs — Glass  8 

Nouns  and  verbs  of  same  form — 

Ya  fadi  masu  He  said  to  them 

Da  ya  kare  fadi-n-sa  When  he  had  finished  his  speech 

Duma  ta  lalachi  The  world  perishes 

Lalachi  Idleness 

Ba  magana  !  Do  not  talk  ! 

Don    Allah    ya    badamu  so-n-     Because  God  has  given  us  a  love  of 

kwana  sleep 

Tambaye-n-nan  da  ka  ke  yi  The  question  you  ask  (make) 

Kana  yi-n- magana  Hausa  ?             Do  you  speak  Hausa? 

Koiya  na  Shaitan  The  teaching  of  Satan 

Su  dora  kira  They  raise  a  cry 

Ya  kira  shi  He  called  him 

Suna  magana  banza  They  talk  nonsense 


PART  II 
DIVISION  OF  VERBS 

Verbs  are  of  two  kinds — transitive  and  intransitive. 
The  transitive  verb  requires  an  object. 
The  intransitive  verb  denotes  a  state,  feeling,  or  action 
which  terminates  in  the  doer  or  agent. 

Some  verbs  in  Hausa  are  (1)  only  transitive ;   others 


VERB  117 

(2)  only  intransitive  ;  (3)  some,  primarily  one  or  the  other, 
may  be  used  in  the  opposite  sense  without  any  change  of 
form ;  and  (4)  yet  others  by  taking  an  addition  to  the  stem 
can  be  recognised  as  transitive  alone  or  intransitive  alone. 

This  last  feature  is  not  found  in  the  English  language, 
where  there  is  in  general  nothing  in  the  look  or  appearance 
of  a  verb,  unless  its  intransitive  counterpart  is  known  (e.g., 
raise,  rise ;  set,  sit),  which  renders  it  possible  to  tell 
whether  it  is  transitive  or  intransitive. 

Causative  verbs  are,  of  course,  all  transitive. 

The  following  are  examples  of  the  different  kinds  of 
transitive  and  intransitive  verbs  : — 

(1)  Verbs  only  Transitive, 
Gani,  to  see  ;  ji,  to  hear  ;  kawo,  to  bring 

(2)   Verbs  only  Intransitive 
Zo,  come  ;  tafi,  go  ;  zamna,  sit  down 

(3)  Verbs  both  Transitive  and  Intransitive  in  Meaning 

Kiwo,  tend  a  flock,  graze,  feed 
Boye,  hide,  hide  oneself,  be  hid 
Chika,  fill,  be  full 

(4)  Verbs  whose  Form  Indicate  whether  Transitive  or 
Intransitive 

Transitive 

Verbs  formed  from  nouns  with  suffix  "  ta "  (see  class 
2  of  derived  verbs);  also  verbs  ending  with  "ta"  which 
have  corresponding  intransitive  forms  ending  in  "che." 

The  termination  "shi"  (see  derived  verbs,  class  5); 
also  the  termination  "yesda." 

Intransitive 

The  termination  "  che "  usually ;  also  the  termination 
"  yes  "  ;  also  verbs  ending  in  "  u  "  which  are  formed  from 
transitive  verbs  by  the  change  of  the  final  vowel.  Many  of 
the  latter  are  usually  found  only  in  the  3rd  person  singular, 
and  so  a  middle  voice  may  be  said  to  be  produced. 


118 


THE  HAUSA  LANGUAGE 


The  suffix  "  wa "  may  be  added  to  this  form  (see 
examples  under  present  participle). 

This  intransitive  ending — "  u  " — must  be  carefully  distin- 
guished from  the  termination  "  u,"  which  many  transitive 
verbs  take,  without  ceasing  to  be  transitive,  either  for 
euphony  or  to  indicate  absence  or  neutrality  of  direction. 
These  are  discussed  in  class  1,  Derived  Verbs. 


Some  Intransitive  Verbs  in  "u" 


Budu,  to  be  open 
Bugu,  to  be  beaten 
Dadu,  to  be  increased 
Dafu,  to  be  cooked 
Damru,  to  be  bound 
Faru,  to  happen 
Fasu,  to  be  broken 
Furu,  to  be  burning 
Godu,  to  appear 
Gamu,  to  meet 
Haifu,  to  be  delivered 
Kaf u,  to  be  fastened 
Karu,  to  be  added 
Kasu,  to  be  slain 
Kuntu,  to  be  loosened 
Matsu,  to  be  narrow 
Mutu,  to  die 
Nadu,  to  be  rolled  up 
Niku,  to  be  ground 
Rabu,  to  depart 
Ragu,  to  be  decreasing 
Retu,  to  be  swinging 
Rufu,  to  be  shut 
Sanu,  to  be  known 
Shimfudu,  to  be  spread 
Taru,  to  be  assembled 
Wazu,  wasu,  to  be  dispersed 
Yiwu,  yiu,  to  be  done 
Zubu,  subu,  to  be  gushed  out 


from  bude,  to  open 

„  buga,  to  beat 

„  dade,  lengthen 

„  dafe,  to  cook 

„  damre,  to  bind 

„  fara,  to  begin 

fashe,  to  break 

fura,  to  kindle 

goda,  to  show 

gama,  to  join 

haife,  to  beget 

kafa,  to  fasten 

kara,  to  add 

kashe,  to  kill 

kunche,  to  untie 

rnatse,  to  squeeze 

nade,  to  coil 

nika,  to  grind 

raba,  to  divide 

rage,  to  lessen 

reto,  to  shake  to  and  fro 

rufe,  to  shut 

sani,  to  know 

shimfude,  to  spread 

tara,  to  collect 

wasa,  to  disperse 

yi.  to  do 

zuba,  to  pour 


This  form  is  used  in  a  reflexive  sense,  and  also  follows 
the  same  verb  in  the  passive  voice  for  emphasis — 


Mutum  ya  bugu 
Dundu  ya  dafu 
Kofa  ta  budu 
Kofa  ta  rufu 


The  man  is  beaten 
The  yam  is  cooked 
The  door  stands  open 
The  door  is  shut 


VERB  lid 

Tukunia  ta  fasu  The    pot    is    broken,    has    broken 

itself 

Jirigi  ya  rabu  The  boat  is  split 

Ka    tara    mutane    da    zasu   yi-     Collect  the  men  to  work.     They  are 

aiki.     Sun  taru  collected 

Ta  ga  wata  akwia  ta  half u  She  saw  a  certain  goat  which  had 

just  brought  forth 

For  Emphasis 

Adamre  shi,  shi  damru  Let  it  be  tied  so  that  it  is  tied  fast 

or  tie  it  tight 

Abugashi  shi  bugu  Let  him  be  well  beaten 

Ayishi,  shi  yiwu  Let  it  be  done  well 


PART  III 
AUXILIARY  VERBS 

There  are  three  forms  of  the  verb  "to  be." 

They  have  gender. 

They  refer  to  present  and  past  time,  but  not  to  future. 

They  are — 

Ke  (m.  and  f.)  Che  (f.)  Ne  (common) 

For  the  future  the  verb  "zama,"  to  become,  is  used. 

There  is  no  auxiliary  "  have,"  nor  is  "  have  "  a  possessive 
verb.  The  place  of  the  latter  is  taken  by  the  preposition 
"da,"  with. 

The  following  is  the  conjugation  of  the  auxiliary  verbs — 

ni  ne  ni  ke 

kai  no  ka  ke 

ke  che  (f.)           ki  ke  (f  ) 

shi  ne  shi,  ya,  yi  ke              The  negative  forms  are 

ita  che  (f.)  ta  ke  (f.)                              the  same  with  "  ba 

urn  ne  mu  ke                                   ...  ba." 

ku  ne  ku  ke 

su  no  su  ke 

"Ke" 

"Ke"  is  used  both  as  an  auxiliary  to  form  one  of 
the  present  tense  forms  of  other  verbs,  and  also  as  a 


120 


THE  HAUSA  LANGUAGE 


substantive    verb.      In    the    latter    capacity    it   usually 
requires  the  complement  to  precede  it — 


Da  ka  ke  or  Kai,  da  ka  ke 

Sania  ta  ke 

Dana  ke  nan 

Shi  dana  shi  ke 

Enna  ku  ke  ? 

Shi  ke  nan 

Ba  da  ka  ke  ba 

Jia  ni  ke  nan  ni  daia 

Yarinia  da  ka  gani  ita  ke  nan 

Ka  tafi  ke  nan  har  abada 


You  are  a  free  man 

It  is  a  cow 

This  is  my  son 

He  is  my  son 

Where  are  you  ? 

So  it  is 

You  are  not  a  free  man 

Yesterday  I  was  here  alone 

The  girl  you  see  it  is  she 

You  are  leaving  in  fact  for  ever 


Ne 


This  form  is  usually  enclitic.  If  a  pronoun  is  added  it 
may  follow  in  its  capacity  of  complement,  but  if  the  person 
is  the  3rd  singular,  it  is  commonly  omitted — 


Ni  ne 

Da  ne  ni 

Da  ne  kai 

Kai  ne  sariki  ?     Ni  sariki  ne 

Yaro  ne  or,  less  commonly  Yaro 

ne  shi 

Kai  dansa  ne 
Kano  da  gari  karami  ne. 
Ni  danfari  ne,  su  ne  na  baya 


It  is  I 

I  am  a  free  man 
You  are  a  free  man 
Are  you  the  chief? 
It  is  a  boy 


I  am  the  chief 


You  are  his  son  or  Are  you  his  son  ? 
Kano  was  formerly  a  small  town 
I  am  the  first  born,  they  are  after 
me 


In  the  following  examples  "  ne 
whole  sentence — 


becomes  enclitic  to  a 


Gurubi-n-ido  ba  ido  ba  ne  (prov.) 

Allah  shi  ne  ya  ba  ni 

Wani  mutum  maihalbi  ne  shina 

da  mache 
Ba  zaka  kai  ni  wurin  malamin 

nan  ba  ne ! 
Mu  kuma   duka    shaidu    ne   ga 

wannan 

Compare  the  following — 

Allah  shi  nc  abada 
Allah  shina  kocnna 


A  substitute  for  the  eye  is  not  the 

eye 

It  was  God  gave  it  to  me 
A  certain  hunter  had  a  wife 

Will  you  not  take  me  to  this  mallam? 
We  also  are  all  witnesses  of  this 


God  is  eternity  (or  for  ever) 
God  is  everywhere 


VERB  121 

Che 

This  feminine  form  may  be  substituted  for  "ne,"  but 
not  for  "ke"— 

Dia  che  ni  /  am  a  free  woman 

Dia  che  ki  You  are  a  free  woman 

Sania  che  ita  or  sania  che  It  is  a  cow 

Ba  dia  che  ni  ba  /  am  not  a  free  woman 

Ita  mache  che  It  is  a  woman 

Ni,  fa,  ba  akwia  che  ba,  mache  As  for  me,  I  am  not  a  goat,  I  am 

che  ni  a  woman 

Kama  da  wani  ba  wani  ba  che  Likeness  to  another   it  is  not  the 

(prov.)  same  person 

(The  noun  phrase  "  ba  wani  ba,"  i.e.,  not  another,  ends  in 
"a,"  and  so  is  treated  as  feminine,  probably  by  a  very 
pedantic  mallam). 

"  Ni  che  "  is  not  found,  but  only  "  ni  ne  "  of  whichever 
gender.  In  "  Dia  che  ni "  the  feminine  form  is  used  after 
"  dia,"  "  ni "  being  treated  as  a  complement. 

Emphasis  on  the  Pronoun 

If  emphasis  is  required  on  the  pronoun,  it  is  placed  at 
the  beginning  of  the  sentence — 

Shi  dana  ne  //•  is  my  son 

Ita  diyata  che  She  is  my  daughter 

Idiomatic  Uses  of'ne" 

"Ne"  is  sometimes  added  almost  pleonastically  to  the 
end  of  an  answering  sentence  for  emphasis. 

In  answer  to  such  a  question  as  "  What  do  you  want  ?  " 
one  hears — 

Na  zo  wurinka  ne  I  have  come  to  see  you  (lit.,  /  have 

come  to  your  place,  it  is) 

Also — 

Na  sani  ne  /  know  of  course 

Some  of  the  examples  given  under  "ne"  above  also 
exemplify  this. 


122  THE  HAUSA  LANGUAGE 

"  Ne,"  preceded  by  the  pronoun,  sometimes  stands  before 
the  main  sentence  for  the  same  purpose— 

Shi  ne,  shi  ke  shakka  azaba-n-  He  it  is,  he  doubts  the  pains  of  hell 

lakhira 

Shi  ne,  na  fada  maka  It  is  as  I  told  you 

Shi  ne,  uba  na  yara  goma  He  it  is,  the  father  of  ten  boys 


Omission  of  Pronoun 

The  3rd  personal  pronoun  singular  is  sometimes  omitted 
with  "  ne."     This  is  common  in  negative  sentences — 

Sariki  ne  da  doki  for  Sariki  shi  The  chief  has  the  horse 

ne  da  doki 

Banza   fari  -  n  -  ido    babu    gani  A    bright    eye   that  cannot   see   is 

(prov.)  worthless 

Also  omitted  with  "  ke  " — 

Enna  ke  yi  maka  zogi  ?  Where  is  the  pain  ? 

Yao  da  gobe  ke  sa  gini-n-rijia     To-day   and  to-morrow  are  like 
da  alura  (prov.)  having  a  well  dug  with  a  needle 

After  the  relative  pronoun — 

Suna  tareya   da  duka-n-abinda     They  were  collecting  everything  they 
ke  garesu  had 

The  verb  "  to  be  "  itself  is  often  understood — 

Akoi  Allah,  ba  shi  gabas,  ba  shi  There  is  a  God,  he  is  not  in  the 

yama  east,  he  is  not  in  the  west 

Gaskianki  You  are  right  (lit.,  your  (f.)  truth) 

Da-n-zomo  wayo  gare-i  (gareshi)  The  young  hare  is  cunning 

Enna  sariki  ?  Where  is  the  chief? 

Kurdinsa  nawa  ?  How  much  is  it  ? 


Other  Ways  of  expressing  "  to  be  " 

The  form  of  the  pronoun  ending  in  "na"  is  used,  the 
verb  "to  be  "  itself  being  understood. 


VERB 


123 


For  this  "  na,"  which  is  the  same  particle  as  the  preposi- 
tion "of,"  in  all  probability,  in  Sokoto  and  Katsina  the 
preposition  "a"  is  sometimes  substituted. 

The  conjugation  is  as  follows — 


ina,  nina l 

ka na,  kaina  ' 

kina 

shina,  yana,  yina 

tana,  ita  na  ?  * 

muna 

kuna 

suna 


ma 

kai-a 

ke-a  (ki-a  =  ki-e) 

shi-a,  yi-a 

ita-a 

mu-a 

ku-a 

su-a 


In    the    negative    the 
terminations  omitted. 


This  second  form  is  distinct  from  the  future  (I) 
form. 

It  must  here  be  noted  that  while  the  forms  of  the 
pronoun  with  auxiliary  "  ina,"  etc.,  and  "  ni  ke,"  etc.,  are 
used  for  the  present  tense  conjugation  of  verbs,  the  form 
"  ni  ne,"  etc.,  is  not  so  used. 


-na  "  Forms 


Shina  nan 
Shina  gida 
Bature  na  gida 
Ba  shi  nan 


He  is  here 

He  is  at  home 

The  white  man  is  at  home 

He  is  not  here 


Ki-e  wa  ? 

Da  ki-e  da  wa  ? 

I-a  gaba  suna  binsa 

I-a  daga  chikin  rijia  nan 

Mai-algeta  i-a  masa  busa 

Gari  a  nan 

Sarki  a   da  talakawa,  ba 

kawa  a  da  sariki 
Shi-a  baba 


"  -A  "  Form 

Who  are  you  ? 

And  who  are  you  with  ? 

He  is  before,  they  follow  him 

He  is  in  that  well 

The   bagpipeman,  he  was  blowing 

for  him 
The  town  is  there     (Note  omission 

of  pronoun  as  with  "  na.") 
tala-     The  king  owns  the  poor,  not  the 

poor  the  king 
He  is  a  great  man 


1  In  these  the  emphasis  is  on  the  pronoun, 
in  interrogation,  nor  in  independent  sentences. 


They  are  not  used 


124  THE  HAUSA  LANGUAGE 

The  following  is  obscure — 

Ki-e  ma  en  zaki  shiga  ki  shiga     But  you,  if  you  are  going  to  enter, 
ki  kawo  enter  and  bring  it 

Future 
Use  of  "zama  " — 

Ka  zama  da  You  will  become  free 
Ki  zama  diya  „  (f.) 

Ba  ka  zama  da  ba  You  will  not  become  free 

Na  zama  mala  mi  /  shall  become  a  priest 

To  have 

Hausa  agrees  with  all x  West  African  languages  of  what- 
ever group  in  having  no  auxiliary  "  to  have." 

To  describe  possession  the  preposition  "da,"  with,  is 
used.  The  form  of  the  pronoun  which  accompanies  it  is 
most  commonly  that  with  the  suffix  "  na."  The  auxiliary 
"  ke  "  is,  however,  also  not  uncommonly  used — 

Ina  da  kurdi  /  have  money 

Su  ke  da  su  They  have  them  or  are  with  them 

There  is,  however,  a  slight  distinction  in  making  use  of 
the  foregoing.  For  instance,  in  "  Ina  da  shi  "  and  "  Ni  ke 
da  shi " — the  first  is  used  in  making  a  plain  statement, 
and  the  second  for  preference  in  answer  to  the  question 
"  Who  has  it  ?  " 


To  express  tense — that  is,  point  of  tune — adverbs  are 
added — 

Ina  da  shi  yanzu  /  have  it  now 

Wanda  ya  ke  da  shi  da  ya  ba  ni    He  who  had  it  before  gave  it  to  me 

Instead  of  "  da  "  it  is  often  possible  to  use  some  other 
preposition  such  as  "gare." 

Other  examples  of  the  use  of  "  da  "  may  be  found  under 
prepositions. 


1  The  author  has  not  found  a  single  instance  of  the  contrary. 


VERB  125 

Meaning  conveyed  by  use  of  two  nouns  in  apposition, 
one  formed  with  "mai" — 

Da  kishiyoyi  nan  babu  mai-da        And    those    rival    wives    had    no 

children 


PART  IV 

CONJUGATION  OF  THE  VERB 

There  are  two  voices — active  and  passive. 

There  is  no  change  of  form  for  mood,  but  two  participles 
are  distinguished. 

Tense  carries  no  inflection  of  the  stem,  but  the  pronouns 
are  subjected  to  some  modification,  and  particles  are  added 
in  certain  tenses. 

The  following  is  the  conjugation  of  "so,"  to  love,  like, 
want : — 

Active  Voice 

It  is  to  be  noted  that  in  the  negative  both  "  ba  "  are  put 
in  in  all  tenses,  but  the  second  "  ba  "  is  often  omitted  in 
practice. 

AORIST  OR  COMMON  TENSE 

AFFIRMATIVE  NEGATIVE 

1  na  so  also  ni  so  ba  na  so  ba  or  ban  so  ba 

2  (m.)  ka  so  ba  ka  so  ba 

(f.)  ki  so  ba  ki  so  ba 

3  (m.)  ya  so  ba  ya  so  ba 

(f.)  ta  so  ba  ta  so  ba 

1  mu  so  ba  mu  so  ba 

2  ku  so  ba  ku  so  ba 

3  su  so  ba  su  so  ba 

PRESENT  I 

1  ina  so  ba  ni  so  ba  also  ba  na  so  ba 

2  (m.)  kana  so  ba  ka  so  ba 

(f.)  kina  so  ba  ki  so  ba 

3  (m.)  shina  (yana,  yina)  HO  ba  shi,  ya,  i,  so  ba 

(f.)  tana  so  ba  ta  so  ba 

1  muna  so  ba  mu  so  ba 

2  kuna  so  ba  ku  so  ba 

3  suna  so  ba  su  so  ba 


126  THE  HAUSA  LANGUAGE 


PRESENT  II 

1  ni  ke  so  also  na  ke  so  ba  ni  so  ba 

2  (m.)  ka  ke  so 

(f.)  ki  ke  so 

3  (m.)  shi  (ya,  yi)  ke  so 

(f.)  ta  ke  so 

1  mu  ke  so  same  as  negative  of  Present  1 

2  ku  ke  so 

3  su  ke  so 

PAST  I 

1  na  so 

2  (m.)  ka  so 

(f.)  kin  so 

3  (m.)  ya  so  also  shi  so,  shin  so 

(f.)  ta  so  same  as  aorist 

1  mun  so 

2  kun  so 

3  sun  so 

PAST  II 

1  na  so 

2  (m.)  ka  so 

(f.)  ki  ka  so 

3  (m.)  ya  so 

(f.)  ta  so  same  as  aorist 

1  muka  so  (K),  munka  so  (S) 

2  kuka  so  (K),  kunka  so  (S) 

3  Suka  so  (K),  sunka  so  (S) 

FUTURE  I 

1  naa  so,  na  so  ba  na  so  ba 

2  (m.)   kaa  so,  ka  so  ka  ka  so  ba 

(f.)   kii  so,  ki  so  ba  ki  so  ba 

3  (in.)  shii  so,  shi  so  ba  shi  so  ba 

yaa  so,  ya  so  ba  ya  so  ba 

(f.)  taa  so,  ta  so  ba  ta  so  ba 

1  muu  so,  mu  so  ba  mu  so  ba 

2  kuu  so,  kii  so  ba  ku  so  ba 

3  suu  so,  su  so  ba  su  so  ba 

Robinson  gives  "mua,"  "ma,"  "kua,"   "sua,"  "sa; 
"eo"  plural. 


VERB  127 

FUTURE  II 

1  zani  so  or  zan  so  or  za  en  so     ba  zani  so  ba 

2  (m.)  zaka  so  ba  zaka  so  ba 

(f.)   zaki  so  ba  zaki  so  ba 

3  (m.)  zashi  (zaya,  zai),  so  ba  zashi  (zaya,  zayi)  so  ba 

(f.)   zata  so  ba  zata  so  ba 

1  zamu  so  ba  zamu  so  ba 

2  zaku  so  ba  zaku  so  ba 

3  zasu  so  ba  zasu  so  ba 

FREQUENTATIVE  I 

1  iii  (or  na)  kan  so  ba  ni  kan  so  ba 

2  (m.)  ka  kan  so  ba  ka  kan  so  ba 

(f.)  ki  kan  so  ba  Id  kan  so  ba 

3  (m.)  shi  (ya)  kan  so  ba  shi  kan  so  ba 

(f.)  ta  kan  so  ba  ta  kan  so  ba 

1  mu  kan  so  ba  mu  kan  so  ba 

2  ku  kan  so  ba  ku  kan  so  ba 

3  su  kan  so  ba  su  kan  so  ba 

FREQUENTATIVE  II 

1  ni  ka  so  ba  ni  ka  so  ba 

2  (m.)  ka  ka  so  ba  ka  ka  so  ba 

(f.)  ki  ka  so  ba  ki  ka  so  ba 

3  (m.)  shi  (or  ya)  ka  so  ba  shi  (ya)  ka  so  ba 

(f.)  ta  ka  so  ba  ta  ka  so  ba 

1  mu  ka  so  ba  mu  ka  so  ba 

2  ku  ka  so  ba  ku  ka  so  ba 

3  su  ka  so  ba  su  ka  so  ba 

This  is  a  very  doubtful  tense.  Robinson  says  "  ka  "  is 
an  abbreviation  of  "kan,"  and  also  a  poetical  future. 
Harris  supports  him  that  "ka"  =  "kan";  also  Edgar. 
Mischlich  calls  it  a  Sokoto  variation  of  "ni  ke  so." 

SUBJUNCTIVE 

1  on  so  (n'so)  kada  en  so 

2  (m.)  ka  so  kada  ka  so 

(f.)  ki  so  kada  ki  so 

3  (m.)  shi  (ya)  so  kada  shi  (ya)  so 

(f.)  ta  so  kada  ta  so 

1  mu  so  kada  mu  so 

2  ku  so  kada  ku  so 

3  su  so  kada  su  so 


128  THE  HAUSA  LANGUAGE 

IMPERATIVE 

2  (in.)  so,  ka  so  kada  ka  so 

(f.)  so,  ki  so  kada  ki  so 

2  ku  so  kada  ku  so 

"  Kar  "  is  found  for  "  kada  "  in  Kano.  "  Ba  "  is  also 
sometimes  substituted  for  "kada,"  but  is  not  repeated 
after  the  verb. 

Passive 

AOBIST 

1  asoni  ba  asoni  ba 

2  (m.)  asoka  ba  asoka  ba 

(f.)  asoki  ba  asoki  ba 

3  (m.)  asoshi,  asosa  ba  asoshi,  asosa,  ba 

(f.)  asota  ba  a  so  fa  ba 

1  asomu  ba  asomu  ba 

2  asoku  ba  asoku  ba 

3  asosu  ba  asosu  ba 

PRESENT  I. 

1  anasona      anakamnata       ba  anasona  ba      ba     anakamnata 

ba 

2  (m.)  anasonka   anakamnarka     ba  anasonka  ba    ba  anakamnarka 

ba 

(f.)  anasonki    anakamnarki      ba  anasonki  ba    ba    anakamnarki 

ba 

3  anasonsa    anakamnatasa    ba  anasonsa  shi   ba       anakamna- 
anasonshi  ba  tasa  ba 

(f.)  anasonta    anakamnatata    ba  anasonta  ba    ba   anakamnata- 

ta  ba 

1  anasonmu  anakamnarmu    ba  anasonmu  ba  ba      anakamnar- 

mu  ba 

2  anasonku  anakamnarku     ba  anasonku  ba   ba  anakamnarku 

ba 

3  anasonsu    anakamnarsu      ba  anasonsu  ba    ba  anakamnarsu 

ba 
PRESENT  II 

1  a-ke-soni  ba  asoni  ba 

2  (m.)  a-ke-soka 

(f.)  a-ke-soki 

3  a-ke-soshi 

(f.)  a-ke-sota  same  as  aorist 

1  a-ke-somu 

2  a-ke-soku 

3  a-ke-sosu 


VERB 

PRESENT  II.  INVERTED 
To  correspond  to  the  active  form  "  ni,  su  ke  so 


120 


1 

ni  akeso 

ni  akaso 

2(m.) 

kai  akeso 

kai  akaso 

m 

ke  akeso 

ke  akaso 

3(m.) 

shi  akeso 

shi  akaso 

(f.) 

ta  akeso 

ta  akaso 

1 

mu  akeso 

mu  akaso 

2 

ku  akeso 

ku  akaso 

3 

su  akeso 

su  akaso 

(See  note  on  Frequentative  in  Active.) 

PAST  I 

1 

ansoni 

2(m.) 

ansoka 

(f.) 

ansoki 

3(m.) 

ansosa,  ansoshi 

1*0 

ansota 

same  as  aorist 

1 

ansomu 

2 

ansoku 

3 

ansosu 

PAST  II 

KANO 

SOKOTO 

1 

akasoni 

ankasoni 

2(m.) 

akasoka 

ankasoka 

CO 

akaso  ki 

ankasoki 

3 

akasosa 

ankasoshi 

(f.) 

akasota 

ankasota 

same  as  aorist 

1 

akasomu 

ankasomu 

2 

akasoku 

ankasoku 

3 

akasosu 

ankasosu 

FUTURE  I 

1 

aasoni 

ba  aasoni  ba 

2(m.) 

aasoka 

ba  aasoka  ba 

aasoki 

ba  aasoki  ba 

3 

aasoshi 

ba  aasoshi  ba 

CO 

aasota 

ba  aasota  ba 

1 

aasomu 

ba  aasomu  ba 

2 

aasoku 

ba  aasoku  ba 

3 

aasosu 

ba  aasosu  ba 

FUTURE  II 

1  zaasona      zaakamnata        ba  zaasona  ba       ba      zaakamnata 

ba 

2  (in.)  zaasonka    zaakamnarka      ba  zaasonka  ba    ba   zaakamnarka 

ba 

(f.)  zaasonki     zaakamnarki      ba  zaasonki  ba     ba  zaakamnarki 

ba 


130  THE  HAUSA   LANGUAGE 

3  (m.)  zaasonshi  zaakarana-tasa  ba  zaasonshi  ba   ba        zaakamna- 

tasa  ba 

(f.)  zaasonta     zaakamnatata    ba  zaasonta  ba     ba        zaakamna- 

tata  ba 

1  '    zaasonmu  zaakamnarmu    ba  zaasonmu  ba  ba  zaakamnarrau 

ba 

2  zaasonku    zaakamnarku     ba  zaasonku  ba    ba  zaakamnarku 

ba 

3  zaasonsu    zaakamnarsu      ba  zaasonsu  ba    ba    zaakamnarsu 

ba 

These  are  all  noun  forms  after  "  zasu,"  etc.  =they  will  go 
to  the  loving  of  them.  The  possessive  pronoun  is  masculine 
after  "  so  "  and  feminine  after  "  kamna." 

Compare  "  Zasu  kamna-r-mu,"  They  will  love  us ;  "  Zamu 
kamna-r-su,"  We  will  love  them. 

The  noun  form  is  not  always  strictly  adhered  to,  hence, 
zaasoni,  zaasoka,  etc. 

FREQUENTATIVE 

1  akansoni  ba  akansoni  ba 

2  (m.)  akansoka  ba  akansoka  ba 

(f.)  akansoki  ba  akansoki  ba 

3  (m.)  akansoshi  ba  akansoshi  ba 

(f.)  akansota  baakansotaba 

1  akansomu  ba  akansomu  ba 

2  akansoku  ba  akansoku  ba 

3  akansosu  ba  akansosu  ba 

SUBJUNCTIVE  AND  IMPERATIVE 
SUBJUNCTIVE  IMPERATIVE  BOTH 

1  asoni  kada  asoni 

2  (m.)  asoka  asoka  kada  asoka 

(f  )  asoki  asoki  kada  asoki 

3  (m.)  asoshi  asoshi  kada  asoshi 

(f.)  asota  asota  kada  asota 

1  aaomu  kada  ascmu 

2  ascku  asoku  kada  asoku 
5           asosu  aaosu  kada  isosu 

It  ;s  seen  that  these  forms  are  the  same  as  in  the  aorist. 

NOTE. — In  the  foregoing  tenses  "  shi  "  and  "  sa  "  are  commonly 
interchangeable,  the  former  being  preferably  Sokoto,  the  latter 
Kano  dialect. 


VERB  131 

USES  or  THE  TENSES 
Aorist 

This  is  an  indeterminate  tense.  It  is  an  unemphatic  past, 
a  vague  present,  and,  if  the  context  permits,  may  have  a 
future  significance.  It  is  in  common  use  both  when  pre- 
cision is  quite  unimportant  and  also  in  narration — 

Ba  ka  ji  ba  ?  Do  you  not  hear  ? 

Na  ji  kishirua  I  feel  thirsty?  (lit.,  thirst) 

Ba  abinda  ban  yi  ba  There  is  nothing  I  do  not  do 

Gobe  da  sasafe  mu  tashi  We  shall  start  very  early  to-morrow 

Ban  yerda  ba  /  do  not  agree 

Na  ki,  ba  ya  issa  ba  /  refuse  it  is  not  enough 

Rua  ya  tafassa  ?  Has  the  water  boiled  ? 

Ya  yi  dimi  amma  ba  ya  tafassa  It  is  hot,  but  it  has  not  boiled  yet 

ba  tukuna 

Ta  che,  to,  mu  je  en  ganshi  She  said,  good,  we  will  go  so  that 

I  may  see  him 

Mu  yi  gara-n-fuska ;    kana  mu  We  wash  our  faces,  then  we  bathe; 

yi  wanka  ;  mu  sasa  sababi-n-  we  put  on  new  clothes 

tufafinmu 

Mu  je,  mu  gani,  na  magani-n-  We  go  and  see,  that  is  proof  of  a 

makariachi  (prov.)  lie  (lit.,  medicine  for  a  liar) 

Gobe  mu  chi  saura  To-morrow  we  eat  the  remains 

Yaro  nan  ya  iya  tafia  ?  ya  tan"  Can    that    boy    do    the   journey  ? 

mans  Certainly  he  will  go 

Kwana   shidda    mu   gama   aiki  In  six  days  we  shall  finish  the  work 

nan 

Present  I 

This  is  both  the  simple  present  and  the  present  con- 
tinuous. In  narration  it  may  be  translated  by  the 
imperfect. 

The  verb  itself  acquires  a  substantival  force,  and  if  it 
admits  of  it,  takes  the  termination  "  wa  "  or  "  ya,"  though 
sometimes  exceptions  are  made.  If  the  verb  is  defective 
in  the  "  wa  "  (ya)  form  it  remains  unchanged  in  appearance, 
though  not  in  force. 

For  this  reason,  when  the  verb  is  a  transitive  one  the 
direct  object  is  attached  by  the  copulative  "  n,"  being  in 
the  possessive  case;  and  if  other  verbs  are  added  in 


132 


THE  HAUSA  LANGUAGE 


sequence  they  too  assume  a  substantival  force  and  are 
joined  with  the  copulative  "n." 


"  WA  "  OB  "  YA  "  TERMINATION  USED 


Enna  kana  tafia  ? 

Shekara   goma   yana    tafia    har 

ubansa  ya  hanashi 
Enna  ubanka  ?     Shina  tafowa 
Tana  zua  Kano 
Muna  soyeya  da  junamu 

Da  na  ganshi  shina  tafia  (or  ya 

ke  tafia) 
Suna  isowa  gulbi 


When  are  you  going  ? 

He  had  been  travelling  for  ten  years 

until  his  father  stopped  him 
Where  is  your  father  ?    He  is  coming 
She  is  coming  (going)  to  Kano 
We    are    at  friendship    with    one 

another 
When  I  saw  him  he  was  travelling 

(As)  They  were  getting  near  the  river 


In  the  following  sentence  the  noun  force  is  strengthened 
by  the  addition  of  a  personal  pronoun — 


Shina  tafia  tasa  sai  ya  gamu  da 
kwado 


He  travelled  until  he  met  the  toad 


UNCHANGED  FOEM 


Kulum  gari  ya  waye  ina  addua 
Saanda  ka  tada  su  suna  fada  da 

juna  ?  suna  yi 
Enna  shina  zamne  ? 


Always  at  daybreak  I  pray 

When  you  came  upon  them  were 

they  fighting  ?     They  were 
Where  is  he  staying  ? 


WITH  DIRECT  OBJECT 


Ina  gina  rami  (for  Ina  gina-r- 

rami) 
Mi  kana  yi  ?     Ina  yi-n-aiki  (or 

ina  aiki) 

Ina  so-n-ubana.     Ina  so-n- Allah 
Ina  ji-n-yungwa  da  kishirua 
Kana  yi-n-aiki  ? 
Muna   kamna-tasa  gama  ya  ri- 

gaya  ya  kamnachemu 
Ina  sonsa,  da  shi  kua  shina  sona 


/  am  digging  a  hole 

What  are  you  doing  ?    I  am  working 

1  love  my  father.     I  love  God 

I  am  hungry  and  thirsty 

Are  you  working  ? 

We  love  Him  for  He  first  loved  us 

I  love  him  and  he  loves  me     (Note 
the  possessive  form  in  "  so-na  ") 


Ina  so-n-kawa  malami  (for  ina 
so-n-kawa-r-malami) 


SUBORDINATE  VERBS  ADDED 

/  want  to  become  a  mallam 


VERB  133 

In  this  sentence  "  so  "  is  masculine,  and  "  kawa,"  ending 
in  "  a,''  feminine.  Compare — 

Kana  so  ka  kawa  maimagani          Do  you  ivant  to  become,  a  doctor  ? 

in  which  all  the  forms  are  pure  verbs — 

Ina  so-n-saye-n-turmi  goma  I  want  to  buy  ten  cloth-strips 

NEGATIVE 

The  "na"  termination  of  the  pronoun  is  dropped,  but 
the  verb  is  still  treated  as  a  substantive — 

Kadan  ba  ka  tsoro-n-allah  ba  shi     //   you   do    not  fear   God  He  does 

sonka  not  love  you 

Ba  su  samu-n-abinchi  They  find  no  food 

Mugu  -  n  -  mia  ba  ta  karewa  a     Bad  soup  does  not  get  finished  in 

tukunia  (prov.)  the  pot 

Gulbina   ba   shi  chi  -  n  -  mutum     My  river  does  not  eat  a  man  in  the 
tsaka  sai  gefe.    Wuka  (riddle)          middle  but  at  the  bank.     A  knife 

(which  cuts  at  the  edge) 
Kowa    ya    halbe    zaki    ba    shi     Every  one  shot  at  the  lion  but  did 

samu-n-sa  not  get  him 

Ba  ka  sona ;  ni,  ma,  bani  sonki      You  do  not  love  me ;  and  I,  I  do 

not  love  you 

/  * 

Compare,  on  the  other  hand — 

Har  gari  duka  ya  tashi  sun  yi,     Then  all  the  town  arose,  they  try, 
sun  yi,  ba  su  eamu  ba  they  try,  but  they  do  not  get  him 

The  following  are  examples  of  pure  nouns  used  after 
pronoun  in  "  -na,"  thus  confirming  the  change  of  verbs 
into  substantives  in  this  tense — 

Tun  ina  yaro  Since  I  was  a  boy 

Don  sariki  shina  mugu-n-sheria  J    Because  the  chief  is  unjust  in  his 

judgment 

The  following  is  an  example  of  mixed  idiom — 

Ina  so-n  en  tambaye  ka  instead     I  want  to  tell  you 
of  Ina  so-n-tambayenka  or  ina 
so  en  tamhaycka 

1  See  note,  later,  on  omission  of  pronoun  in  this  tenso. 


134  THE  HAUSA   LANGUAGE 

As  with  nouns,  the  copulative  may  be  omitted — 

Kulum  kulura  suna  kashe  mutane   They   are    killing    people    without 
(for  kashe- m- mutane)  cease 

As  with  pure  nouns,  sometimes  the  copulative  preposition 
is  not  put  into  its  proper  gender — 

Ina  kirra-n-ka  for  ina  kirrarka        /  am  calling  you 
Sai  ya  gani  gawa  anadaukansa     Except   he  sees   the    corpse    being 
zua  wuri-n-bizne  taken  to  the  cemetery 

Etymology 

It  is  to  be  noticed  that  the  pronoun  in  "na"  cannot  be 
followed  by  any  of  the  forms  of  the  verb  "to  be,"  e.g. — 

Shina  gida  He  is  at  home 

Shina  nan  He  is  here 

Suna  baya  They  are  behind 

From  this  it  is  clear  that  the  two  words  are  not  in  the 
same  relation  to  each  other  as  they  would  be  if  the  con- 
necting link  of  the  verb  "to  be  "  were  possible,  but  omitted 
in  practice. 

It  might,  therefore,  be  assumed  that  the  syllable  una" 
of  the  pronoun  is  no  other  than  the  preposition  "of,"  not 
readily  translateable,  however,  uniformly  into  "of,"  as 
indeed  it  is  not  in  many  other  cases  also. 

USE  OF  PRESENT  I.  WITH  FUTURE  MEANING 

Kadan  na  fushe  ta,  kuna  ba  ni     //  /  pull  her  out,  will  you  give  me 
ita  en  yi  arime  ?  her  in  marriage  ? 

WITH    PAST    MEANING 

Ina   tamaha   shl   bani  kurdinsa     I  thought  he  would  give  me  all  his 
duka  money 

OMISSION  OF  PRONOUN 

The  personal  pronoun  is  a  necessary  adjunct  to  the  verb, 
the  latter  being  incomplete  without  it.  If  a  noun  precedes 
the  verb  as  the  subject,  the  3rd  personal  pronoun  still 
has  to  be  employed. 


VERB  135 

In  this  tense,  however,  the  3rd  personal  pronoun  is 
commonly  omitted  when  the  noun-subject  is  mentioned, 
which  is  a  further  indication  that  the  verb  has  been  changed 
into  a  noun,  rendering  the  pronoun  superfluous.  This  is 
seen  from  studying  such  a  phrase  as  "  the  hat  of  the  chief." 
The  Hausa  would  not  say  "  hat  he  of  the  chief,"  but  simply 
"  hat  of  chief." 

Hence  the  sentences — 

Malami  na  sha-n-gia  munafiki  ne     The  mallam  who  drinks  beer  is  a 

deceiver 
Doki  nan  na  sayerua  (or  sayesua)    Is  this  horse  for  sale  ? 

ne  ? 

Abega  na  tamaha  .  .   .  Abega  thinking  ,  .  . 

Kowane  na  sha-n-taba  .  .  .  Whoever  smokes  tobacco  .  .  . 

Wata  na  bada  haske  The  moon  is  giving  light 

Da  hiska  na  busawa,  rairai  na      When  the  wind  blows  the  sand  goes 

shiga  ga  idanunka  into  your  eyes 

Kadan  k^iganigemida-n-uwanka     When  you  see  your  brother's  beard 

na  chi-n-wuta,  shafa  naka  rua        catch  fire,  pour    water  on  your 

own 

If  the  pronoun  "  shina "  were  in  any  of  the  foregoing 
sentences  used,  the  noun  must  be  treated  as  out  of  the 
sentence,  standing  in  apposition  by  itself,  and  having  no 
connection  with  the  predicate. 

The  uses  of  "shina"  and  "yana"  are  not  always 
in  terchan  geable . 

"Shina"  is  preferred  before  a  noun  and  verbs  with 
"wa"  termination — 

Abokin  mijinta  shina  bisa  itache     Her  husband's  friend  was  up  a  tree 
yana  kallon  abinda  ta  ke  yi  watching  what  she  was  doing 


Present  II 

This  tense  is  only  very  rarely  interchangeable  with  the 
foregoing.  It  is  purely  a  verb  form,  and  it  has  none  of  the 
complexity  of  construction  which  the  foregoing  has.  It  is 
used  in  asking  questions,  and  especially  in  answering  them. 
It  is  precise  as  to  tune,  otherwise  the  aorist  is  used.  In 


136  THE   HAUSA   LANGUAGE 

narration  it  is  often  convenient  to  translate  it  by  the 
imperfect  tense. 

The  object  usually  precedes  the  sentence — 

Mi  ku  ke  yi  ?     Aiki  mu  ke  yi          What  are   you   doing  ?       We    are 

working 

If  the  latter  statement  had  not  been  made  in  answer 
to  a  question,  it  would  be  in  the  form  of  "  Muna  yi-n- 
aiki." 

Mi  su  ke  yi  yanzu  ?  Suna  chi-  What  are  they  doing  now  ?  They 
n-abinchinsu  are  eating  their  food 

From  this  example  it  is  seen  that  the  idea  of  continuity 
is  stronger  in  Present  I.  than  in  Present  II. 

Mi   ku   ke    kawowa  ?      Abinda      What  are  you  bringing  ?     What  we. 

muka  samu  chiki-n-kasua  found  in  the  market 

Suka  che,  domi  muke  fasawa  ?        They  said,  Why  are  we  delaying  ? 

In  the  foregoing  the  noun  form  of  the  verb  is  used. 

Ubana  ni  ke  so  or  ubana  ni  ka  so  /  love  my  father 

Shi  ni  ke  so  or  shi  nika  so  I  love  him 

Shanu    ya    ke    kashe    or   shanu  He  kills  oxen 

shika  kashe 

Da  na  ganshi  ya  ke  tafia  When  I  saw  him  he  was  travelling 

Kowa  ya  ke  yi  shi  Whoever  shall  do  it 

Abinda  na  ke  so  The  thing  which  I  want 

Mi  ya  sameku,  ku  ke  kuka  What  is  the  matter  with  you  that 

you  are  howling 

A  perfect  sense  may  even  be  found — 

Tun  da,  bar  kwanaki  nan,  For  a  long  time  back  till  this  day, 
mutane-n-Rimo  su  ke  pesshi-  the  people  of  Rimo  have  plundered 
n-hainya  the  road 

Also  a  future  sense— 

Chiki-n-wannan   lokachi   ka   ke     At  this  season  wilt  thou  then  restore 
mayar  (mayas)  wa  Israila  da         to  Israel  their  kingdom 
mulki  ? 


VERB 


137 


Past  I 

This  is  the  tense  that  indicates  simply  past  time,  and  it 
is  often  best  translated  by  the  perfect  in  English — 


Daga  enna  mutume  nan  ya  taf o  ? 

Ya  fada   mani  ya    fito   daga 

Kano.     Ban   san'   abinda  ya 

kawo  shi  ba 
Kun  rataye  tufafi  ? 
Ta   che  da   mu :    kun  gamu  da 

wani  azne  maidauka-n-nama  ? 

Muka  che,  mun  gamu  da  shi 
Na  so  shi,  shi  kua  shina  so  na 
Ni,  na  yi  murna 
Kin  gani  ? 
Kin  san  abinda  ya  kawo  ni  garin 

nan  ? 


Whence  has  this  man  come  ?  He 
told  me  he  came  from  Kano.  I 
do  not  know  what  has  brought  him 

Have  you  hung  up  the  clothes  ? 
She  said  to  us :    did  you  meet  a 

certain    pagan    carrying    meat  ? 

We  said:    we  met  him 
I  loved  him,  he  too  loves  me 
I  rejoiced 
Did  you  see  it  ? 
Did  you  know  what  brought  me  to 

this  country  ? 


Pastil 

This  past  only  differs  from  the  preceding  in  the  plural 
forms,  and  in  the  2nd  person  singular  feminine.  It  is  to 
be  noticed  that  in  past  tense  I.  the  2nd  person  singular 
feminine  also  takes  a  termination.  There  are  four  uses 
of  this  tense — (1)  in  questions;  (2)  in  matters  of  fact;  (3) 
in  narration;  (4)  for  emphasis. 

There  is  no  negative  form,  that  of  the  Past  I.  being 
used — 


Enna  magani-n-da  kika  debo  ? 

Mi  kika  gani  ? 

M  ut  11  MI  daia  sunka  buga 

Dakuna  nawa  sunka  gina  ? 

Enna  mutane  sunka  kwana  ? 

Fulani  sunka  chi  Kano 

Mu  munka  buge  shi 

Ku  kunka  yi  aiki 

Su  sunka  yi  sata 

Saanda   muka    komo    muka   ga 

kayanmu  duka  sun  bache 
Muka  tafi  kasua,  muka  zamna, 

muka  yi  chiniki,  muka  komo 
Yaushe  sunka  zo  ? 


Where  is  the  medicine  you  helped 

yourself  to  ? 
What  have  you  seen  ? 
They  have  beaten  a  man 
How  many  huts  have  they  built  ? 
Where  have  the  men  slept  ? 
The  Fulani  captured  Kano 
We  have  beaten  him 
You  have  worked  (well) 
It  is  (indeed)  they  who  have  stolen 
When  we  came  back  we  saw  that 

all  our  loads  were  spoilt 
We  went  to  the  market,  we  sat  down, 

we  did  trade,  we  have  returned 
When  did  they  come  ? 


138  THE   HAUSA   LANGUAGE 

In  dependent  sentences  there  may  be  a  future  signi- 
ficance— 

!dan  suka  zo  gobe  //  they  come  to-morrow 

Tyayenta    sunka   gane  ta  suna      Her  parents  seeing  her  rejoiced  and 
murna  da  kuka  shouted 


Future  I.  and  II 

There  are  two  future  tenses  with  the  same  meaning. 
In  one  the  verb  remains  and  is  treated  as  a  verb  through- 
out. In  the  other  the  verb  stem  becomes  a  substantive 
in  the  same  manner  as  in  Present  I. 

Future  I.  is  formed  by  a  reduplication  of  the  vowel 
of  the  pronoun,  though  some  writers  consider  that  it  is 
an  "a"  that  is  appended  throughout. 

Future  II.  is  formed  by  employing  the  verb  <:  zani,"  etc., 
/  will  go.  As  one  says  "  zani  Kano,"  /  am  going  to  Kano, 
so  the  Hausa  also  says,  "zani  zamna,"  /  am  going  to  sit 
down.  The  idea  of  actual  motion  is  modified  to  that  of 
futurity.1 

Other  tenses  may  also  have  a  future  significance  from 
the  context.  It  is  the  practice  when  two  future  tenses 
follow  each  other  to  use  Future  II.  first,  followed  by 
Future  I. 


Examples  of  Future  I.  without  Object 

Kaa  zama  talaka  You  will  become  poor 

Gobe  da  sasafe  mfi  tashi  We  will  start  very  early  to-morrow 

Komi  zaayi  masu  ba  sua  beri  ba      Whatever   may   be   done    to    them, 

they  will  not  give  it  up 
Kadan  ba  ka  zuba  mai  chiki-n-     //  you    do   not   pour   oil  into  the 

fitila  ta  mutu  lamp  it  will  go  out 

Ni  tafi  ga  sariki  da  ni  che  masa      /  shall  go  to  the  chief  and  say  to 

him 
Babu  abinda  zaya  sa  sua  tabani     Nothing  he  could  do   would   make 

them  touch  me 


1  See  "  The  Languages  of  West  Africa,"  chapter  on  the  verb. 


VERB 


139 


With  Object 


Ina  tamaha  ni  same  sa  da  rai 
Idan   ka   tafi   wurinsa  ya  fada 

maka  labari 
Idan  ka  so  na  yi  kokari 
To,  na  kara  shi 

Kadan    na    bashi   takarda    sh! 

tsage  ta 

Yi  hankali,  shii  huge  ka 
Kadan  na  yi  shiri  ni  kirrawo  ka 


/  think  I  shall  find  him  alive 

If  you  go  to  him  he  will  tell  you 

the  news 

If  you  like  I  will  try 
All  right  I  will  add  to  it  or  increase 

it 
If  I  give  him  the  book  he  will  tear 

it 

Take  care  or  he  will  hit  you 
When  I  am  ready  I  will  call  you 


Examples  of  Future  II 
Without  Object 


Zasu  chi 

Zaku  mutuwa 

Chiki-n-Bida   zamu    kwana    da 

dere 
Da  zata  mutua,  ta  che  .  .  . 

Mi  zamu  yi  ? 

Zata  je  ta  gani 

Ba    zaya    kwana    nan    ba    sai 

Lokoja 
...  en  zasu  tafowa  Aghat 

Yanzu  za  en  je  en  sai  sabo 
Zani  tafia  en  gani  abokina 
Zani  en  fara  waka 
Zaka  hadu  chiki 


Kaka  Sariki  ze  zamna  goburo  ? 
(ze=zai) 

With  Direct  Object. 

Zani  dauka-1-riga 


They  go  to  eat  or  they  will  eat 

You  will  die 

We  are  going  to  sleep  in  Bida 

When   she   was   about  to  die,  she 

said  .  .  . 
What  shall  we  do 
She  will  go  and  see 
He    will    not    sleep    here    but    at 

Lokoja 
.  .  .  with  the  intention  of  coming  to 

Ghat 

Now  I  will  go  and  buy  a  new  one 
I  am  going  to  see  my  friend 
I  am  going  to  begin  my  song 
You  will  be  swallowed  up  inside 

(Note. — Hadu  is  a  verb  with  a 

passive  meaning.) 
How  can  the  King  remain  wifeless  ? 


Insertion  of  preposition  ''of,''  "n" 


Babu  abinda  zashi  samu-n-ka 
Ya   kan    rika   nemi  yada  zashi 

samu-n-riba  a  wurina 
En    zasu    chi-n-tuo-n-su    suna 

buga  baba-n-kube 
Da  komi  zaka  tambaye-n-su  ka 

che  kadan  ka  yerda 
Zani  saye-n-wannan  bunsuru 


/  will  take  the  shirt.     Lit.,  /  am 

going  to  the  taking  of  the  shirt 
Nothing  shall  happen  to  you 
He  is  always  trying  to  find  a  way 

to  make  a  profit  out  of  me 
When  they  go  to  food  they  strike 

a  big  bell 
And   whatever   you   ask   them  for, 

you  say,  if  you  please 
I  will  sell  this  he-goat 


140  THE  HAUSA    LANGUAGE 

Examples  of  Use  of  Verb  Stem  Form  of  Verb  when  Noun 
Form  in  Existence 

Mata  chan  ta  che  ba  zata  tafi  That  woman  said  she  will  not  go 

ba  sai  mun  zo  before  we  come 

Ba    zaka    iya    dauka-n-ta    (for  You  cannot  take  it  up  quickly 
dauka-r-ta)   maza 

Amma    abokina    yaushe    zashi  But  when  will  your  friend  come  ? 
tafo? 

Yaushe  zamu  tafi  ?  When  shall  we  go  ? 

If  the  verb  itself  has  a  prepositional  termination,  "  n " 
is  omitted.  This  applies  to  the  derived  verbs  in  "da." 
There  is  also  no  "  n  "  if  there  is  an  indirect  object,  either 
preceded  or  not  by  a  preposition — 

Zashi  gaida  sarakunansa  He  is  going  to  salute  his  chiefs 

Talauchi  ba  zaya  kauda  yauchi  Poverty   ought   not    to    take   away 

ba  freedom 

Wata   rana    da   zamu    tafia    ga  One  day  as  we  were  going  to  the 

gona  farm 

Zasu  yi  masu  .   .  .  They  will  do  to  them  .  .  . 

Wani  iri-n-magani  zaka  ba  ni  What   kind  of  medicine  will  you 

give  to  me 

Kowani  zashi  tsayesda  wannan  Whoever   stops   this    man   will   be 

rautum  zaakassheshi  killed 

The  copulative  "  n,"  being  often  omitted  in  the  genitive 
case,  is  also  omitted  with  this  tense,  commonly  with 
negative— 

Zashi  halaka  dunia  He  will  destroy  the  world 

Fulani  ba  zasu  fada-mu  ba  The  Fulani  will  not  fight  us 

(Commonly — Fulani  ba  zasu  yi  fada  da  mu  ba.) 

After  "yi,"  do,  it  is  usually  omitted. 

Babu  itache,  kaka  zan  yi  wuta  ?    There  is  no  wood,  how  can  I  make 

fire? 
Zaka  yi  tafia  You  are  going  to  travel 

This  is  so,  especially  if  the  simple  verb  stem  is  used 
and  a  pronoun  is  the  direct  object.  It  seems  as  if  the 
maintenance  of  the  substantival  idea  were  too  much  of 
an  effort  and  the  construction  too  cumbersome. 

Mi  zai  kai-mu  Hausa  ?  What   will   take   us   to  the  Hausa 

country  ? 
Ya  che  zashi  wanke  ta  He  said  he  will  wash  it 


VERB  141 

In  the  following  examples  the  personal  pronoun  is 
repeated  after  "  zasu "  in  order  to  ensure  a  pure  verb 
form — 

Da  Fulani  suka  gani  ba  zasu  When  the  Fulas  saw  that  they  were 

samu-n-nasara,  suka  che,  ba  not  going  to  get  the  victory,  they 

zasu  su  yi  fada  ba  said,  they  would  not  fight 

Zashi  ya  koiya  masa  karia  He  will  teach  him  falsehood 

Frequentative 

This  is  formed  by  the  insertion  of  the  particle  "kan" 
between  the  pronoun  and  the  verb.  It  has  (1)  a  fre- 
quentative or  habitual  use ;  (2)  a  subjunctive  or  con- 
cessive sense ;  (3)  a  sense  of  necessity  or  certainty  or 
possibilty : — 

1 

Shi  kan  yi  hakka  He  is  in  the  habit  of  doing  so 

Biri  ya  kan  yi  banna,  halinsa  ke     A  monkey  always  does  mischief,  it 
nan  t*  his  nature 


Alkema    bisa    ducbi   Allah    shi  A  grain  of  wheat  on  a  rock  God 

kan  ba  ta  rua  gives  it  water 

Ki  kan  tafi,  ki  kan  kunche  su  You  can  go  and  loose  them 

Wanda  ya  kan  chi  amana  ba  ya  He  who  plays  false  with  friendship 

issa  ache  da  shi  aboki  ba  is  not  worthy  to  be  called  a  friend 


Uwa  ta  kan  ki  danta  ?  Can  a  mother  hate  her  child  ? 

Wanda  ya  chi  giginia,  chikinsa      Who    eats   the   (fruit   of  the)  fan- 
ya  (or  shi)    kan  yi  chiwo  palm,  his  belly  will  be  sure  to  be 

sick  (after  it).     (Note. — This  is 

not  a  fact.) 
Wa  ya  ka  shiga  (ka  =  kan)  Who    can   enter?      (See   previous 

note  on  the  tense) 

Etymology 

MiscbJich  considers  that   "kan"  is  in  all   probability 
an  abbreviation  of  "kana,"  then,  before — 

En    na   gani   mache,     kana    ni     //  /  see  a  woman  I  want  her 

BO  ta  =  ni  kan  so  ta 
En  ya  gani  kura  kana  ya  gudu     //  he  sees  a  hyaena  it  runs  away 

=  ya  kan  gudu 


142 


THE   HAUSA   LANGUAGE 


Subjunctive  Mood  and  Tense 

There  is  no  separate  form  for  the  subjunctive  mood  in 
any  tense  except  the  1st  person  singular,  which  carries 
generally  rather  a  future  sense.  Its  principal  usage  is 
concessive  or  interrogative.  The  other  persons  are  the 
same  as  in  the  aorist  tense — 


Ina  so  en  tafi 

Ina  so  shi  (or  ya)  tafi 

Ka  yi  nufi  ka  tafi  ? 

Na  yi  kokari  en  komo 

Na  aike  shi  shi  kawo  doki 

Na  che,  en  tafi  en  kawo  shi  ? 

Ni  ma  en  zo  en  kwanta 

Uwata  ta  che  en  tafi  en  wanketa 

Ta  che  ta  tafi  ta  wanke 

Kana  en  tafi  en  chi  nama-na 

Ya  che  zani  en  gani  makari-n- 

dunia 
Ya    che    masa   shi   gina    masa 

kushieya 

Ea  na  so  en  passa  kanka  ba 
Kada  su  mutu 
Kada  nama  ya  tashi 


/  want  to  go 

I  want  him  to  go 

Did  you  intend  to  go  ? 

I  shall  try  to  come  back 

I  sent  him  to  bring  the  horse 

I  said  may  I  go  and  fetch  him  ? 

Me  too,  let  me  come  and  lie  doivn 

Mother  said  I  must  go  and  wash  her 

She  said  let  her  go  and  wash  (it) 

Then  I  would  go  and  eat  my  meat 

He  said  I  will  go  and  see  the  end 

of  the  earth 
He  told  him  to  go  and  dig  a  grave 

for  him 

I  do  not  want  to  break  your  head 
That  they  should  not  die 
Lest  the  game  should  start 


Imperative 

In  the  singular  the  pronoun  is  omitted  when  a  second 
verb  is  there,  but  not  usually  otherwise — 


Tafi  ka  chi 
Ka  tafi.     Ku  tafi 
Kada  ka  buga 
Kada  su  tafi  tukuna 
Ba  magana  ! 


Go  and  eat 

Go  !  (sing,  and  plu.) 

Do  not  strike 

They  must  not  go  yet 

Do  not  talk  ! 


The  verb   "beri,"  leave,  let,  is  largely  used  for  giving 
orders,  etc. — 

Let  us  go 

Let  me  see  first  where  she  is 

Sometimes,  for  emphasis,  the  pronoun  precedes  as  well 
as  follows  the  verb — 


Ka  j  i  ka  ! 

Ki  je  ki  gurin  sariki 


Hearken  thou  f 

You,  go  to  the  chief,  or  you,  go  to 
where  the  chief  is 


VERB 


143 


Pluperfect  Conditional 

This  tense  or  mood  has  no  independent  existence  in 
Hausa.  The  requisite  idea  is  conveyed  by  making  use 
of  the  particle  "  da "  =  formerly,  with  the  meaning  of 
unfulfilled  intention  given"  to  it — 


Da  zani  tafia 


Da  na  sani  da  ban  yi  haka  ba 

Da  ni  kai  ne  da  na  halbe  gada 

nan 
Da  ba   ya  yi  muna  dabara  ba, 

da  mun  fadi  chiki-n-rami 
Da  safia  ya  yi  muka  tashi 

See  also  under  " 


/    intended    to    go  or   would  have 

gone.     Lit.,  formerly  I  was  going 

to  go 
Had   I   known   I  would  not  have 

done  so 
If  I  had  been  you  I  should  have 

shot  that  deer 
Had  he  not  warned  us  we  should 

have  fallen  into  the  hole 
When  it  ivas  light  we  started 

da  "  adverb  of  time. 


Can,  to  be  able 

There  is  no  special  mood  or  tense.  The  verb  "  iya " 
is  used.  For  "to  be  unable  physically  "  the  verb  "  kasa  " 
is  used. 


Ya  iya  dauka-r-kaya  nan  ?     Ya 

kasa  dauka  tasa 
Shina  iya  yi-n-sa 
Kana  iya  kai  ni  ? 
Ina  iya  kaiki,  ba  na  iya  kawoki 

Ba  shi  yiuwa  ba  (from  "  yi,"  do) 
Babu  abinda  zasbi  iya  rabasu 

daga  wanan  abuta 
Ba  na  iya  ba  en  shiga  kwogin 

wuta 


Can  he  lift  that  load  ?  He  cannot 
lift  it 

He  can  do  it 

Can  you  take  me  ? 

I  can  take  you  there,  1  cannot 
bring  you  back 

He  cannot 

Nothing  could  break  their  friend- 
ship 

I  cannot  enter  the  stream  of  fire 


PASSIVE  VOICE 

A  general  survey  of  the  languages  of  West  Africa  reveals 
the  fact  that  all  of  them  are  without  a  passive  voice.  The 
3rd  personal  pronoun  plural  is  commonly,  if  not  invariably, 
used  with  the  verb  in  the  active  voice,  as  "  They  beat  him," 
for  "  He  was  beaten." 

The  Hausa  language  seems  to  have  acquired  somehow 


144  THE   HAUSA   LANGUAGE 

the  notion  that  a  passive  was  necessary,  and  to  produce 
it  merely  made  use  of  the  natural  method,  as  stated 
above,  but  with  the  aid  of  an  obsolete  form  of  "they" 
—namely,  "a." 

This  is  as  it  appears  from  the  present-day  point  of  view. 
What  actually  took  place,  probably,  is  that  a  foreign  influx 
of  population  which  possessed  a  passive  voice  in  their  own 
language,  and  also  the  word  "su"  for  "they,"  brought 
in  these  new  elements  with  as  little  disruption  to  the 
existing  language  as  possible.  "  Su "  attached  itself  to 
the  active  voice,  and  the  obsolescent  "  a "  maintained 
its  existence  only  in  an  artificial  usage. 

Regarding  "a"  as  "su"  simply,  the  translation  of  the 
various  passive  forms  is  seen  to  run  harmoniously  with 
the  active  voice  : — 

Present  I 

Anasona  =  suna  sona 
Ba  asoni  ba  =  ba  su  so  ni  ba 
Anasonka  =  suna  sonka 
Anakamnarka  —  suna    kamna-r- 
ka 

Present  II 

Akesoka  =  su     ke     so     ka,     or 

Akesonka  =  su  ke  sonka 
Akekamnaka  =  su     ke     kamna 

ka,  or  Akekamnarka  =  su   ke 

kamnarka  they  love  you 

Shi  akeso  =  shi,  su  ke  so  they  love  him 

Shi  akaso  =  shi,  suka  so  they  love  him 

Past  I 

Ansomu  =  sun  so  rau  they  loved  us 

Ba  ansomu  ba  =  ba  sun  so  mu  ba     they  did  not  love  us 

Pastil 

Akasoku  =  suka  so  ku  they  have  loved  you 

Ankasoku=sunka  so  ku  they  have  loved  you 

Ba  asoku  ba  =  ba  su  so  ku  ba          they  did  not  love  you 

Future 

Aasosu  =  sua  so  su  they  will  love  them 

Zaasonsu=zasu  son  su  ,, 

Ba  zaasonsu  ba  =  ba  zasu  son  su  ba   they  will  not  love  them 


VERB  145 

Frequentative 
Akansosu=su  kan  so  su  they  are  all  laved 

Subjunctive 

Asoshi=su  so  shi  (let  them)  love  him 

Kada  asoshi=kada  su  so  shi  let  them  not  love  him 

In  place  of  a  pronoun  as  direct  object  (in  the  active 
rendering)  a  noun  may  be  substituted — 

Anabugu-n-yaro  don  mugunta-     The  boy  is  beaten  on  account  of  his 

1-sa  bad  deeds 

Gari  akechi  yanzu  The  town  is  being  taken  now 

If  "by  whom  "  is  added  the  active  voice  is  reverted  to 
for  preference — 

Tonawa  suke  chi-n-gari  The  Ashantis  are  taking  the  town 

If  the  following  sentence  from  Mischlich  is  correct  the 
passive  may  be  adhered  to  in  the  Past  II.  tense. 

Anka  chi  gari  da  tonawa  The  town  was  taken  by  the  Ashantis 

Anka,  Aka 

There  is  a  great  tendency  to  use  the  forms  "  anka  " 
(aka)  instead  of  the  active  voice  in — 

1.  Questions. 

2.  Narration. 

3.  Emphasis. 

l 

Yaushe  ankabugeka  ?  When  were  you  beaten  ? 

Enna  ankaganeku  ?  Where  were  you  seen? 

Domi  ankasache  doki  ?  Why  was  the  horse  stolen  ? 

2  and  3 

Jia  ankabugesu  They  were  beaten  yesterday 

Jia  akayi  wannan  abu  Yesterday  this  thing  was  done 

Tundadewa  ankasache  doki  The  horse  has  been  stolen  a  long 

time 

Akayi  sansani;    da  safia  ta  yi,  T he  camp  was  pitched  ;  when  morn- 

akatashi ;    akayi  ta  fada  har  ///;/  came  they  arose  and  fell  to 

akekasshe  mutane  wojen  tala-  fighting   until  about  3000    men 

ta ;  kana  akadena  were  killed  ;   then  they  ceased 

K 


146  THE    HAUSA   LANGUAGE 

It  will  be  noticed  in  the  last  example  that  it  is  impossible 
in  English  to  keep  to  the  passive  construction  throughout. 
The  active  must  be  resorted  to. 


Passive  with  Intransitive  Verbs 

The  passive  form  can  also  be  used  in  Hausa  with  in- 
transitive verbs.  The  origin  of  the  passive  form  as  stated 
above  is  thus  fully  emphasised — 

Anazua  da  su  They  are  being  brought 

=Suna  zua  da  su  They  are  coming  with  them 

Anje  Kano  They  went  to  Kano 

Special  Uses  of  Passive  Form 
The  passive  is  often  used  in  an  imperative  sense — 

En  kawo  rua  ?  akawo  Shall  I  bring  water  ?     Bring  it  or 

let  it  be  brought 

Asa  su  tafichan,adauko  kayamu,     Let  some  one  go  there  and  take  our 
azo  da  su  wurinmu  loads  and  bring  them  here 

A  real  noun  may  be  used  with  a  passive  prefix  in  those 
tenses  where  the  verb  acquires  a  substantival  idea — 

Ban  debo  wani  ba  don  anarua        /  did  not  take  any  out  on  account 

of  the  rain 

Zamanin  nan  anayungwa  In  those  times  there  was  hunger 

Anshekara  biu  bai  rua  ba  For  two  years  there  was  no  rain 

Bayan  anshekara  dunia  tai  dadi     After  a  year  there  was  peace 

Also — 

Ana -nan  Thereupon 

Ana-haka-nan  ,, 

In  the  passive  as  well  as  in  the  active  voice  the  verb 
root  is  occasionally  reduplicated  in  the  plural.  This  gives 
a  distributive  force — 

Ankasosu  They  have  been  loved  (all  of  them 

together) 
Ankasososu  They  have  been  loved  (i.e.,  each  one 

with  special  attention) 


VERB 


147 


Sundry  Examples  of  Use  of  Passive 


Anaikoni  wurinka 
Saanda  akakawoni 
Akahaifeni  a  birni-n-Katsina 

gida-n-Musa 
Anakira-n-salla 
Kai  a-ke-kira 
1  Anarua 
1  A  A,  yanzu  andauka  rua 

1  Da    dam  ana    anarua    deri    da 

rana 

1  Sal  ankwana  biu 
1  Yanzu  afara  sabo 
Akanrena  aiki-n-gwoni  ?  su  kan 

yi  mana 
Ba  asan  garinda  zaasuba 

Ni  za-a-aikeni  ga  Bornu  ? 

Ina    ji-n-motsi   chan,  mi   anayi 

(or  akcyi)  ? 
Kurdi-n-dokina,    sai    da    nono- 

n-mache  anasayensa 

Ina  so  en  tambayc  shi  ko 
ambashi  abinchi  ?  ya  che 
ambashi  kurdi,  amma  ba 
abashi  abinchi  ba  tukuna 

Daga  rana  nan  anasukuan  doki 
da  anabuga  bindiga 

Kada  su  ji  tsoro,  ba  zaa  korcsu 
ba 

Wani  lokachi  zaayenka  sa  chikin 

_  kasua  kuma  ? 

Abersu  su  tafi  ?  Idan  sariki  ya 
cho  abersu,  abersu 

Amma  ku  zaayi  maku  baptisma 


/  was  sent  to  you 

At  the  time  when  I  was  brought 

I  was  born  in  the  city  of  Katsina 

in  Musa's  house 
It  is  the  call  to  prayer 
You  are  called 
It  is  raining 
No,  now  the  rain  has  stopped,  lit., 

been  taken  away 
In  the  wet  season  it  rains  day  and 

night 

Goodbye.     Lit.,  Until  slept  twice 
We  will  now  begin  again 
Is  the  work  of  an  expert  despised  ? 

They  do  indeed  (despise  it) 
The  town  they  were  going  to  pour 

down  on  was  not  known 
Shall  I  be  sent  to  Bornu  ? 
I  hear  a  noise  over  there.     What  is 

being  done  ? 
As  to  the  price  of  my  horse,  it  can 

only  be  bought  with  a  woman's 

breast 
I  want  to  ask  him  if  they  have  given 

him  food  ?     He  says  he  has  been 

given  money  but  not  food  yet 

On  that  day  there  were  horse  races 

and  shooting 
Let  them  not  fear  ;  they  will  not  be 

driven  away 
At  what  time  will  they  kill  a  cow 

again  in  the  market  ? 
Will  they  be  allowed  to  go  ?     If  the 

chief  says  let  them  go  they  will  be 

let  go 
Hut  you  yourselves  will  be  baptized 


The  use  of  "  ke  "  for  "  na  "  might  possibly  be  called  a 
hybrid,   being  a  transfer  into   the  passive  form  of  the 


and 


1  In  these  sentences  the  purely  passive  idea  is  more  prominent, 
id  the  substitution  of  "su"  would  be  difficult. 


148  THE    HAUSA   LANGUAGE 

present  tense  form   "  ke "  just  as  if  it  were  "  na."     To 
complete  the  analogy  "  n  "  is  inserted — 

Ina  fada  maka  kamada  akeyin-     /  will  tell  you  how  "  tuo  "  is  made 

tuo 
A-ke-samunsn  They  were  caught 

If  the  verb  has  the  termination  "da,"  the  "n"  is  of 
course  omitted — 

Har  ya   zo   wurinda  a-ke-saida      Until  he  come  to  the  place  where 
bayi  they  sold  slaves 


THE  INFINITIVE 

The  fact  that  the  infinitive  is  a  noun  is  not  lost  sight  of 
in  Hausa.     In  rendering  such  sentences  as — 

1.  To  sleep  is  pleasant 

2.  I  wish  to  go 

the  infinitive  may  be  employed,  though  in  the   second 
example  a  circumlocution  may  be  adopted. 
The  above  may  be  translated  as  follows — 

1.  Berichi  ya  yi  dadi 
Berichi  da  dadi  ya  ke 
Berichi  yana  da  dadi 

2.  Ina  so-n-tafia 
Ina  so  en  tafi 

The  following  sentences  furnish  examples  of  pure  nouns, 
or  verbs  used  as  nouns,  in  the  same  position — 

Su  tafi  halbi  They  go  to  shoot 

Su  tafi  gida  They  go  home 

Muka  tafi  farauta  We  went  hunting 

Sun  tafi  chi-n-tuo-n-su  They  have  gone  to  eat  their  food 

Sometimes  the  preposition  "ga,"  to,  is  added — 

Kai,    ba   ka  girima   ba  ga  aiki      You  are  too  small  for  work 

(or  ga  yi-n-aiki) 
Mn  tafi  ga  sha-n-hiska  We  go  to  take  the  air 


VERB  149 

Examples  of  Infinitive  in  Nominative  Case 

Gudu,  gado  -  n  -  matsorachi  ne  ;  To  run  is  the  inheritance  of  a 

tsayawa,  na  maikarifi  -  n  -  coward;  to  stand  (lit.,  standing) 

zuchia  that  of  a  brave  man 

Gani,  em  ba  chi  ba,  karre  (shi)  To  see  if  not  to  eat  means  the  dog 

kan  kwana  da  yungwa  (prov.)  will  sleep  hungry 

Gani-n-sa  da  keao  It  is  beautiful  to  see  (lit.,  The  seeing 

it  is  beautiful) 

Na  samu  wani  abu  da  kamsi,  /  found  something  sweet  smelling 

chinsa  babu  dadi  but  not  good  to  eat 

PLURAL 

Chiye  -  chiye    ya    fi    chanyewa     To  eat  a  little  at  a  time  is  better 
(prov.)  than  to  devour 

Infinitive  as  Direct  Object 

Zaki  ya  ji  kukanta  The  lion  heard  her  cries 

Halbi   a    wutsia   ya  fi   kuskure     It  is  better  to  hit  the  tail  than  to 

(prov.)  miss 

Ina  so-  n-  tafia  /  want  to  go 

Infinitive  as  Indirect  Object  without  Preposition 

Mun  tafi  chi-n-abinchi  We  went  to  eat  food 

Ya  tafi  nema-n-doki  He  has  gone  to  search  for  the  horse 

Na  zo  tambaya-r-ka  ne  /  come  to  ask  you 

Infinitive  as  Indirect  Object  with  Preposition 
Na  aike  shi  gari-n-kawo-n-doki      I  sent  him  to  bring  the  horse 

In  Future  Tense  II.  it  is,  of  course,  the  infinitive  that 
is  used  after  "  zani,"  etc.  — 

Na  rassa  abinda  zan  yi  /  do  not  know  what  to  do.     Lit., 

/  am  without  the  thing  I  shall  do 

Ya    yi    terko    da    zaya    kama     He  made  a  trap  and  he  will  catch 
kurege  a  weasel 

In  such  a  sentence  as  "  He  heard  us  come,"  the  Hausa 
construction  is  "  He  heard  our  coming,"  keeping  "come  " 
strictly  as  a  noun  — 

Ya  ji  mosi-mu  He  heard  us  move 


Na  same  shi  zamne  /  found  him  sitting  down 


150  THE    HAUSA   LANGUAGE 

The  following  are  examples  of  the  use  of  the  subjunctive 
mood  instead  of  the  infinitive  either  with  or  without  a 
conjunction  : — 

WITHOUT 

Ina  so  shi  (or  ya)  tafi  I  want  him  to  go 

Ya  soki  sarikin  da  mashi-n-nan     He  pierced  the  king  with  that  spear 
da  ubangidansa  ya  ba  shi  riko         which   his   master   gave   him   to 

hold 

Ka  yi  nufi  ka  tafi  ?  Did  you  intend  to  go  ? 

Na  aike  shi  shi  kawo  doki  I  sent  him  to  bring  the  horse 

Fadi  en  ji  Let  me  hear  (lit.,  Speak  so  that  1 

hear) 

WITH 

Na  aike  shi  don  shi  kawo  doki     /  sent  him  to  bring  the  horse 
(For  "  don,"  "  domin"  or  "  garin"  may  be  substituted) 

Instead  of  a  subordinate  sentence  two  co-ordinate 
sentences  may  be  employed — 

Sun  tafo  gidansu  suna  rabawa  They  came  home  to  divide  it 

Ba  naku  ne  da  zaku  san  zamanu  It  is  not  for  you  to  know  the  times 

Ta  shigo  gari  tana  nema-n-miji  She  entered  the  town  looking  for  a 

ta  yi  amre  husband  to  marry  him 

Use  of  the  Future  Tense 

Na  aike  (mutum)  wanda  zashi     /  sent  some  one  to  bring  the  horse 

(or  zaya)  kawo  doki 
Na  koiya  masa  yada  (or  kanda     /  taught  him  how  to  clean  the  gun 

or  wada)  zashi  (or  zaya)  wanke 

bindiga 
Ni,  ba  ruana  ba  ne,  su  ne  zasu     It  is  not  my  business.     They  are 

yishi  the  people  to  do  it 

Use  of  Prefix  "mai" 
Kana  da  mutum  maitaya  maka  ?     Have  you  any  one  to  help  you  ? 

Note  also  f ollowing — 

Mun  ji  tausayi  en  rabua  da  shi       We  were  sorry  to  leave  him 


VERB 


151 


PRESENT  PARTICIPLE 

There  are  two  forms  of  present  participle,  both  sub- 
stantival. One  can  be  used  adjectivally  in  apposition  to 
another  noun,  but  the  other  is  never  anything  but  a  noun. 
In  reality  neither  is  a  true  participle,  but  they  are  the 
equivalent  renderings  of  two  uses  of  the  verb  in  English 
with  the  termination  "  -ing." 

No.  1 

Adjectival  forms  are  produced  by  the  use  of  "mai" 
and  "  ma  "  prefixed.  The  resulting  adjectives  take  gender 
and  plural  variations  as  follows  : — 


MASC.  AND  FEM. 

Maibude 

Maifalka 

Maififika 

Maifura 

Maifuta 

Mairubutu 

Mairufe 

Mai  j  if  a 

Maiso 

Maiyaswa 

Maizua 


SOKOTO 

PLURAL 

masubude 

masufalka 

masufifika 

masufura 

masufuta 

masurubutu 

masurufe 

masujifa 

masuso 

masuyaswa 

masuzua 


ENGLISH 

opening 

waking 

flying 

blowing,  kindling 

resting 

writing 

shutting 

throwing 

loving 

throwing  away 

coming 


MASC. 

Mabudi 

Mafalki 

Mafifiki 

Mafuri 

Mafuti 

Marubuchi 

Marufi 

Majefi 

Masoyi 

Mayashi 

Mazayi 


KANO 

FEM. 

PLURAL 

mabudia 

mabuda 

mafalkia 

mafalka 

mafifikia 

mafifika 

mafuria 

mafura 

raafutia 

mafuta 

marubuchia 

marubuta 

raarufia 

marufa 

majefia 

majefa 

masoyia 

masoya 

mayashia 

mayasa 

mazayia 

mazaya 

ENGLISH 

opening 

waking 

flying 

blowing,  kindling 

resting 

writing 

shutting 

throwing 

loving 

throwing  away 

coming 


NOTE  — Moat  of  the  foregoing  are  from  Mischlich 


152  THE    HAUSA   LANGUAGE 

Various  Examples  of  Syntax 

Mutuin  mairufe  kofa  A    man  who   shuts   the  door,  i.e., 

Door-opener 
Malami  mairubutu  yana  zamne      A  mallam  is  sitting  yonder  writing 

chan 
Muka  nema  mutane  ma-isu  tafi     We  looked  for  one  who  would  (lit., 

Hal  ma  capable  of)  go  to  Balma 

No.  2 
Noun  Form l 

The  other  form  of  the  present  participle  is  as  used  in 
English  in  the  sentences,  "  I  am  coming,"  "He  is  killing," 
etc.  It  is  formed  by  adding  "wa"  to  the  verb  stem. 
This  produces  a  noun  form,  and  not  every  verb  is  capable 
of  taking  it.  Being  a  noun  form,  the  pronoun  that  pre- 
cedes it  is  the  one  ending  in  "  -na,"  which  suffix  is  dropped 
in  the  negative.  In  the  3rd  person  the  form  of  pronoun 
"shina"  is  preferred  to  "yana" — 

Zo  zuwa  coming 

lya  iyawa  being  able 

Sayas  (of  saye)  sayaswa  selling 

Shina  fitowa     He  is  coming  out     Ba  shi  fitowa     He    is   not   coming 
(actually  now)  out  (actually  now) 

These  have,  besides,  supplementary  meanings. 

(1)  Futurity 

Ina  zuwa  or  ni  ke  zua  /  am  coming  or  I  will  come 

Ina  tafiata  /  am  going  my  journey.     (This  is 

the  possessive  pronoun  at  end  of 

the  noun) 
Suka  che  ba  mu  bayesua  They  said  we  will  not  give  (it) 

(2)   Possibility  or  Ability 

Shina  yiuwa  ?  ba  shi  yiuwa  Can  it  be  done  ?    It  cannot  be  done 

Gulabe  suna  ketaruwa  ?  Can  the  rivers  be  crossed  ? 

1  See  derived  nouns,  class  8. 


VERB 


153 


Ba  ta  amrua  or  aurua 

Ba  na  damua 

Abi-n-nan     ya     fasu      ba     shi 

gertuwa 

Iri-n-nan  ba  shi  geruwa 
Yana  yenkan  rua  da  lauje  shina 

damrewa    shina   ajiyewa    sai 

rua  ya  yi  sarari 


She  is  not  marriageable 

I  am  not  to  be  annoyed  or  astonished 

This   thing    is    broken,    it   is   not 

repairable 

This  kind  cannot  be  improved 
He  cut  the  water  with  a  sickle  he 
tied  it  up  and  set  it  aside  until 
the  water  made  an  open  space 


If  the  present  participle  is  not  used  a  series  of  co- 
ordinate sentences  may  be  found — 


Suka  kama  hainya,  suna  waka, 
suna  yebo-n- Allah 


They  took  the  road  singing  (and) 
praising  God 


PAST   PARTICIPLE 

The  past  participle  is  a  pure  adjective  formed  from  the 
verb  stem  by  a  reduplication  of  the  last  syllable  for  the 
most  part — 


MASC. 


FEM. 


ENGLISH 


Arare 

araria 

araru 

ara 

lent 

Biye 

biyia 

biyu 

bi 

followed 

Budade 

budadia 

budadu 

bude 

opened 

Chechache 

chechachia 

chechachu 

cheche 

saved 

Chikake 

chikakia 

chikaku 

chika 

filled 

Dafafe 

dafafia 

dafafu 

dafa 

cook 

Falkake 

falkakia 

falkaku 

falka 

woken 

Fifikake 

fifikakia 

fifikaku 

fifika 

flown 

Furare 

furaria 

furaru 

fura 

blow  a  fire 

Futate 

futatia 

futatu 

futa 

rested 

Haifafe 

haifafia 

haifafu 

haife 

begotten 

Jefafe 

jcfafia 

jefafu 

jefa 

thrown 

Karikache 

karikachia 

karikatu 

karikata 

bent 

Kiraye 

kirayia 

kirayu 

kira 

called 

Koshashe 

koshashia 

koshashu 

koshi 

satisfied 

Karbabe 

karbabia 

karbabu 

karba 

received 

Konane 

konania 

konanu 

kone 

burnt 

Matache 

matachia 

matatu 

mutu 

dead 

Ninane 

ninania 

ninanu 

nina 

ripened 

Kamtachc 

ramtachia 

ramtatu 

ramche 

borrowed 

(ramtye) 

Bubutache 

rubutachia 

rubutatu 

rubutu 

written 

Bufafe 

rufafia 

rufafu 

rufe 

shut 

Sanane 

sanania 

sananu 

sani 

known 

154 


THE    HAUSA   LANGUAGE 


Satache 

satachia 

satatu 

Shaidade 

shaidadia 

shaidadu 

Shiriaye 

shiriayia 

shiriayu 

Soyaye 

soyayia 

soyayu 

Tafasashe 

tafasashia 

tafasasu 

Tarare 

tararia 

tararu 

Toyaye 

toyayia 

toyayu 

Tsarare 

tsararia 

tsararu 

Wankake 

wankakia 

wankaku 

Yasashe 

yasashia 

yasasu 

Yirdade 

yirdadia 

yirdadu 

Zayaye 

zayayia 

zayayu 

sata 

shaida 

shiria 

so 

tafasa 

tara 

toya 

tsara 

wanke 

yas 

yirda 

zo 


stolen 

proven 

prepared 

beloved 

boiled 

assembled 

baked 

guarded 

washed 

thrown  away 

believed 


Examples  of  Syntax 


A  Kano  akoi  takardu  rubutatu 

dayawa 
A     Kano    akoi    rubutatu-n-ta- 

kardu  dayawa 
Kada  ka  tafi  wuri-n-sariki,  sai 

ka  ga  kofa  budadia  or  Kada 

ka  tafi  wuri-n-sariki  sai  ka  ga 

budadia-1-kofa 
Doiya  nan  dainye  che,  wadanga 

kua  dafafu  ne 
Lemu    da    ka    kawo    mani   ba 

nunanu   ba  ne 
Yara  nan  lalatatu  ne,  da  suna 

samari  akakialisu,  shi  ne  ya  sa 

Ya   damra   fitila  juyaya  a  bisa 

adaka 
Zakara  ya  zamna  adaki  matache 


At  Kano  are  many  written  books 


Do  not  go  to  the  chief  until  you  see 
his  door  open 


This  yam  is  fresh  those  however 
are  cooked 

The  limes  you  brought  me  are  not 
ripe 

These  boys  are  corrupted,  when 
they  were  young  they  were  ne- 
glected ;  that  is  what  caused  it 

He  has  tied  the  lamp  on  the  box 
upside  down 

The  cock  lay  in  the  room  dead 


VERBAL  ADVERBS 

These  are  formed  from  the  verb  stem  with  the  prefix 
"a,"  which  may  perhaps  be  the  preposition  "on,"  and 
the  final  vowel  is  changed  to  "  e,"  as — 


Abude     from  budu 
Adarime     ,      damre 
Afalke         ,      falka 
Afifike         ,      fifika 
Afure                fura 
Afnche              futa 
Ahadie      ,       hade 

open            Ajefe        fr< 
tied              Akafe 
waked         Akwanche 
flown           Akunche 
kindled        Amache 
rested          Amanche 
swallowed   Arataye 

jm  jefa          thrown 
kafa         fastened 
kwanta    laid  down 
kunche    loosed 
mutu       dead 
manta     forgotten 
rataya     hung 

VERB 


155 


Arubu-    from  rubutu 

tuche 

Arufe          „      rufe 
Ashike        „ 
Ashirige     „     shiriga 


Asoye 


written 

shut 
melted 
laden, 
placed 
on  top 
of  each 
other 
loved 


Asage      fro 
Atsaye       „ 

Asanche     , 
Ataushe     , 

Awanke      , 
Azamne     , 
Ayashe       . 
Azaye         , 

m  tsaga 
tsaya 

sani 
tausa  or 
taushe 
wanka 
zamna 
yas 
zo 

drawn 
(stand) 
erect 
known 
pressed 

washed 
seated 
thrown 
come 

These  forms  are  not  all  translatable  into  English  in 
the  same  way — 


Na  ga  kaza  afifike 

Na  ga  kofa  abude 

Na  ga  mutum  azaye 

Na  ishe  shaifu  Usman  asoye  ga 

Filani 
Ya  tashi  tsaye  a  chiki-n-tsaka- 

r-ya-n-uwa 


I  saw  the  chicken  flying  away 

I  saw  the  door  ajar 

I  saw  the  man  had  come 

I  met  the  sheikh  Usman  the  beloved 

of  the  Fulas 
He  got  up  and  stood  in  the  midst  of 

the  brethren 


(In  this  the  prefix  "a"  is  dropped.) 


Na   ganeshi   akewaye    ga   yara 

dayawa 
Sai  ga  mutum  biu  daura  da  su 

atsaye 

Suka  iske  kogi  achiko 
Sun   gan'shi    azona    kaman    da 

("azona"        euphonic        for 

"  azone  "  =  "  azamne  ") 
Ga  sauran  zuma  a-ajiye 
Na    bar    mashi    chan    akafe   a 

jikinsa 


I   saw  him  surrounded   by  many 

boys 
But  two  men  were  standing  by  them 

They  found  the  river  full 
They  saw  him  seated  as  before 


See  the  rest  of  the  honey  is  put  down 
I  left  the  spear  there  fast  in  his  body 


USE  OF  INVERTED  PERSONAL  PRONOUN 

There  are  only  three  verbs  in  Hausa  that  are  exceptions 
to  the  rule  that  the  subject  pronoun  precedes  the  verb. 
They  are  all  defective,  and  only  appear  in  the  forms  given 
here— 

1  Zani         /  will  go.     Used  in  the  future  tense 

2  (m.)  zaka 

(f.)  zaki 

3  (in.)  zashi,  zaya,  zai 

(f.)  zata 

plu.  1  zamu 

2  zaku 

3  zasu 


156  THE    HAUSA   LANGUAGE 

"  Za  "  is  the  reverse  of  "  zo,"  come,  and  so  means  "  go." 

Yaka  (m.),  yaki  (f.)         come  here  )  T 

Yaku  come  here  (plu.)  (  Operative 

Jeka  (m.),  jeki  (f.)          qo  /  T 
Jeku  go  \  Operative 

"Je"  is  also  used  in  the  ordinary  way  preceded  by 
the  pronoun — 

Zani  Kano  /  go,  or  will  go,  to  Kano 

Na  biku  bar  wurinda  zaku  /  will  follow  you  to  the  place  you 

are  going  to 

Ke  je  ki  60  thou  !  (f.) 

Ni  ma  za  en  je  ni  en  rama  abinda  And  I  will  go  and  revenge  myself 

ubana  ya  yi  mini  on  my  father 

Ya  tafi  ya  je  sari  oban  He  went  and  killed  his  father 

IMPERSONAL  VERBS 

There  are  two  impersonal  verbs  in  Hausa  "akoi" 
(akwoi)  and  "  wai  "  (wae). 

Akwoi 

"  Akwoi  "  means  there  is.  There  is  no  change  for  tense, 
time  being  indicated  by  adverbs — 

Tun  a  mafari  akoi  Allah  God  has  been  since  the  beginning 

or  There  is  a  God  ever  since  the 
beginning 

Sometimes  the  3rd  personal  pronoun  plural  follows  in 
answer  to  a  question,  as  "  Akwoi  su  "  There  are. 

Akwoi  su  dayawa,  ba  arasasu         There    are    plenty,    they    are    not 

wanting 

Wai  (wae} 

"  Wai "  =  "  ya  che,"  he  says.  It  is  always  used  when  the 
speaker  is  not  speaking  on  his  own  authority.  It  is  not 
universally  interchangeable  with  "ya  che." 

Wai  ku  tafi  He  says  you  must  go  or  you  are 

to  go 
Wani  yaro  ya  zo  wai  shi  Audu       A  certain  boy  has  come,  he  says  he 

is  Audu 

NOTE. — Miller  says  this  is  a  Zaria  idiom. 


VERB  157 

Under  the  head    of    impersonal  verbs    may    also    be 
mentioned  the  use  of  the  noun  "  saura,"  remainder. 

Saura  kadan  muu  gama  aikinmu     In  a  short  time  we  shall  finish  our 

work 
Saura  kwana  uku  In  three  days  or  There  is  left  three, 


Yi 

The  verb  "  yi  "  is  often  used  as  an  impersonal  verb. 
Ya  yi  kusa  It  is  near 

See  in  chapter  on  idioms  under  "  yi  " 


CHAPTER    VI 

ADVERBS 

ADVERBS  may  be  divided  as  follows : — 

1.  Place. 

2.  Time. 

3.  Manner. 

4.  Affirmation  and  Negation. 

5.  Interrogation. 

Most  adverbs  are  either  compound  words  made  up 
wholly  or  partly  from  other  parts  of  speech,  or,  in  regard 
to  adverbs  of  place  in  particular,  some  nouns  are  used 
without  any  change  of  form. 

There  are  some  words  which  are  classed  under  adverbs 
of  manner  and  time  of  which  it  is  hard  to  decide  whether 
they  are  not  better  classed  as  conjunctions,  a  doubt  which 
is  equally  common  to  other  West  African  languages. 

Some  West  African  languages,  among  which  may  be 
mentioned  Yoruba,  Efe,  and  Mende  have  long  lists  of 
intensitive  adverbs.  These  words  are  very  commonly 
attached  to  certain  verbs  alone,  and  cannot  be  used  with 
other  verbs.  Hausa  is  quite  deficient  in  this  respect,  but 
seeing  that  many  of  these  intensitives  have  an  approxima- 
tion to  the  root  of  the  verb  to  which  they  are  attached 
when  needed,  it  may  be  assumed  that  they  are  derived 
from  that  verb.  If  that  be  confirmed,  a  germ  of  the 
same  idea  lies  in  Hausa  in  the  use  of  the  neuter  form 
ending  in  "  u "  following  the  principal  verb  (see  under 
division  of  verbs). 

158 


ADVERB 


159 


Nan,  nana 

Nanyanga 
Chan,  chana 
Tare 
Enda 


1.  ADVERBS  or  PLACE 

Simple 

here,    there.       (For    etymology   see    under 

demonstrative  pronoun) 
here.     (Not  in  colloquial  use) 
there,  yonder 

together.     (Related  to  "  tara,"  to  collect) 
where  (relative)   For  "enna?"   where?  ste 

under  interrogative  adverbs) 


Daga  nan 

Daga  chan 

Da  nisa,  daga  nisa 

Da  kusa,  daga  knsa 

Wuri-n-nan 

Wuri  duka 

Wuri-n-da 

Ko-enna 

Dabara,  daura 


Compound 

hence,  from  here 

thence,  from  there 

far,  from  afar.     (Nisa  is  a  noun) 

near 

here,  at  this  place 

everywhere 

where,  the  place  which 

anywhere 

near,  alongside 


Gaba 

Baya 

Bisa 

Kasa 

Kalkas,  kalikashi 


Nouns  used  as  Adverbs 


in  front 

behind 

above 

below 

below 


Waje 

Tsakani 

Chiki 

Kusa 

Nisa 


outside,  beside 

between 

inside 

near,  nearly,  almost 

far,  distant 


Gangare 


Verbs  used  as  Adverbs 
across  Ketare  across 


Examples  of  Uses 
Nan,  chan,  daga  chan,  wuri-n-nan,  etc. 


Shina  nan 
Shi  ke  nan 


a  vi 

nan,  bar  ka  yishi 
Tana  chan.     Tana  chana 


He  is  here,  or  there — not  far 

It  is  so.     This  phrase  is  used  as  n 

sort  of  mark  of  punctuation  in 

conversation 
Since  I  have  told  you,  so  it  is,  you 

must  do  it 
She  is  yonder 


160 


THE    HAUSA   LANGUAGE 


Shina  nana 

Ba  shi  nan 

Zo  nan 

Aje  bindiga  nan 

Ba  shi  daga  nan 

Tumaki  duka  suna  nan  ?    Ba  su 

duka  nan  ba 
Mi  zaki  yi  nana  ? 
Daga  chan  na  ganiabi-n-mamaki 


He,  is  here 

He  is  not  here 

Come  here 

Put  the  gun  here 

He  is  not  here 

Are  all  the  sheep  here  ?     They  are 

not  all  here 

What  will  you  (f.)  do  here  ? 
There  I  saw  a  wonderful  thing 


Note-  that  the  adverb  precedes  for  emphasis 


Daga  nan  muka  tashi,  muka  issa 

nana 
Daga  wuri-n-nan 

Daga  nan  bar  chan 
Daga  chan  har  nan 
Abokina  shina  (or  yana)  nan 
Tun  yaushe  kana  nan  zamne  ? 


(and) 


From    there   we   started 

we  reached  here 
There  or  from  there  or  from  that 

place 

From  here  to  there 
From  there  to  here 
My  friend  is  here 
How  long  have  you  been  sitting  (or 

living)  here? 


NOTE. — //  "  wuri-n-nan  "  were  used  it  would  follow  "  zamne  " 


Suna  nan  zamne  da  shi 
Ina  tamaha  kwanaki  shida 
nan  zua  ga  Bornu 


They  are  sitting  there  with  him 
I  think  it  is  six  days  from  here  to 
Bornu 


Tare 

Mutane  duka  suna  tafia  tare  All  the  people  are  travelling  together 

"  Tare  "  is  distinct  from  "  tari  "  =very  many 

Enda,  wurinda 


Suka  tambaye  sa  enda  (or  wur- 
inda) uwasa  ta  ke 

Enda  hali,  muni  keao  ne;  enda 
ba  hali  ba,  keao  muni  ne 
(proverb) 


Ba  enda  ban  tafi  ba 
Tali  enda  zaka 


They  asked  him  where  his  mother 
was 

Where  there  is  character  unfavour- 
able appearance  counts  for 
nothing;  where  there  is  no 
character  good  looks  are  of  no 
avail 

There  is  nowhere  I  have  not  been 

Go  to  your  destination 


Nisa,  da  nisa,  etc. 


Bature  shina  nisa  tukun 
Bature  ba  shi  nisa 
Na  gan'  shi  daga  nisa 
Ya  tsaya  daga  nisa 


The  European  is  still  far  off 
The  European  is  not  far 
I  saw  him  afar  off 
He  stood  afar  off 


ADVERB 


161 


Kadan  ku  tafi  nisa  daga  garemu, 
kada  ku  shida  nisa  daga  uban- 
enku 

Mu  tafi  wuri  da  nisa 

Ban  gan'  su  ba,  suna  da  nisa 

Rua  nisa  ya  ke  daganan 
Dengina  sun  tafi  nisa  duk'  sun 

rabu  da  ni 
Ya  yi  nisa 
Suna  tafia  sun  yi  nisa 


Let  us  go  to  a  far  place 

I  have    not  seen  them,  they  are  a 

long  way  off 
The  water  is  far  from  here 
My  countrymen  have  gone  far  away, 

they  have  all  parted  from  me 
It  is  far 
They  went  a  long  way 


Kusa,  da  kusa,  etc. 


Shi  ne  kusa  gareni 

NOTE. — "  Kusa  gare 

Ba  ka  gani  ba  ya  kusa  gareka 

Ya  kusa  chika  da  rua 

Shina  kusa  da  shi 

Shina  kusansa 

Daga  kusa 

Ga  shi  tsakanin  kulkusa 

Kusa  da  juna 

Ya  kusa  inutua 

Hani  ya  kusa  zakua 

Runa  ta  kusa  fadowa 

Aikinsa  ya  kusa  karewa 

Ya  kusa  fadua 


He  is  near  me 
really  makes  a  preposition. 

You  do  not  see  hi  is  near  you 

It  is  nearly  full  of  water 

He  is  near  him.   (Preposition  here) 

He  is  near  him.     (Noun  here) 

From  near 

See  him  in  the  middle  very  close 

Close  to  each  other 

He  was  nearly  dead 

The  dry  season  is  near 

The  sun  is  nearly  setting 

His  work  is  nearly  finished 

He  almost  fell 


The  last  five  examples  show  that  the  fact  that  "  kusa  " 
is  always  a  noun  is  not  lost  sight  of.  The  succeed- 
ing verb  takes  a  noun  form  (in  "wa"),  and  "kusa"  and 
the  verb  are  thus  two  nouns  in  apposition— 

Ya  yi  kusa 
Ku  yi  kusa 


Allah  shina  koenna. 

wuri  duka 
Koenna  sun  sha  gia  sun  koshi 


It  is  near  (not  he  is  near) 
Come  near 

Koenna,  wuri  duka 
Allah  shina     Ood  is  everywhere 


Koenna  ka  tafi  Allah  shi  nana 


Wherever  they  drink  beer,  they  get 

drunk 
Wherever  you  go  God  is  there 


Su  jeru  daidai  ba  na  so  su  taaya 
daura  da  juna 


Dabara,  daura 

Let  them  fall  in  properly.  I  do 
not  want  them  to  stand  one 
(slightly)  in  front  of  another 


162  THE    HAUSA    LANGUAGE 

Gaba,  baya 

Suna  tafia  gaba  ina  binsu  daga  They  are,  walking  in  front,  I  am. 

baya  following  them  behind 

Ki   wuche   gaba,   rua-n-Madina  Pass  on,  the  water  of  Medina  is 

ba  kusa  ba  not  near 

Ba  shi  iya  shi  dauki   kayansa  He  cannot  carry  his  load  on 

nan  gaba 

Bisa,  Tcasa,  kalkas,  etc. 

Shi   ne  daga  bisa,   ni  ne  daga  He  is  on  top,  I  am  underneath 

kalkas 

Ya  shido  daga  bisa  He  came  down  from  aloft 

Kadan  ka  kai  shi  bisa,  ka  kawo-  When  you  have  carried  it  up,  bring 

shi  kasa  it  down  again 

Kai  bisa  !  Carry  it  up 

Tainya  shi !    shi   dauka  kaya  a  Help  him  to  carry  it  up 

bisa 

Mu  fadi  kasa  We  fell  down 

Zamna  kasa  Sit  down 

Ku  aje  kasa  Put  it  down 

Safko  kalkas  daga  itache  Come  down  from  the  tree 

Waje 
Ya  fito  waje  He  came  outside 

"  Waje  "  might  equally  well  be  called  a  noun  here  in  the 
objective  case  after  "fito" 

Sun  fita  waje  sun  yi  yaki  They   went  outside  and  fought   a 

battle 

Tsakani 
Aje  tsakani  Put  it  between 

Child 

Muka   samu   yara   suna    worigi     We  found  some  boys  playing  inside 

daga  chiki 
Sa  chiki  Put  it  inside 

Gfangare.     Used  with  hills 
Gangare  duchi  Across  the  mountains 

Ketare  used  with  water  as  well  as  land 

Ketare  gulbi-n-nan  Across  this  river 

Ketare  chan  That  side 

Ketare  duchi  Over  the  rock 


ADVERB 


163 


2.  ADVERBS  OF  TIME 


Those  marked  *  are  also  conjunctions, 
are  also  prepositions. 

Simple 

again,  also 

before  that,  until,  then 


Those  marked  f 


*Kuma 

*Kana  (K),  kan,  kanda 

Kamin 
*Dada  (S) 
tHar,  hal 

Hario 

Tun,  tunda 

Tuni  (K),  tuntuni 

Tukun,  tukuna 

Tukunche 

Nada 

Abada,  hal  abada 

Tutur,  tutut,  tutuk.  tutu 

Kulum 

Da 

Da 

Karshe 


until 

again,  yet 

while,  since,  while  as  ye 

long  ago,  already 

yet,  not  yet 

„          (rare) 
before 
for  ever 
for  ever 
always 
of  old 
when 
lastly 


Take  (S)  =  koyanzu,  and,  nan  da  nan 


Yao 
Jia 

Shekaranjia 

Gobe 

Jibi 

Gata 

Chita 

Bara 

Km. i 

Badi 


to-day 

yesterday 

day  before  yesterday 

to-morrow 

day  after  to-morrow 

the  third  day  ahead 

fourth  day  ahead 

last  year 

this  year 

next  year 


These     are, 
strictly 
speaking, 


Ananan 


Yanzu  (ya-n-zu) 

Ko-yanzu 

Saa-n-da,   lotunda,  lokachinda, 

wokachinda,  kwanakinda 
Nan  da  nan 


thereupon,  after  that.  From  "a" 
the  prep.  =  on,  al,  and  "nan" 
here 

now 

now  immediately 

when  (relative) 

immediately 


164 


THE    HAUSA   LANGUAGE 


Daganan 

(Yaushe  ? 
Koyaushe 
Saa-nan,  lotu-nan,  lokachi-nan, 

zamani-nan,  kwanaki-nan 
Saa  duka,   lokachi  duka,  lotu 

duka 

Wani  lotu 
Tundadewa  (S) 
Dadewa 
Dadai 

Da  wuri,  Dauri  (S) 

Da  fari  (S) 

Chikin  da-farko  (K) 

Da  safe 

Da  mareche 

Da  dere 

Zama-zama 

So  dayawa 
fBaya  ga 

Baya-n-wannan 
tAgaba 

Gaba  ma 

Nan  gaba 

Gaba  daia  (S) 

Baki  daia  (K) 


thereupon 
When  ?  see  interrogative  adverbs) 

at  any  time,  immediately,  always 
now,  these  days 

at  any  time 

another  time 

long  since 

long  since 

ever.     Usually    with    negative ;  ~ 

never 

of  old,  formerly 
at  first 
at  first 

early  morning 
at  evening 
at  night 

after  a  little  time 
often,  many  times 
after.     (Prep,  really) 
after  this 
in  front 

later  on,  in  the  future 
henceforth,  in  future 
at  once 


Kuma,  again,  more,  also 
Derived  from  Tcoma,  to  return 


Zo  kuma 

Babu  nisa  kuma 

Ba  ni  da  kurdi  dayawa  kuma 

A-kan-yi-su  da  kasa,  a-kan-yi- 

su  da  itache  kuma 
Wani  lokachi  za-a-yenka   sa   a 

kasua  kuma 
Audu  ya  yi  sata ;  Mahma  ya  yi 

sata  kuma 


Come  again 

No  farther 

I  have  no  more  money  at  all 

They   are  made  of  earth,  they  are 

made  of  wood  also 
When  will  they  kill  a  bull  again  in 

the  market 
Audu  has  stolen  ;  Mahma  has  also 

stolen.      (This  does   not  imply 

that  Mahma  has  stolen  again, 

i.e.,  a  second  time) 


Kana,  kan,  kanda.     See  also  below  under  "before" 
kan   tafi   ni   kan  chi     Then    I  used  to  go,  I  used  to  eat 


Kana    ni 

tuona 
Dafari    na    gani    sariki,    kana 

galadima,  da  karshe  sariki-n- 

pawa 


my  food 

First   I  saw    the    chief,   then    the 
minister,  lastly  the  head  butcher 


ADVERB  165 

Hario  ya  kirani  so-biu,  kana  na  Again  he  called  me  twice,  then  I 

amsa  answered 

Ina  son  Allah,  kana  abokina  /  lave  God  before  (then)  my  friend 

Kan  su  gama  Before  they  have  done 

Kanda  ta  rabika  (poetic)  Before  it  part  you 

Kanda  na  je  daga  nan  Before  I  go  from  here 

Dada  =  Kana 

Suka  fide  nama  dada  suna  bida-     They  skinned  the  animal,  then  they 
n-wuta  (began)  to  look  for  fire 

Kamin 

Kamin  rua  shi  taso  Before  the  rain  started 

Sai  ka  shiria  kamin  na  zo  You  must  get  ready  by  the  time  I 

come 

Shiga    daki    kamin    masugayya     Go  into  the  room  before  the  assem- 
su  zo  blage  comes 

Ear 

Har  rana  ta  fadi  Until  the  sun  sets 

Har  yao  Until  to-day 

Yana  tafia   bar  yanzu ;    ba  ya  He  was   travelling   until   now,    he 

gama  ba  did  not  meet  him 

Tsaya  bar  ya  tafi  Wait  till  he  has  gone 

Ka  jira  ni  bar  en  zaka  Wait  till  I  come 

Ya  tambaye  ta  bar  so  uku  He  asked  her  three  times 

Ya  jira  bar  ruaye  su  zuba  kasa  He  waited  until  the  rain  came  (lit., 

Waters  pour  on  the  earth) 

Na    rike    asiri  -  n  -  nan   bar   ga  /  have  kept  this  secret  until  now 

yanzu  (yao)  (to-day) 

Kada  ka  maide  mani  dana  bar  You  need  not  return  my  son  to  me 

na  gamu  da  kai  daga  chiki-n-         until  I   meet   you   in   the   other 

lakbira  world 

Hario 

Hario  mutume-n- nan,  ko  ubanta,    Again  the  same  man,  or  perhaps  it 
ya  zaka  ya  maishieta  was  her  father,  came  (and)  made 

her  return 

See  example  under  "  kana  " 

Tun 

Tun  bara  Since  last  year 

Tun  da  safe  Since  morning 

Tun  jia  bawa  sbi  ke,  amma  yao  Only  yesterday  he  was  a  slave,  but 
da  no  to-day  he  is  free 


166 


THE    HAUSA   LANGUAGE 


Tun  a  mafari  akoi  Allah 


Ubanka  yana  da  rai  ?     Aa,  ya 

mutu  tun  ina  yaro 
Ku  tuba  tun  ba  ku  mutu  ba 
Tun  da 


Tun  da  akoi  daki 
Tun  da  babu  sai  Allah 


God  has  been  since  the  beginning 

(lit.,  Since  in  the  beginning  there 

is  God) 
Is  your  father  alive  ?     No,  he  has 

been  dead  ever  since  I  was  a  boy 
Repent  before  you  die 
Since  a  long   time   back.     This  is 

distinct   from   "  tunda,"   while, 

etc. 
From  the  first  there  has  been  a  hut 

(here) 
From  the  beginning  nothing  but  God 


Compare  "  tun  a  mafari  "  above 
Tunda =tun  lokachinda 


Tun   da   ni  ke,  kulum   na  fadi 
gaskia 


Ever  since  I  was  born  (lit.,  I  was) 
I  have  always  spoken  the  truth 


Tunda  ankahaifeni  ban  ga  bature    Ever  since  I  was  born  I  have  never 


ba 


seen  a  white  man 


Tunda,  while 


Tunda   suna   chika    bindigansu 

dorina  ta  tan*  nisa 
Ina  son  chi  tuona  da  safe  tunda 

ba  shi  yi  ba  sainyi 
Tunda  ba  shi  kare  maganansa 
Tunda  ya  mutu  birni  ya  zama 

wofi 

Tuni,  tuntuni,  tundadewa. 

Ya  tafi  Kano  tuni 

Na  rabu  da  gida  tuni 

Na  yi  shi  tuntuni 

Karifi  tara  ne,  antafi  makaranta 

tuni 

Ka  shimfida  tufa  tuni  ? 
Ka  toya  gurasa  tuni  ? 
Ina  jira-n-ka  tundadewa 

Ya  mutu  tundadewa 


Whilst  they  are  loading  their  guns 
the  hippopotamus  went  far  away 

I  want  to  eat  my  food  in  the  early 
morning  before  it  gets  cold 

Before  he  had  finished  talking 

Since  he  died  the  city  has  become 
desolate 

The  last  is  a  stronger  form 

He  has  already  gone  to  Kano 

I  left  home  long  ago 

I  did  it  very  long  ago 

It  is  nine   o'clock,    everybody   has 

gone  to  school  long  ago 
Have  you  spread  the  cloth  yet  ? 
Have  you  baked  bread  recently  ? 
I  have  been  waiting  for  you  a  long 

time 
He  died  long  since 


Tukuna,  as  yet ;   not  yet  (in  negative  sentences) 

Abinchi  ya  kare  ?     Tukuna,  ba  Is  the  food  (lit.,  finished)  ready  ? 

ya  nuna  ba  sarai  Not  yet,  it  is  not  properly  cooked 

Ban  chi  komi  ba  tukuna  /  have  not  eaten  anything  yet 

Ba  ya  zo  ba  tukuna  He  has  not  come  yet 


ADVERB  167 

Anzo    da    mutane  ?       Tukuna  Have  they  brought  the  men  ?     They 

anazua  da  su  are  just  bringing  them  now 

Yina  chan  tukuna,  ya  ki  zua  He  is  over  there  just  now,  he  refuses 

to  come 

Ku  zamna  tukuna  Sit  down  for  the  moment 

Ba   doki  rua  tukuna,  kana  ka  Give  the  horse  water  first,  then  go  to 

tafi  kasua  the  market 

Sai  tukun  shi  damre  maikarifi  Except  he  bind  the  strong  man  first 

Ya  zakua  tukun  He  will  come  first 

Nada 

Ba  ya  ji  tsoro  ba  kama-n-nada  He  was  not  afraid  as  before 

Litafi  nan  duka  daine  (daia  ne)  This  book  is  all  the  same  as  before 

kama-n-nada 

Ta  waza  wukanta  kama-nada  She  sharpened  her  knife  as  before 

Abada,  hal  abada 

Allah  shi  ne  abada  God  is  for  ever,  i.e.,  eternal 

Iblis    shina    chiki-n-wuta    har     Satan  is  in  the  fire  for  ever 
abada 

Tutur,  etc. 

Ku  sani  dunia  ba  ta  zama  tutut     You  know  the  world  will  not  last 
(poetic)  for  ever 

Kulum 

Kulum     suna     kashe     mutane     They  never  ceased  killing  men 
kul  11  in  kulum 

Da,  of  old 

Kano  da  gari  karami  ne  Kano  was  formerly  a  little  town 

Da  ni  talaka  ne,  yanzu  na  samu  Formerly  I  was  poor,  now  I  am 

dukia  da  dama  better  off 

Mutane-n-da  suka   zamna  nan,  Men  of  old  lived  here,  without  work, 

ba  aiki  ba,  ba  komi  sai  abinchi  without  anything  but   plenty  of 

tari  food  (lit.,  food-abundance) 

NOTE. — "  The  men  who  "  would  be  "  mutanenda  =  mutane  da  " 

Tasunia  kwanaki-n-mutane  da       A  story  of  the  days  of  men  (of)  old 
Mu  tuna  da  Let  us  recall  former  times 

Da,  when  (relative) 

Da  ta  gane  ni  ta  tambayeni :  When  she  saw  me  she  asked  me : 

enna  ubanka  ?  Where  is  your  father  ? 

Da  suna  yi-n-inagana  Bornu  As  they  were  speaking  the  Bornu 

ban  sani  ba  abinda  su  ke  language  I  did  not  know  what 

chewa  they  were  saying 


168  THE    HAUSA   LANGUAGE 

Da  suka  dauka  abu  duka  chiki-  When  they  had  taken  everything  out 

n-gari  sun  sa  wuta  of  the  town  they  set  fire  to  it 

Da  sa lia  ya  yi  muka  tashi  When  it  was  daylight  we  started 

Da  mareche  ya  yi  When  it  was  evening 

Da  gari  ya  waye  When  the  dawn  had  come 

Saanda,  (Saa'da)  lokachinda,  lotunda,  wokachinda 
=  when  (relative) 

Saanda  na  samu  dama  When  I  am  better 

Lotunda  na  tashi  ba  na  ji  lafia  When  I  started  I  did  not  feel  well 

ba 

Kun  zo   da  safinga  ?     I,  muka  Did  you  come  this  morning  ?     Yes, 

zo,  amma  kwanakinda  muka         we  came,  but  when  we  came  you 

zo  kana  karatu  were  reading 

Saa-nan,  lotu-nan,  lokachi-nan,  zamani-nan,  kwanaki-nan   (or  saa- 
n-nan,  etc.)=Then,  at  that  time 

Lotu  nan  ina  tamaha  shekarata     /  think  I  was  eleven  years  of  age 

sha  daia  then 

Saa  nan  Musa  ya  tafo  Then  Musa  came 

Also — 

Daga  rana  nan  anasukua-n-doki     On  that  day  there  were  horse  races 
da  anabuga  bindiga  and  shooting 

Wani  lotu,  etc. 

Wani  lotu  shi  kan  kawo  labari     Sometimes  he   brings   good    news, 
nagari,  da  wani  lotu  mugu  sometimes  bad 

Karshe 
(See  example  under  "  Kana  ") 

Yao,  gobe,  jia,  etc.     Usually  at  beginning  of  sentences 

Yao  ba  mu  tafi  ba  makaranta        To-day  we  did  not  go  to  school 
Jia  na  ji  labari  da  ni  ke  so  To-day  I  heard  the  news  I  liked 

Ananan 
Ananan  da  safe  After  that,  in  the  morning  .  .  . 


ADVERB  169 

Tanzu,  Koyanzu 

Yanzu-yanzu  Now  at  once 

Hal  ya  zua  yanzu  Up  till  now 

Ya  che  Bature  shi  tafo  yanzu         He  said,  Let  the  white  man  come 

at  once 
Koyanzu  na  yi  koda  na  gaji  /  will  do  (it)  at  once  though  I  am 

tired 
Koyanzu  na  tafi  Lokoja  Just  now  I  go  to  Lokoja 

Koyaushe 
Ina  tunawa  koyaushe  7  am  always  remembering  it 

Dadai 
See  other  ways  of  expressing  "  never  "  under  "  never." 

Mutume  kama-n-wannan  dadai  7  have  never  seen  a  man  like  this 

ban  gani  ba 

Bako  gari  ba  ka  zo  dadai  ba  A  strange  city  to  which  you  have 

never  before  come 

Dadai    ban    gani    ba    anadafa  7  never  saw  dates  cooked  before 

dabino 

Ban  yi  sata  dadai  I  have  never  stolen 

Nan  da  nan.     (Usually  in  narration) 
Ka  yi  shi  nan  da  nan  Do  it  at  once 

Daganan 

Daganan  sariki  yache  After  that,  or  thereupon,  the  king 

said 

Dawuri,  dauri 
Na  ji  magana  nan  dawuri  /  have  heard  that  before 

Dafari 
(See  example  under  "  kana  ") 

Da  safe,  da  mareche,  etc.,  points  of  time.     "  Da  "  is  the 
preposition  "  with  " 

Muka  tashi  da  dere  We  started  at  night 

Ina  tamaha  sun  aike  wadansu  7  ///////•  they  sent  some  persons  awiy 

daga  chiki-n-dere  nan  during  the  night 

Gobe  da  safe  mu  tashi  To-morrow  we  start 


170  THE    HAUSA   LANGUAGE 

Zama-zama  or  sama-sama 
Ban  ji  ba  sai  sama-sama  /  only  heard  a  little 

Baya  ga  (a  preposition  in  reality) 

Daga  baya  ga  wannan  After  this 

Baya  ga  beri-n-gidansa  After  leaving  home 

Baya  ga  mutua-r-kanuata  na  ji  After  the  death  of  my  younger  sister 

labari-n-yaki  /  heard  rumours  of  war 

A  gaba 
Allah  ya  sa  kwanakinsa  agaba        God  prolonged  his  life 

Gaba  ma 

Gaba- ma  shi  zama  da  Later  he  will  be  free 

Gaba- ma  ina  da  kurdi  In     the     future      I     shall     have 

money 

Nan  gaba 
Nan  gaba  ba  kana  kara  Henceforth  do  not  do  it  again 

Gaba-daia,  baki-daia,  gabadai 

Masukaya  su  zo  gaba  daia,  ba     The  carriers  must  all  come  together, 

daia  daia  ba  not  one  by  one 

Kana  gani  dari  suna  tafia  gabadai    You  might  see  hundreds  walking 

about  at  one  time 
Domi  ba  ka  zo  wurina  gabadaia      Why  did  you  not  come  to  me  at 

ba  ?  once  ? 

Ku  beri  ataru  atafi  gaba  daia         Let    them    assemble    and    go    all 

together 
Baki  daia  mu  tashi  We  will  start  all  at  once 

Time 

Idiomatic  expressions  and  circumlocution. 

Some  adverbs  of  time  in  English  may  in  Hausa  be 
expressed  idiomatically,  or  a  circumlocution  may  be 
adopted.  There  may  also,  however,  be  a  corresponding 


ADVERB  171 

adverb  in  Hausa,  and  the  two  modes  of  expression  may 
be  used  indifferently. 

Never 

Besides  using  "dadai"  the  verb  "taba"  to  touch,  may 
be  used. 

Ban  taba   gani    mutume-n-nan     /  have  never  seen  this  man  until 

ba  sai  yao  to-day 

Ka  taba  zua  Kano  ?  Have  you  ever  been  to  Kano  ? 

Before 

"  Before  "  besides  being  expressed  by  "  kana,"  "  tunda," 
etc.,  may  be  translated  by  means  of  the  negative,  an 
idiom  which  is  the  standard  one  even  as  far  as  in  the  far 
distant  Mende  language — 

Shekara-n-birni-n-Daura    alfina     The  age  of  the  city  of  Daura  wax 
da  dari  Filani  ba  su  tafo  ba  2100  before  the  Fulani  came 

"  Tun  "  may  also  be  used  with  a  negative — 

Ya  rabu   da   gida  tun  abokina     He  left  home  before  his  friend  came 
ba  ya  zo  ba 

Also  by  special  verbs— 

Na  rigaya  shi  zua  nan  /  reached  here  before  him  (lit.,  / 

anticipated  him) 

Na  fara  zua  nan  ya  bini  a  baya  /  reached  here  first  (lit.,  /  began  to 

come  here  he  followed  me  behind) 

Since.     Expressed  with  "  not,"  etc.,  when  "  tunda  "  not  used 

Ya  yi  shekara  biu  ban  gan'ka  ba  /  have  not  seen  you  for  two  years 

Sai  kaka :  ba  ya  fi  wata  biu  ba  Xot  till  autumn :    it   is  not  more 

anshipkata  than  two  months  since  it  was  sown 

Ya  yi  shekaru  dayawa  da  zuansa  It  is  several  years  since  last  he  came 

Bakoi  uku  ke  nan  da  uwana  ya  It  is  three  weeks  since  my  brother 

yenke  yatsansa  cut  his  finger 

(See  example  under  Sundry  Expressions  of  Time  below) 

For,  duration  of  time 

Kwana  uku  ko  nan  da  na  ke  yi     For  three  days  I  have  had  dysentery 

atuni 

Na  shekara  f  udu  ina  chikin  karatu  For  four  years  I  was  learning  to 

read 


172 


THE    HAUSA   LANGUAGE 


Whilst 

Wa    zaya    yerda   wani    ya    chi     Who  will  agree  to  another's  taking 
sarota  tasa,  shi  ko  yana  da  rai         his  kingdom  whilst  he  is  still  alive 

See  under  preposition  "  chiki-n  " 


Soon 


Dufu  ya  yi  kusa 


It  will  soon  be  dark.    (Lit.,  Dark- 
ness makes  near) 


Sundry  Expressions  of  Time 

Dare-n-jia  ansache  kaya  guda  On  the  previous  night  a  load  was 

stolen 

Yao   kwana  uku  ban  chi  komi  It  is  now  three  days  since  I  have 

ba  eaten  anything 

Daga  chiki-n-shekara  nan  In  that  year 

Sun  yi  masa  aiki  kwana  shida  They  worked  for  him  six  or  three 

ko  uku  days 

Kadan  sun  kwana  dere  uku  ko  When  they  had  stayed  three  or  four 

fudu  nights 

Muka  zamna  daganan  kwanaki  We  remained  there  many  days 

dayawa 

Gobensa  (  =  gobe-n-sa)  On  the  next  day 

Yao  shekara-n-mu'goma  sha  biar  /   have   had   that  jar  for    exactly 

da  ni  da  buta  nan  fifteen  years 


3.  ADVERBS  OF  MANNER 
Those  marked  *  are  also  used  as  conjunctions. 


Bale  (S),  bale-fa  (S),  barshema 
(K),  balantana  (Zanf.),  bal- 
anta,  barshe  (K) 

Daidai 

Daia-ne 
Dakir,  daket 
Dole  (S)  =  tilas  (K) 
Fache 

Gaya  (K)  =  kwarai 

Girshi 

Haka,  hakanan 

Halama 


much,  more,  much  less 

properly,  equally,  together,  uni- 
formly 

ready,  completely 

with  difficulty 

with  force 

much  less,  however  (?  fa  and  verb 
"to  be"  (f.)) 

exactly 

suddenly 

so 

perhaps 


ADVERB  173 

Kadai  alone 

Kadan  o  little  (also  an  adjective) 

Kama  (noun),  kamada,  karaanda  how,  like  as 

*Ko  even.     See  under  conjunctions 

Kokaka  anyhow 

Kwarai  (S)  exactly,  properly 

Lale  in  any  case,  of  necessity,  of  a  surety 

Mana  then,  do  !    A  command  of  urgency 

Maza  quickly 

*Sai  alone,   except,  etc.     Also  preposi- 
tion and  conjunction 

*Saidai  except 

Sanu  softly 

Sarai  properly 

Tari  many.     (A  noun = abundance) 

Tilas  (K)  with  force 

Wada  (S),  yada  (K),  awa  (Zanf)  how,  the,  manner  in  which, 

Wajib  of  necessity 

Watakila  perhaps 


Bale,  etc. 

Na  yi   murna  doki  daia  balefa     I  rejoiced  for  one  horse  much  more 

biu  over  two 

Ba  ya  tafi  Masar  ba  bale  Makka     He  did  not  go  to  Egypt  much  less 

to  Mecca 
Bale  fa  mu  dada  It  is  much  better  for  us  to  wait 

Daidai 

This  is  possibly  not   the   same  word   as   "  daidai "   a 
contraction  of  "  daia  daia  " — 

Maida  tana  motsi,  ba  ta  tsaya  The  table  moves  it  does  not  stand 

daidai  ba  evenly 

Suna  gina  dakuna  biu  daidai  They  build  two  houses  alike 

Ban  ji  daidai  ba  /  did  not  hear  correctly 


Daia  ne  (  =  it  is  one,  unity) 
Sun  yi  aikinsu  daia  ne  They  did  their  work  completely 

Dakir,  daket 
Dakir  na  samu  hainya  I  found  the  road  with  difficulty 


174  THE    HAUSA    LANGUAGE 

Oaya  (K)  =  kwarai 
Ya  gudu  gaya  He  ran  well 

Girshi 

Girshi  na  gani  kura  Suddenly  I  saw  the  hyaena 

Girshi  ya  mutu  Suddenly  he  died 

Haka 

Gara  haka  or  Guma  haka  Better  so 

Haka  shi  ke  It  is  so.     (In  reply  to  a  question 

or  as  a  sort  of  punctuation  in  a 

speech) 
Ko  ba  haka  ba  ?  Or  is  it  not  so  ?     (Used  at  end  of 

question) 

Ya  che  haka  He  said  so  (or  thus) 

Ina  fada  maka  haka  shi  ke  /  tell  you  ;  it  is  so 

Wani    iri-n-sanda    ke    nan    da      What  kind  of  stick  is  this,  it  is  so 

nauyi  haka  ?  heavy 

Haka  da  girima  So  big 

Hakanan 

Hakanan  shi  ke  It  is  so  (in  reply  to  a  question) 

Nan  da  nan  ya  mutu,  ashe !  ii,     He  died  immediately  ;  ah,  yes,  that 
hakanan  ne  is  so 

Halama 
Mu  nemi  halama  muu  samu  Let  us  look,  perhaps  we  shall  find  it 

Kamada,  kamanda  (Kama-n) 

Ina  fada  maka  kamada  akeyishi     /  will  tell  you  how  it  was  done 
Obangiji    ya     bashi    ya    komo     The  Lord   granted  to  him  that  he 
kamanda  shi  ke  da  should  become  as  he  was  before 

The  noun  "  kama,"  from  which  "  kamanda  "  is  made  up  (kama- 
n-da),  is  used  with  an  adverbial  sense  with  the  copulative  "  n  "- 

Yare  ya  yi  kama-n-uwansa  The  boy  is  like  his  mother 

Da  rana  ta  fara  tashi  ina  ganinta  When  the  sun  began  to  rise  I  saw 

kama-n  tana  fita  daga  chikin         it  as  though  it  was  coming  out  of 

gulbi  the  sea 

Kama-n  ya  shiga  gari  As  he  enters  the  town 

Kama-n  ba  su  san'ka  ba  As  if  they  did  not  know  you 

Ko  (see  conjunctions  also) 
Ban  gani  ko  daia  ba  /  have  not  seen  even  one 


ADVERB 


175 


Kokaka 
Kawoshi  kokaka  Bring  it  anyhow 

Kadai 

Kada  daia  na  gani  kadai  /  saw  only  one  crocodile 

(See  also  under  "  sai") 

Sariki  ba  rago  kadai  ya  ba  ni     The  chief  gave  me  not  only  a  ram 

ba,  da  akuya  but  a  goat 

A llali u    shi    kadai    shi    ba    ka     God  alone  does  good  to  you  to-day 

keauta  yao 

Kadan,  kadan 


Kadan  kadan  ! 

Sai  anjima  kadan 

Shina  yin  aiki  kadan  kadan 


Bana  ta  ye  kwarai 
Ya  chi  dayawa  kwarai 
Doki  shina  gudu  kwarai 
Babu  nisa  kwarai 


Lale  ina  zua  da  mareche 
Yao  lale  ya  zo 


Tafi !  mana  ! 

Ku  zo  mana 

Ka  fada  masa  shi  zo  mana 

Mana  !  mana ! 


Ku  t.tli  maza-maza 


Very  little 

Wait  a  little 

He  works  very  little 


Kwarai 


The  sun  is  very  hot 
He  ate  a  great  deal 
The  horse  trots  well 
Not  very  far 


Lale 


In  any  case  I  shall  come  in   the 

evening 
He  comes  to-day  in  any  case 

Mana 

Go  I  do  I 

Come,  along 

Tell  him  he  must  come  at  once 

Come  along  I  or  Wake  up  I 

Maza 

Go  very  quickly 


(See  below,  other  ways  of  saying  "quickly") 
Sai,  also  a  conjunction 

Sai  gobe  Until  to-morrow.  A  parting  salu- 

tation 

Sai  da-safe  Good  night.  (Lit.,  Until  the 

morning 


176 


THE   HAUSA   LANGUAGE 


Sai  anjima 

Sal  anjima  kadan 
Sai  laiia 

Salbarka  =  .?  sai  albarka 
Sai  gaisua 

Sai  ambideka 
Sai  ankwana  biu 

Sai  kada  daia  na  gani 

Sai  ka  dawo 

Babu  bawa  ko  daia  daga  chiki- 

n-gida  sai  ni 
Sai  ubana  ya  che  mani 
Kafa-ta  duka  sai  jini 
Sai   mutume   daia   akesashi  ya 

hawa  bisa  itache 
Ya  che  masa  sai  ya  aika  wuri- 

n-sariki-n-Sokoto  ya  tambay'- 

shi 
Ya   che    mani    babu   komi   sai 

lafia 
Shi   ne,  shi  ke  shaka  azaba-n- 

lakhira ;  sai  ya  gamu  da  wuta 

ya  kan  che  kaitaro  (poetry) 
En  ba  ka  da  kurdi    ba  ka   da 

komi,  sai  kare 
Abinda  ki  keso  sai  en  baki 


Good-bye  for  the  present.      (Lit., 

till  you  have  waited) 
Wait  a  little.     In  a  little  while 
Quite  well.     A  reply  salutation 
Nothing  but  thanks.     No  thank  you 
Nothing  but  thanks.     Lit.,  only  a 

salutation 

( Wait)  till  you  are  sent  for 
Good-bye  for   an    indefinite    time 

Lit.,  Until  you  have  slept  twice 
I  saw  only  one  crocodile 
Until  you  return 
There  was  not  a  single  slave  in  the 

house  except  me 
But  my  father  said  to  me 
My  feet  were  nothing  but  blood 
Only  one  man  was  made  to  climb 

the  tree 
He  said  to  him  he  must  send  and 

ask  the  king  of  Sokoto  first 

He  said  nothing  to  me  except  that 

all  was  well 
He  it  is  he  doubts  the  pains  of  hell. 

Wait  till  he  meets  the  fire  and  he 

will  say,  Alas  ! 
If  you   have   no  money  you  have 

nothing,  you  are  only  a  dog 
Anything  you  (f.)  like  I  will  give  it 

you 


Saidai 

Mun  kira  ka  saidai  ba  ka  jimu     We  called  but  you  did  not  hear 
ba 

Sanu.     See  also  under  salutations 
Ya  tafi  sanu  (sanu  sanu)  He  went  slowly  (very  slowly) 


Ya  yi  magana  sarai 


Sarai 

He  speaks  correctly 


Tilas  (a  noun  by  origin) 

Seize  him  by  force 

But   you    drink    this    water  from 

necessity 

Ya  ki  zakua,  don  wannan  ya  sa     He   refused   to   come  so  he  forced 
shi  tilas  him  to 


Kama  shi  tilas 

Amma  ka  sha  rua  nan  da  tilas 


ADVERB 


177 


Ya  karaata  maihankali  da  dere 
ya  yi  shi  zamna  wuri  daia,  shi 
ber'yawo  sai  tilas,  ko  wani  ya 
mutu,  ko  wani  ya  kiraka  tilas 


A  prudent  man  ought  to  stay  at 
home  at  night.  He  should  not  go 
out  except  forced  to,  say,  by  some- 
body dying  or  calling  you  im- 
peratively 

Tari  (a  noun) 

Turawa  suna  tara  soja  gabas  da     The  white  men  are  collecting  soldiers 
Kukawa  tari  tari  east  of  Kuka  in  vast  numbers 

Watakila 
Wotakila  obanka  shi  zo  kuwa         Perhaps  your  father  will  come  too 

Wajib 
Wajib  mu  do  haiyasu  (poetry)        We  ought  to  take  their  road 

Wada,  yada,  awa  (these  are  nouns) 
Yada  ankayi  zani  fada  maka 


Ka  iya  gaya  mini  yada  mutume- 
n-nan  ya  mutu 


How  (  —  the  way)  it  was  done  I  will 

tell  you 
Are  you  able  to  tell  me  how  this 

man  died 


Formation  of  Certain  Adverbs 

Many  adverbs  are  formed  from  adjectives  in  English 
with  the  addition  of  the  suffix  "  ly."  In  Hausa  correspond- 
ing adverbs  —  which  may  also  equally  be  adjectives  —  are 
formed  from  nouns  with  the  preposition  "da,"  with. 

The  following  are  a  few  :  — 


Da  mareche 
Da  rana 
Da  sasafo 
Da  baya 


Da  nisa 


Da  gaskia 
Da  yawa 
Da  karifi 
Da  dadi 

Bugashi  da  karifi 
Ya  tafi  da  kafa 


Time 

at  evening 

by  day 

in  the  very  early  morning 

last 

Place 


far 

Manner 

Da  hankali         carefully 
Da  wuri              of  old 
Da  kafa              on  foot 
Da  gudu             with  running 

Beat  him  well 
He  went  on  foot 

M 


178  THE    HAUSA   LANGUAGE 

The  use  as  adverbs  of  simple  adjectives  or  others  of 
different  formation  from  the  foregoing  is  not  unknown — 

Ya  fita  nagari  He  has  turned  out  well 

Enda  ya  shiga  duka  ka  bishi          Wherever  he  enters  you  follow  him 

Enda  zaka  duka  a  dunia  Wherever  you  go  in  the  world 

There  is  also  the  use  of  the  intransitive  verb  form  in 
"  u,"  usually  in  the  3rd  person.  It  accompanies  its 
parent  verb,  and  is  probably  an  indication  of  the  origin 
of  those  intensitives  in  other  languages,  so  many  of  which 
have  the  same  root  as  the  verb  they  accompany — 

Adamreshi  shi  damru         Tie  it  tight 
Other  examples  are  given  under  the  verb. 


There  are  some  adverbs  in  English,  such  as  "very," 
"too  much,"  etc.,  which  are  rendered  in  Hausa  in  a 
variety  of  ways  : — 

Very 

By  Reduplication 
Farifari,  very  white         Maza  maza,  very  quickly 

Kadan  kadan,  very  little 
With  colours  the  second  part  may  be  modified. 

Fari-fet,  fet-fet  (S)  very  white 
Fari  fer,  fer-fer  (K)  „ 

Lafia  lau  or  lau-lau  very  well 

Ja-wur,  wur-wur  very  red 

Baki  kirin,  kirin-kirin  very  black 

Uwata   tana    da   rai   amma  ta     My  mother  is  alive  but  she  is  very 
tsofa  da  gaske  old 

See  also  examples  under  "kwarai." 

Too,  too  much 

Na  fayc  chi  /  ate  too  much 

Na  chi  na  faifaye  „ 

Quickly 

Kada  ka  dedi  ka  yi  hanzeri  Do  not  delay,  make  haste 

En  ka  komo  da  samli  em  baka     //  you  come  back  quickly  I   will 
lada  give  you  a  reward 


179 


Like  as.     (See  "  kama  ") 
By  Reduplication 


Kare  kare 

Bawa-bawa 

Sarki  sarki 

Ya  bada  keauta  sarki-sarki 


Like  a  dog 

Like  a  slave 

Like  a  king 

He  presented  the  gift  like  a  king 


I,  ii 

E,  eye  (K) 
Owo  (Zanf) 
Naam 

Ai 

Ashe 

Labadda 

Hakika 

Gaskia  ne 

To 

Aa 

La,  la  la 


Ba  .  .  .  ba 
Babu  (  =  ba-abu) 


4.  ADVERBS 

Of  Affirmation  and  Negation 

yes 
yes 
yes 
yes.  Only  used  in  answer  to  a  roll  call  or 

summons.     Means  "  I  am  here  " 
really 
truly 
certainly,  no  doubt 


It  is  true 

all  right 

no.     Instead  of  a  single  word  reply  simple 

sentences  are  often  preferred. 
No  (Arabic).    Used  as  an  exclamatory  "  No  " 

rather   than    negativing   another   person's 

statement. 
not 
no,  not,  without  (prep.) 

Examples  of  use  of  "  ba  " 


ya  ta 
Ba  ka  ji  ba  ? 
Ban  sani  ba 

Ba  ni  da  komi  da  ni  ko  ba  su 
Ba  daia  da  kiba 
Ba  kowa  da  ya  zaka  nana  ? 
Ba  namu  ba  nc 

Kad"  Allah  kashc  ka  ba  mumuni 
ba 

Baba-n-da    ba    wuri    yaro     ne 

(prov.) 
Jini  ba  ya  magani-n-kishirua  ba 

(proverb) 


He  did  not  go 

Do  you  not  hear  (understand) 

I  do  not  know 

I  have  nothing  to  give  them 

Not  one  was  fat 

Has  no  one  come  here 

It  is  not  ours 

Lest  Ood  slay  thee  because  of  thy 

unbelief.  (Lit.,  You  not  a  believer) 

(poet.) 
The  big  man  who  is  penniless  if  a 

boy  (ba  wuri = not  a  cowry) 
Blood  is  not  a  cure  for  thirst 


180  THE    HAUSA   LANGUAGE 

Fadawa  sunka  che,  la,  ba  ka  ba     The  councillors  said,  No,  do  not 

shi  give  it  him 

Ba  abinda  zan  chi  There  is  nothing  for  me  to  eat 

11  Ba "    is    sometimes    used    as    a    negative    form    of 
interrogation — 

Ka  ji  ba  ?  Do  you  not  hear  ? 

Sometimes  one  "  ba "  is  omitted,  especially  if  several 
co-ordinate  sentences  follow  each  other — 

Ba  ni  da  kurdi,  ba  ni  da  karifi  ba     //  /  have  no  money  I  am  powerless 


Babu 

With  pronouns  is  often  interchangeable  with  "ba" 

Babu  komi  or  ba  komi  ba  Nothing  at  all 

Ba  kowa  or  babu  kowa  Nobody 

Babu  kowa  da  ya  yirda  da  shi  There  is  no  one  who  believed  in  him 

Babu  nisa  Not  far 

Babu  ruanka  (idiom)  It  does  not  concern  you 

Babu  abinda  kana  iya  yi  There  is  nothing  you  can  do 

Babu  maitafia  ga  rijia  da  dcre  No  one  goes  to  the  well  at  night 

Babu  mutum  da  ya  taya  masa  No  one  helped  him 

Ba  abinda  babu  There  is  nothing  short 

Babu    daiansu    or    babu     daia  Not  one  of  them 

chikinsu 

Da  babu  wawa  gara   da   wawa  It   is   better   to   own   a  fool    than 

(proverb)  nothing 

Komi  ya  bache  hankuri  a  babu  Everything      goes      wrong      where 

or  ne  babu  (proverb)  patience  is  wanting 

Don  babu  na  uwansu  chiki  Because  their  mother's  (food)  was 

not  amongst  the  other  (dishes  of 
food) 

Example  of  "  babu  "  for  "  ba"  with  Verb 

Sariki  nan  babu  shi  da  da  That  king  had  no  son 

En  ka  tafi  babu  ina  gaferta  maka  //  you  go  I  will  not  pardon  you 

Munche  masu,  mu  babu  zamu  We  said  to  them,  We  will  not  drink 

sha  nono  wurinku  milk  with  you 


ADVERB 


181 


5.  INTERROGATIVE  ADVERBS 

Kaka  ?  (K)  How  ?  In  what  manner  ?  This  word  is 

not  coupled  with  other  adverbs  as  in  the 
English  phrases,  "  How  far  ?  "  "  How 
soon  ? " 

How? 

When  ? 

Since  when  ? 

What  time  ? 

How  many  ?     How  much  ? 

Why  ?     On  account  of  what  ? 

Why  ?     On  account  of  what  ? 

Not  ?  (See  under  Affirmative  and  Negative 
adverbs.) 

Where  ? 

Whence  ? 


Aa?   (S) 

Yaushe  ? 

Tun  yaushe  ? 

Wani  lokachi  ? 

Nawa  ? 

Domi  ?  (  =  do-n-mi) 

Gari-n-mi  ? 

Ba? 

Enna  ? 
Daga  enna  ? 


Kaka,  Aa 


Kaka  ka  ke  ?     Kaka  ki  ke  ? 

Kaka  iyalinka  ? 

Kaka  sunanka  ? 

Da  kaka  zaka  tafia  yaki  babu 

fadawa  ? 
Ka  gani    kaka   su   yi    gina    ga 

kalkashi-n-kasa  ? 

Kaka   zan  yi   en  sami  wannan 
mashi  ? 


How  are  you  ?  (m.  or  f.) 

How  is  your  family  ? 

What  is  your  name  ? 

And  how  will  you  go  to  war  with 

no  officers? 
Do   you   see   how  they  dig   under 

ground?     (Kaka  is  not  directly 

interrogative  here.) 
How  shall  I  be  able  to  find  this 

spear  ? 


Yaushe  (usually  with  present  and  future) 


Yaushe  ka  zo  nan  ? 
Yaushe  sariki  shina  gida  ? 
Yaushe  zamu  tafia  ? 


When  did  you  come  here  ? 
When  will  the  chief  be  at  home  ? 
When  shall  we  go  ? 


Tunyaushe 

Tunyausho  barao  ya  beri  gari  ?      Sincewhenhas  the  thief  left  the  town  ? 
Wani  lokachi  ?  also  wani  saa  ?  wani  lotu  ? 


Wani   lokachi    zaayenka 
kasua  kuma 


Yaro  nan  shekarunsa  nawa  ? 
Nawa  shekaru-n-doki-n-nan  ? 
Guda  nawa  ? 


What  time  will  they  kill  a  cow  in 
the  market  again? 


Nawa 


How  old  is  this  boy  ? 
How  old  is  this  horse  ? 
How  many  ? 


182 


THE    HAUSA   LANGUAGE 


Nawa  nawa  ? 

Kwoi  guda  nawa  na  sayerua  ne  ? 

Nawa  nawa  anasayerua  ? 

Nawa  anasayesda  su  ? 

Ku  nawa  kuka  tafi  wuri-n-sata  ? 


How  much  each  ? 

How  many  eggs  are  there  for  sale  ? 
How  much  are  they  sold  for  each  ? 
How  much  are  they  all  ? 
How  many  of  you  went  to  the  place 
where  the  theft  took  place  ? 


Domi  ka  che  haka  ? 
Domi  ka  zo  ? 


Gari-n-mi  sunka  bache  ? 


Domi,  don  mi 

Why  do  you  say  so  ? 
Why  have  you  come  ? 

Garinmi 

Why  are  they  lost  ? 


Enna  ? 


Enna  shi  ke  ?     Enna  ta  ke  ? 

Daga  enna  kun  tafo  ? 

Enna  ka  fito  ? 

Enna  hankalinka  ? 

Enna  danka  ? 

Enna  zaka  ? 

Enna  ka  ke  ? 

Enna  kana  zamne  ? 

Enna  hainya-r-gida  ? 

Enna     marabi  -  n  -  wannan     da 

wanchan  ? 

Babu  marabi  tsakaninsu 
Ka  tambayesa,  Enna  uwasa  ? 
Enna  sunanka  ( =  kaka  sunanka) 
Enna  ruanka  da  wannan  ? 
Enna  azenchi-n-wannan  ? 


Where  is  he  ?     Where  is  she  ? 

Where  have  you  come  from  ? 

Where  have  you  come  from  ? 

Where  is  your  sense  ? 

Where  is  your  son  ? 

Where  are  you  going  ? 

Where  are  you  ? 

Where  are  you  staying  ? 

Which  is  the  way  home  ? 

What  is  the  difference  between  this 

and  that  ? 

There  is  no  difference  between  them 
Ask  him  where  his  mother  is  ? 
What  is  your  name  ? 
What  have  you  got  to  do  with  that  ? 
What  does  this  mean  ? 


For  Adverbs.     Interrog. 
How 

Besides   being    translated   by    "  nawa "    or   "  kamada "    various 
circumlocutions  are  necessary  to  represent  this  English  word — 


Daga  Kano  zua  Katsina  na  da 

nisa  ? 
Daga  nan  kingi-n-mu  (or,  saura- 

n-mu)  nawa  mu  issa  Kwara  ? 


Is  it  far  from  Kano  to  Katsina  ? 

How  long  before  we  reach  the 
Kwara  (Niger)?  How  many  weeks 
before  .  ,  . 


CHAPTER   VII 


PREPOSITIONS 
SIMPLE  PREPOSITIONS 


A(K) 

Da 

Ga 

Gare 

Har  (K),  hal  (S) 

Ma 

Wa  (K) 

Na  (m.)  n' 

Ta  (f.)  t,  1,  r 

Sai 


at,  on 

with 

to 

towards 

up  to,  until  (also  adverb) 

to 

to 

°ft 
of 

except  (also  adverb) 


COMPOUND  PREPOSITIONS 

Formed  from  a  noun  or  verbal  noun  with  the  preposition 
"  of "  varying  according  to  the  gender  of  the  foregoing. 
Very  commonly  the  masculine  form  "n"  is  used  for  the 
feminine  "t,"  "1,"  or  "r"  for  euphony.  The  copulative 
may  also  be  entirely  omitted,  as  is  often  the  case  with 
nouns  not  used  with  a  prepositional  force,  the  two  thus 
standing  in  apposition. 


Do-n-  (K) 

Domi-n-  (S) 

Gari-n-  (Zanf) 

Zua-r-  (more  commonly  Zua-n-) 
1  Kai-n-  (kan) 
1  Bisa-r-  (also  bisa-n-) 
1  Kasa-n- 

Kalkashi-n- 


on  account  of  (verb  do  —  "  dauka," 

"  doka,"  to  take 
on  account  of 
on  account  of 

towards.     ("Zua  "  =  coming) 
on  top  of 
on  top  of 
under,  bottom  of 


1  A=ow,  may  or  may  not  be  prefixed  to  these. 
183 


184  THE    HAUSA   LANGUAGE 

1  Gaba-n-  in  front  of 

1  Baya-n-  behind 

Tsaka-r-  (also  tsaka-n-)  in  middle  of 

Tsakani-n-  between 

1  Chiki-n-  in 

1  Woje-n-  beside,  outside  of,  towards 

Shiya-1-  (S)  „ 

Abaki-n-  in  exchange  for 

Kama-r-  (Kama-n-)  like 

Kusa-r-  (kusa-n-)  near.     See  also  ".  Kusa  da  " 

Gu-n-  to,  at  the  place  of 
1  Wuri-n-  „ 

Bigiri-n-  (K)  instead  of 

Gurbi-n-  (Zanf)  „ 

Maimaki-n-  (S)  „ 

Tamka-r-  like 

Batu-n-  with  reference  to 

Kafi-n-  before 

Compound  Prepositions  formed  with  "  da,"  with 

Barn-da  different  from 

Dabara  da  in  front  of  and  near  one  another 

Daura  da  „ 

Garni  da  together  with 

Kusa  da  near  to 

Tare  da  together  with 

Saba-da  on  account  of 

Other  Compound  Prepositions 
Daga  from 

This  preposition  can  be  combined  with  many  others,  as, 
"  Daga  chikin  "  for  "  chikin,"  etc.,  etc. 

A,  at,  on 

Muka  beri  kaya-mu  a  wani  gari  We  have  left  our  loads  at  another 

town 

Tafia  a  hankali  Slow  travelling 

Ahmadu  ya  sarnu  miki  a  hauu-  Ahmadu  has  a  boil  on   his  right 

n-dama  hand 

Tun  a  mafari  akoi  Allah  God  has  been  since  the  beginning 

Da  sunka    ketare   daia,   biu,   a  When  they  had  crossed  one,  two,  at 

na-uku  sunka  issa  wuri-n-kasa         the  third  they  reached  dry  land 

Mi  ku  ke  yi  a-nan  What  are  you  doing  there  ? 

1  A— on,  may  or  may  not  be  prefixed  to  these. 


PREPOSITIONS  185 

Azaba-1-allahu  a   rana-1-lakhira     The  pains  of  Ood  on  the  day  of 

judgment 

Na  tura  mutum  a  rua  7  pushed  the  man  into  the  water 

Ya  fadi  a  rua  He  fell  into  the  water 

Ya  fada  rua  (Robinson)  He  flung  himself  into  the  water 

Halbi  a   wutsia  ya    fi   kuskure     To  hit  the  tail  is  better  than  to  miss 

(proverb) 

Ya  fi  su  duka  a  dauka-n-kaya        He  was  better  than  they  all  in  carry- 
ing a  load 

Ya  koma  a  chan  a  Bornu  He  returned  yonder  to  Bornu 

Da  ankasheka  a  banza  You   would   have   been   killed   for 

nothing 

Da,  with.     Also  by,  of,  etc. 
Instrument 

Ya  buge  shi  da  bulala  He  beat  him  with  a  whip 

Ya  yenke  shi  da  wuka  He  cut  it  with  a  knife 

Ka  chika  shi  da  rua  Fill  it  with  water 

Accompaniment 

Tafi  da  shi  Take  him  away  or  go  with  him 

Ya  zo  da  shi  He  brought  him  or  came  with  him 

Sun  saidani  da  kelowi  They  sold  me  to  the  Kelowi,  i.e., 

they  traded  me  with  the  Kelowi 

Possession  (see  also  under  auxiliary  verb) 

Suna  da  bindiga  They  have  a  gun 

Ba  mu  da  abinchi  We  have  no  food 

Ina  da  shi  and  Ni  ke  da  shi  /  have  it 

En  ba  ka  da  da,  ba  ka  da  favi-  //  you  have  no  son  you  have  no 

n-chiki  happiness 

Ina  da  kafa  (idiomatic)  7  have  a  (bad)  leg 

Manner 

Tafo  da  gudu  Come  quickly,  i.e.,  come  running 

Da  mi  akanyi  su  ?  Of  what  are  they  made  ? 

Miscellaneous  other  Examples 

Ta  fada  mani  da  Hausa  She  told  me  in  Hausa 

Mine  da  Engliz  ?  What  is  it  in  English  ? 

Na  gaji  da  sukua  bisa  lakuini  7  was  tired  of  riding  on  the  camel 

Ka  yi  hankali  da  dunia  Be  careful  of  the  world 

Suna  fada  da  mutane  chiki-n-  They  were  fighting  with  the  people 

kasua  in  the  market 

Ka  gai  mani  da  ubanka  Salute  your  father  for  me 


186  THE    HAUSA   LANGUAGE 

Da  dadi-n-chi  Nice  to  eat 

Sun  kira  ni  da  sunana,  or,  sun  yi     They  catted  me  by  my  name 

kirana 
Sai  da  nono-n-mache  anasayensa     Only  for  the  breast  of  a  woman  is 

it  to  be  sold 
Da  babu  wawa  gara   da   wawa     Eather  than  to  be  without  (even)  a 

(proverb)  fool,  it  is  better  to  have  a  fool 

(with  you) 

Ya  che  da  shi  He  said  to  him 

Na  lura  da  halinka  I  will  look  into  your  character 

Ku  yi  kama  da  sariki  You  are  just  like  the  king 

Ya  komo  da  baya  He  returned  back 

Ban  sani  da  guba  a  chiki  ba  I   did   not    know   that    there    was 

"guba"  poison  in  it 

Ka  yi  murna  da  gani-n-ubanka  ?     Are  you  pleased  to  see  your  father  ? 
Kare  ka  mutu  da  haushi-n-kura     Dog,  you  will  die  of  hatred  to  the 

(proverb)  hyaena 

Ina  murna  da  ganinka  /  am  pleased  to  see  you 

Da  is  used  instead  of  daga 

Kudu  da  Kukawa  South  of  Kukawa 

Gabas  da  rua  sunansa  Shari  East  of  the  river  called  Shari 

Da  is  used  in  comparative  statements 

Yao  mun  fi  na  jia  da  biu  To-day  we  have  (done)  more  (than) 

[of]  yesterday  by  two 

Nasa  ya  fi  nawa  da  shidda          •     His  exceeds  mine  by  six 
Ya  fini  da  keao  He  was  more  beautiful  than  I 

Na  fiso  wannan  da  wannan  /  prefer  this  to  that 

"  Da  "  is  used  with  nouns  to  make  adjectives  and  adverbs,  as — 
Da  hankali  careful  or  carefully 

Ga,  to,  etc. 

It  is  found  in  company  with  other  prepositions,  as  "  bisa  ga," 
"  baya  ga,"  etc. 

Motion 

Sun  tafi  ga  wani  gari  They  went  to  another  town 

Simple  Dative 

Ya  fadi  ga  sariki  He  said  to  the  chief 

Ya  fadi  ga  shi  He  said  to    him.     (More  usual — 

"  ma  ") 


PREPOSITIONS 


187 


Ga    maidauka  -  n  -  kaya  tafia  a 

hankali  ta  ii  dadi 
Ya   zama  sanane  ga   duka  -  n  - 

mazamna  a  Kuddus 


To  the  carrier  to  travel  slowly  is 
more  pleasant 

It  became  known  to  all  the  in- 
habitants of  Jerusalem 


Tafi  ka  fada  Allah 


Ga  "  omitted 

Go  and  tell  God 


On,  at 


Ga  rana  aljima 

Ya  che,  ga  chiki-n-gulbi 

Gulbi-n-nan  shi  kan  kaffe  garani 

Yana  (or  shina)  da  karifi  ga  duka 
Doki  shina  tsaye  ga  hainya 
En  mun  issa  ga  wani  wuri  enda 
akoi  chiawa   mu    kan   yenka 
mu  dora  ga  baya-n-  rakuma 
Ba  mu  dade  ba  ga  gari  nan 


On  Friday 

She  said,  in  the  river 

This   river   generally  dries  up   in 

dry  season 

He  is  stronger  than  all 
The  horse  is  standing  in  the  road 
When  we  came  to  some  place  where 
there  was  grass,  we  used  to  cut  it 
and  tie  it  on  our  camels'  backs 
We  did  not  delay  at  that  town 

Of 

Ga  mi  ?  Of  what  ? 

Ga  hakarikari  na  jiki-n-Adamu      Of  the  ribs  of  Adam's  body 

Wache  ga  chikinmu  ?  Which  of  us  (f.)  ? 

Purpose 

Mata  sunka  tafi  rijia  ga  dauka-     The  women  have  gone  'to  the  well  to 

n-rua  draw  water 

Muka  yi  shiri  ga  zua  Gushiba          We  made  ready  to  go  to  Gushiba 

By 

Na  ishe  shaifu  Usman  asoye  ga     /  met  the  Sheikh  Othman  beloved  of 
Filani  the  Fulas 


From 

Wannan  na  ji  ga  yaro  da  shina     /   heard   this  from    the    boy   that 
ji  magana-m-Bornu  speaks  Bornuese 

The  preposition  is  omitted  when  the  name  of  a  town  is  mentioned 
and  in  a  few  other  cases — 


Ya  tafi  Kano 
Tafi  gida 
Ya  tafi  gari 
Ya  komo  kasua 


He  went  to  Kano 

Go  home 

He  has  gone  to  the  town 

He  has  come  back  to  the  market 


188 


THE    HAUSA    LANGUAGE 


Gare 
Only  used  before  pronouns 


Tafi  gareshi 
Daga  garesu 
Kusa  gareku 

Mutume-n-nan  fari-n-jiki  gare-i 
Su  saye  su  gareku 
Bature  nan,  shi  ne  za-abashieka 
garesa 


Oo  to  him 
From  them    • 
Near  you 

This  man  is  popular 
They  buy  them  from  you 
This  is  the  white  man  to  whom  you 
will  be  given 


Ear,  to  (see  also  adverbs) 


Na  sa  mutume-n-nan  aboki-n- 
tafia  -  r  -  ku,  shi  kai  ku  har 
birni-n-Kano  lafia 


/  appoint  this  man  your  travelling 
companion,  he  will  take  you  as 
far  as  the  city  of  Kano  in  safety 


NOTE  — "  Birni  Kano  "  is  also  found,  the  two  nouns  being  in  apposition. 


Ma,  to,  for 
"  Ma  "  may  become  "  mi  "  or  "  mu  "  for  euphony  (S) 


Ya  fada  mani 

Ya  fada   maka   (m.) ;    maki  or 

miki  (f.) 

Ya  fada  masa,  mashi,  mishi,  mai 
Ya  fada  in  at  a 

Ya  fada  mamu,  mumu,  muna 
Ya  fada  maku,  rnuku 
Ya  fada  masu,  musu 
Ya  fada  ma  sariki 
Na  gode  maka 
Kawo  mani  rua  en  sha 
Ya  gaya  mani  labari 
Kada  ka  fada  ma  kowa  labari 


He  said  to  me 
He  said  to  you 

He.  said  to  him 

He  said  to  her 

He  said  to  us 

He  said  to  you 

He  said  to  them 

He  said  to  the  chief 

I  thank  you  (formal) 

Bring  me  water  to  drink 

He  told  me  the  news 

Do  not  tell  any  one  the  news 


Meaning  "  for" 


Ka  rike  mani 

Na  dakanta  ma  sariki 

Ka  yi  mani  shimfida-r-gado 

Ka  gai  mani  da  abokinka 

Kawo  mani  doki 


Hold  (it)  for  me 
I  waited  for  the  chief 
Spread  my  bed  for  me 
Salute  your  friend  for  me 
Bring  my  horse 


Akadaurawa  masa  dawaki  surdi     They  were  saddling  the  horses  for 

him 


PREPOSITIONS  189 

Of 

Bature  ya  kashe  masu  mutum  The  while  man  killed  many  of  them 

tari  da  doki  with  their  horses 

Sun  kashe  ma  Turawa  mutane  They  killed  of  the  Arabs  many  men 
tari 

Achikin  wani  gari  anache  masa  In  a  certain  town  called  Danga- 

Dangagarra  garra 

From 

Ta  bida  masa  mdgani  She  sought  medicine  from  them 

Wa 

This  is  probably  another  form  of  "  ga  "  ;  compare  "  guri " 
for  "  wuri." 

Only  used  before  nouns,  not  before  personal  pronouns, 
and  usually  with  verbs  to  tell  (K) — 

Na  dakanta  wa  sariki  I  waited  for  the  chief 

Kada  ka  gaya  wa  kowa  Do  not  tell  anyone 

Ya  yenke  wa  sariki  kune  He  cut  off  the  chiefs  ear 

Kafa-r-wani   ba  ta  yi  wa  wani  The  foot  of  one  man  cannot  walk 

tafia  (prov.)  for  another 

Suka  saiyo  wa  dumma  nan  baiwa  They  bought  a  slave  for  the  pumpkin 


Na(n;   or  d,  m  for  n)  (m.)  -\ 

Ta  (t ;  or  1,  r  for  t)  (f.),  and  modified  often  to  any  letter  of  the  I  of 
alphabet  which  may  begin  the  following  word  J 

This  preposition  is  of  two  genders,  and  that  form  is  used 
which  agrees  with  the  gender  of  the  first  word.  If,  however, 
the  first  word  is  plural,  the  masculine  form  is  used. 

When  the  short  form  is  used,  which  is  generally  the  case, 
it  is  enclitic  to  the  first  word  in  enunciation  but  not  in 
meaning.1 

Da-n-sariki  (dan  sariki)  The  chiefs  son 

Ya-1-sariki  (S)  The  chiefs  daughter 
Ya-r-sariki  (K)  ,, 

Ya-t-sariki  ,, 

1  In  ordinary  text  the  "  n,"  etc.  is  written  as  part  of  the  first 
word.  This  work,  however,  being  a  grammar,  it  is  necessary  to 
distinguish  it  clearly,  and  so  it  is  joined  with  hyphens  to  each  word 
it  connects. 


190  THE    HAUSA   LANGUAGE 

Yaya-n-sariki  The  chiefs  children 

Yarinia-t-sariki  The  chief's  girl 

Mata-r-sariki  The  chief's  wife 

Mata-n-gari  The  women  of  the  town 

Mata-n-sa  (for  mata  tasa  His  wife 

Aboki-n-tafia-ta  My  travelling  companion 

Da-n-uwansa  His  brother  (because  "  danuwa  " 

is  masc.) 

Da  matansa  saura  shi  daia  And  of  his  women  (wives)  there 

was  left  one  to  him 

Sarari-d-dunia  (rare).     (Poetic)  The  plain  of  the  earth 

Daki-d-dunia  (rare).     (Poetic)  The  house  of  the  world  ( =  the  world) 

Wuta-1-kiama.     (Poetic)  The  fire  of  the  day  of  judgment 

Ra-1-kiama.     (Poetic)  The  day  of  judgment 

"N"  is  joined  to  many  nouns  to  make  prepositions,  as, 
"  wuri-n,"  "  kai-n,"  "  chiki-n,"  of  which  examples  are  given 
later. 

It  is  used  when  adjectives  precede  the  noun,  thereby 
making  them  in  reality  nouns. 

Baba-1-kaza  for  kaza  baba  A  big  fowl 

As  "baba"  ends  in  "a"  it  has  to  be  treated  as  a 
feminine  word.  When,  however,  the  second  word  is  one 
of  importance,  especially  a  person,  it  seems  to  have  a 
dominating  effect  upon  the  preposition ;  so — 

Baba-n-sariki  The  big  chief 

Baba-n-rago  The  big  ram 

Also — 

Sabo-n-wata  New  moon 

Shashi-n-  garina  zani  bashi  /   will   give   him   the   half  of  my 

kingdom 
Allah  shi  baka  yawa-n-rai  May  God  give  you  a  long  life 

11  Yawa-r-rai "  is  also  found,  and  is  correct,  as  "  yawa  "  is 
a  feminine  word ;  it  is  less  frequently  heard,  however,  not 
being  so  euphonious. 

The  long  form  is  used  (1)  in  poetry,  (2)  when  "na" 
is  the  first  word  in  the  sentence,  (3)  when  a  pronoun 
intervenes,  (4)  with  the  cardinal  numerals  to  form  the 
ordinal,  (5)  for  emphasis  or  clearness,  and  (6)  when  the 
previous  word  is  not  a  noun — 

Namu  ne  It  is  ours 

Na  sariki  ne  It  is  the  chiefs 


PREPOSITIONS 


191 


A  kafata  ta  hagun  ina  da  kur- 

kunu 

Na  biu  (m.),  ta-biu  (f.) 
Na-baya  (m.),  ta-baya  (f.) 
Na-bisa  ya  fi  na-kasa  riba 

Mu  je  kasua  ta  Zerma 

Ya  wo  gaiya  ta  yaki 

Ko  gida-n-sariki  ko  na  talaka 

Allah    ka    bani    haifua    ko    ta 

dumrna 
Ba  shi  da  chin  yao,  ba  shi  da 

na  gobe 


In  my  left   leg   I   have   a  guinea 

worm 
The  second 
The  last 
The  person  above  has  the  advantage 

over  the  one  beneath 
We  went  to  the  market  of  Zerma 
He  made  a  war  camp 
Whether  it  be  the  house  of  a  chief 

or  of  a  poor  man 
God,  grant  that  I  bear  something, 

even  a  gourd 
He  has  nothing  to  eat  to-day  and 

nothing  to-morrow 


Compound  Nouns 

Quasi  compound  nouns  are  made  witjh  the  use  of  this 
preposition — 


Kada-n-gari 
Aboki-n-gaba 


Lizard,  i.e.,  crocodile  of  the  town 
Enemy,  i.e.,  friend  of  the  front 


In  the  following  examples  there  is  rather  a  different 
idiom  from  the  English — 


Ba  ni  iyansa  ba 

Muna  iyansu 

Ba  na  ji-n-tsoronsa 

En  tali  sha-n-rua 

Ka  aiko  muna  wotika  kaka  suna 
yi-n-gerdamanka,  da  kai  kana 
gerdamansu  har  ka  kasho  su 


/  am  not  equal  to  the  doing  of  it 
We  are  able  to  do  it 
I  am  not  afraid  of  him 
That  I  may  go  to  drink  water 
You  send  us  a  letter  (to  say)  how 
they  dispute  with  you,  and  how 
you  also  dispute  with  them  until 
you  have  convinced  them 


The  following  use  of  "  na  "  as  a  substitute  for  the  verb 
"  to  be "  in  English  is  very  idiomatic.  In  the  second 
example  this  usage  is  partly  abolished  and  a  reversal 
made  to  a  verb,  with  the  result  that  the  subject  that 
begins  the  sentence  is  replaced  by  another — 

Hauka-r-kaza  amre-n-musuru  It  is  madness  for  a  fowl  to  marry  a 

cat.  Lit.,  Madness  of  fowl, 
marriage  of  cat 

Karambuni  -  n  -  akwia  ta  gaida  It  is  forward  for  a  goat  to  greet  a 
kura  hycena.  Lit.,  Forwardness  of 

goat,  she  greets  the  hycena 


192  THE   HAUSA    LANGUAGE 

If  this  proverb  were  formed  like  the  preceding,  for  "ta 
gaida  kura  "  there  would  be  "  gaisua-r-kura."  "  Karam- 
bani,"  which  begins  the  sentence,  is  not  continued  with, 
and  "  ta  "  pertains  to  "  akwia  " — 

Gaskianki  You  have  spoken  the  truth 

Kariansu  They  have  lied 

"Na"  is  sometimes  found  instead  of  "shina."  See 
under  personal  pronouns. 

Examples  of"of"  omitted 

Lafia  jiki  arziki  ne  Health  of  the  body  is  prosperity 

Laifi  baba  rowa,  laifi  yaro  kiawa     The  fault  of  age  is  meanness,  the 

fault  of  youth  is  laziness 
Gida  biu  magani  gobara  (prov.)     Two  houses  are  a  remedy  against 

fire 

Yanmata  gidanmu  da  fari  baki.     The  daughters  of  our  house  have 
Taberia  a    white    mouth.       Fufu  -  slick. 

(Riddle.)  The  fufu-stick  being 
in  constant  use  with  pounding 
corn  has  always  its  end  whitened 

Ba  su  chi  abinchi  kowa  ba  They  do  not  eat  the  food  of  any  one 

Ku  mutane  yamma  You  men  of  the  west 

Mutane  zina  Adulterers 

Kwana-mu  goma  muna  tafia  We  have  been  travelling  ten  days 

Muka  beri  kaya-mu  We  have  left  our  loads 

This  seems  to  be  commonly  so  when  final  "  a  "  is  long — 

Shi  fishe  mu  aiki  mutane  zina        He  separates  us  from  the  work  of 

adulterers 

Examples  of  use  of  Masc.  for  Fern. 

Uwansu  Their  mother 

Uwan  matansa  Mother  of  his  wife 

Zuchiansa  ya  yi  biu  He  was  in  doubt 

Dere  rigan  mugu  Night  is  a  cloak  for  the  evil  man 

It  is  commonly  found  that  when  there  is  a  series  of 
linked  nouns,  some  have  the  copulative  and  others  stand 
in  apposition,  usually  alternately — 

Zani  gurin  dia  sariki  /  will  go  to  the  place  of  the  daughter 

of  the  king 
Sunan  sariki  garin  Wandara  The  name  of  the  chief  of  the  country 

of  Wandara 


PREPOSITIONS  193 

The  following  is  an  example  of  the  use  of  the  particle 
"mai"  as  a  substitute  for  "na"- 

Ta  zo  kusa  da  wani  gida  mai-     She   came   near    a   certain    goat's 
awaki  house 

Sai,  except  (see  also  adverbs).     Pronounced  "  se  "  (say) 

Sai  wannan  Only  this 

Sai  lafia  Only  health,  i.e.,  quite  well 

Shi  kua  dan  sariki  nan  ba  shi  And   he    the    chiefs    son  had   no 
da  wani  chiniki  sai  sha-n-gia  other  business  but  to  drink  beer 

Don  (K),  Aomin  (S),  garin  (Zanf).     See  also  conjunctions 

This  preposition  takes  either  a  direct  object  or  a  sentence 
in  lieu — 

Don  bawa  daia  sun  yi  yaki  On  account  of  one  slave  they  mad 

war 

Ya  ragu  don  kainsa  It  is  diminished  of  itself 

Ya  taf o  wurina  don  gaishe  ni          He  came  to  me  to  salute  me  (because 

of  saluting  me) 
Riki   karenka   don   kare-n-wani     Hold  your  dog  on  account  of  the 

(prov.)  other  man's  dog 

Mahmadu  ya  dauki  kaya  guda     Mahmadu  has  taken  one  load  for 
don  kansa  himself 

Domin 

Na    je    Kano     domi-n-gani-n-  I  went  to  Kano  to  see  my  friend 

abokina 

Domin  hakanan  On  account  of  this 

Ya  che  do-n-mi  bai  yi  aure  ba  ?  He  said  why  is  he  not  married? 

Domi-n-shina  mutum  kirki  Because  he  is  a  virtuous  man 

Kuka  da  na  yi  domin  ganinka  The  cry  I  made  in  order  to  see  you 

Domin  mi  ?  What  for  ? 

Garin  (see  also  interrogative  adverbs) 

Ya  tafi  gari  gari-n-saye-n-nama      He  went  to  the  town  to  buy  meat 
Ya  tafi  gari-n-yawo  He  has  gone  to  take  a  walk 

Zua-r  or  ya  zua  (  =  he  is  coming)  or  zua  ga,  to 

Sun  tafi  zua-r-Kano  They  went  to  Kano 

Sun  tafi  ya  zua  Kano  They  went  to  Kano 

Muna  godia  zua  ga  Allah  We  give  thanks  to  God 

Hal  ya  zua  yanzu  Until  now 

Na  komo  zua-r-gidana  /  came  back  home 


194  THE    HAUSA   LANGUAGE 

Ya  tafi  zua-r-gabas  He  went  east 

Zua-r-mutua-r-Ahmedu    ya    yi  On  the  death  of  Ahmedu  he  became 

sarki  King 

Daga  Kano  zua-r-Katsina  na  da  Is  it  far  from  Kano  to  Katsina  ? 

nisa  ? 

In  the  foregoing  the  "r"  is  very  commonly  omitted 
after  <;zua."  Its  existence  is,  however,  supported  by  the 
alternate  rendering  of  "ga." 

Kai-n,  kan,  on  top  of 

Doki  shina  tsaye  kan  (or  akan)  The  horse  is  standing  in  the  road 

hainya 

Muka  gamu  da  shi  kai-n-hainya  We  met  him  in  the  road 

Sa  tukunia  kain  wuta  Put  the  pot  on  the  fire 

Joined  with  other  prepositions 
Bisa-r-ka-n-doki/or  a  kai-n-doki     On  horseback 

=  0n  the  subject  of 

Akain  mi  ku  ke  zanche  ?  What  are  you  talking  about  ? 

Manzani  -  n  -  Allah   suna    waazi  The  messengers  are  talking  about 

akan  atuba  da  beri-n-zunufi  repentance  and  forsaking  sin 

Ya  sa  dan  uwansa  akain  abo-  He  puts  his  brother  before  all  his 

kainsa  duka  friends 

Ya  bani  wannan  kain  alkawali  He   gave   me   this   according   to   a 

da  ya  yi  mani  da  promise  he  made  me  long  ago 

Dan  sariki  ya  yi  fada  da  sariki  The  young  chief  fought   with   the 

akan  sarauta  chief  over  the  kingdom 

Bisa-r,  also  bisa-n  or  bisa  alone 

Doki  shina  tsaye  bisa-r-hainya  The  horse  is  standing  in  the  road 

Yara   duka    sun    tuma    bisa-r-  All  the  boys  jumped  up  on  their 

kujerinsu  chairs 

Lokachinda   anadaukanka   bisa  When  you  are  carried  on  a  man's 

kai  head  (as  a  corpse) 

Shimfida  tufa  bisanta  Spread  the  cloth  on  it 

Kana  bisana  You  are  on  top  of  me 

With  ga 

Gidansu  bis'  ga  ishi  Their  houses  upon  posts 

Ya  kwanta  bisa  ga  gadona  He  slept  on  my  bed 

With  other  prepositions 
Ya  sabko  daga  bisa-r-kai-n-doki     He  got  off  his  horse 


PREPOSITIONS  195 

Meaning  "  concerning  "  or  "  about  " 

Bisa-r-zanche-n-uan  Concerning  this  conversation 

Mi  ka  che  bisa  gareni  ?  What  do  you  say  about  me  ? 


Bisa  yerda-n-  Allah  By  the  will  of  God 

Kasa-n,  kalkashi-n,  under,  beneath 

Kada    ka   sa    fitila    kalkashi-n-     Do   not  put   the   lamp   under   the 

maida  table 

Ta  aje  danta  kalkashi-n-itache     She  put  her  son  under  the  tree 
Yaro   ya   fito   daga   kalkashi-n- 

itache 
Ta  tan  har  ga  kalkashi-n-  dusi 

Gaba-n,  in  front  of.     ("  Gaba  "  is  mostly  masculine  gender) 

Ya  tsaya  gabana  He  stands  before  me 

Ya  tsaya  agabanka  He  stands  before  you 

With  other  prepositions 
Ya  tsaya  gaba  ga  kai  (or  gareka)     He  stands  before  you 

Note  also  — 
Shina  gaba  da  Allahu  He  is  opposed  to  God 

Baya-n,  behind,  back  of 

Also  baya  ga,  baya  gare.     "  A  "  can  also  be  prefixed 
Baya  is  mostly  masculine  by  gender 

Baya  na  Behind  me,  my  back 

A  bayana  At  my  back 

Bayansa,  baya  ga  shi  Behind  him  or  in  his  absence 

Ya  tafi  bayan  gari  He  went  outside  the  town 

Ya  tafi  bayan  gida  He   has   gone   to    ease    himself  (a 

polite  form) 

Baya-n-wannan  ba  ya  kara  yi-  After  this  he  denied  no  more 
n-musu  ba 

Daga  baya-n-wannan  After  this 

Karatu  Ar'bi  ya  fi  karatu  duka.  Arabic     literature     is     before     all 

Baya  ga  Ar'bi  Turanshi  ya  fi  literature.      After  Arabic  Euro- 

Bafilashi.    Baya  garesu  Hausa  pean  is  above  the   Fula.     After 

ya  fi  Baribari  them    Hausa    is    above    Bornu 

(literature) 

Shi    ne  gaba   gareni   da    ni    ga  He  is  before  me  and  I  am  behind 

bayansa  him 


196 


THE    HAUSA   LANGUAGE 


Tsaka-r  and  Tsaka-n,  middle  of  (mostly  masculine) 

Tsaka-n-woje  akoi  rijia  There  is  a  well  in  the  middle  of  the 

yard 

Tsaka-n- dere  In  the  middle  of  the  night 

Suka  tafo  tsaka-r-daji  They  came  into  the  middle  of  the 

forest 

Tsakani-n,  between 


Ya  zamna  tsakaninmu 
Amana  ke  tsakaninmu  da  shi 

Tsakani  -  n  -  dakuna    masallachi 

yana  tsaye 

Babu  marabi  tsakaninsu 
Kofofi  -  n  -  Zaria  tsakaninsu   da 

nisa 

Ba  shi  tsakani  gabas  da  kudu 
Domin  babu  gaba  tsakaninmu 

da  ku 
Tsakani  na  da  ubanka  ka  sare 

daga  chikinmu 


He  sat  down  between  us 

There   is  friendship   between   him 

and  me 
Between  the  houses  stands  a  mosque 

There  is  no  difference  between  them 
There  is  a  long  distance   between 

the  gates  of  Zaria 
He  is  not  between  east  and  south 
For  there  is  no  enmity  between  us 
and  you 
Decide  between  me  and  your  father 


Chiki-n,  in 


Chiki-  n-  chikinta 
A  chiki-n-daki 
Chikinsa 

Chiki-n-wata  shawal 
Zani  tafia-r-chiki-n-rua 
Dai  a  chikinsu 

Chiki-n-wannan   lokachi    ka  ke 
mayar  wa  Israila  da  mulki 


In  her  belly 
In  the  hut  or  room 
His  belly  or  inside  it 
In  the  month  Shawal 
I  shall  walk  in  the  water 
One  of  them 

At    this   season   wilt   thou    restore 
to  Israel  their  kingdom 


Joined  with  other  prepositions 


Biu  daga  chikinmu 

Ta  fita  daga  chiki-n-rua 

Ta  che,  ga  chikin  gulbi 

Note  the  following — 
Suna  chikin  dubawa 


Two  of  us 

She  came  out  of  the  water 

She  said,  In  the  river 


Whilst  they  were  looking 


Woje-n,  shiya-l  (S),  beside,  outside,  towards 


Woje-n-gabas,  shiya-1-gabas 

Woje-n-kasa-1-nan 

Ya  waiwaia  wojensa  (or  wurinsa) 

Sun  tafi  wojen  Kano 

Woje-n-ku 

Shina  daga  woje  (adv.) 


Towards  the  east 
Towards  that  land 
He  turned  towards  him 
They  went  Kano-way 
With  you 
He  is  outside 


PREPOSITIONS  197 

Woje-n-nan  On  this  side 

Daga  woje-n-chan  On  that  side 

Ina  tafia  woje  (adv.  and  noun)  /  am  walking  outside 

Woje-n-dama,  woje-n-hauni  On  the  right  side,  on  the  left  side 

Woje-n-dari  da  ashirin  ne  They  were  about  120 

Kama-n,  like  (see  also  adverbs).     Mostly  masculine 

Kama-n-kwana  uku  yatambaya  After  about  three  days  he  asked  the 

mutanc  men 

Yaro  ya  yi  kaman  uwansa  The  boy  is  like  his  mother 

Kaman  dakin  chan  Like  that  house 

Tamka-r,  like.     Also  tamka-n 

Sunyi  ma  sabo-n-malam  tamka-     They  did  to  the  new  mallam  like 
n-tsofo-n-malam  the  old 

Kusa-r,  near.     Also  kusa-n.     See  also  kusa  da 

Ta  kusa  mutua  da  daria  She  nearly  died  of  laughter 

Kusansa  Near  him 

Kusa-n-nan  Near  here 

Wuri-n,  at  the  place  of.     Almost  invariably  used  with  a  person 

Zo  wurina  Come  to  me 

Gudu  wurinsa  Bun  to  him 

Na  zo  wurinka  /  come  to  see  you 

Abinnan  yana  wurina  The  thing  is  with  me 

Ban  che  laifi  yana  wurinka  /  did  not  say  that  the  fault  was  yours 

Alhakinda   ka   dauka   ya  komo  The  sin  you  committed  has  returned 

wurinka  upon  you 

Ansa  wani  wurinsa  Another  was  put  in  his  place 

Ba  ya  bude  ido  ba  tukuna  wuri-  He  is  ignorant  as  regards  religious 

n-karatu  education 

Allahu  ya  bada  dunia  wuri-n-  God    has   given   the   world    to    the 

bature  white  man 

Wanda  kuka  ji  awurina  What  you  heard  from  me 

Ya  koma  wuri-n-ubangiji  Allah  He  returned  to  the  Lord  God 

Ya   ji   kumia    wurin   ubangi  ji  He  felt  ashamed  before  Qod 

Allah 

Na  ji  labarinka  wurin  Mahmadu  /  heard  of  you  from  Mahmadu 

Gu-n   (H)  =  wurin,   which    in   the    northern   dialects   is   sometimes 
found  as  "  guri  " 

Mostly  used  with  a  person 

Zo  guna  (!<>  a,  <  to  me 

Gu-n-chan  Over  there 

Gudu  gunsa  Run  to  him 

A  gun  fure  nan  At  the  place  of  the  flower 


198  THE    HAUSA    LANGUAGE 

Bigiri-n  (K),  Ourbi-n  (Zanf),  Mamaki-n  (S),  instead  of 

Ya  tafi  Kano  bigiri-n- Sokoto          He  went  to  Kano  instead  of  Sokoto 
Ba  ni  rago  gurbi-n-akwia  Give,  me  a  sheep  instead  of  a  goat 

Abaki-n,  in  exchange  for 
Ya  tafi  Kano  baki-n-Sokoto  He  went  to  Kano  instead  of  Sokoto 

Batu-n,  with  reference  to 
Batu-n-mi  ?  With  reference  to  what  ? 


Kafi-n,  before 

Kafi-n-shekara    nawa    goro    shi     In   (before)    how  many  years  does 
ke  yin  yaya  the  Kola  bear 

Bamda,  different  from,  apart  from 

Bam    da   Allah   ba    ni  tsoro-n-  Except  God  I  fear  nothing 

komi 

Bam  da  wannan  ba  ni  da  wani  Except  this  I  have  nothing 

Mi   kana  so  en  sawo  maka  bam  What  do  you  want  me  to  buy  for 

da  shinkafa  you  besides  rice 

Dabara  da,  daura  da,  near  to,  alongside 

Su  tsaya  daura  da  juna  They  stand  alongside  each  other 

Ya  tsaya  dabranka  He  stands  next  beyond  you 

Itache-n-nan  shina  tsaye  dabra-  The  tree  stands  next  to  that  tree 

n-itache-n-nan 

Sai  ga  mutum  biu  daura  da  su  But   two    men    were    standing    by 

atsaye  them 

Garni  da,  together  with 
Derived  from  "  gama,"  to  join,  finish. 

Ya  tube  wandonsa  garni  da  shi      He   took   off   his   trousers    together 

with  it 


Kusa  da,  kusa  gare,  near  to  (see  also  kusa-r) 

Shina  kusana  He  is  near  me 
Shina  kusa  ga  ni  ,, 

Shina  kusa  gareni  „ 

Shina  kusanka  He  is  near  you 


PREPOSITIONS 


199 


Shina  kusa  ga  ka 
Shina  kusa  gareka 
Kusa  ga  gida 


He  is  near  you 
He  is  near  you 
Near  the  house 


Ya  zo  tare  da  ni 


Tare-da,  together  with 
Derived  from  "  tara,"  to  assemble 
He  came  with  me 


Saba  da,  on  account  of 


Na  gode   masa   sabada    keauta 

da  ya  aiko  HIM  ni 
Domin  sabada  tsoro 
Sabada  hakanan 


/   thank   him  for   the   present 

sent  me 
For  fear 
On  account  of  this 


he 


Daga,  from,  at,  etc. 
This  preposition  is  very  commonly  joined  with  others. 


Ya  tafo  daga  Kano 

Ya  tafo  daga  chikin  Kano 

Daga  nan 

Daga  chan 

Daga  nisa 

Daga  Ture 

Daga  garesu 

Daia  daga  chikinsu 

Shina  binsu  daga  baya 

Ya  kubche  daga  hanuna 

Ya  fito  daga  chikin  gari  may  be 

said  for  Ya  fito  gari  simply 
Zomu     ba     shi    kamuwa    daga 

zamne  (prov.) 
Wonga    wochika    ta   fita    daga 

hanu  mallam  Musa 


He  comes  from  Kano 

He  has  come  out  from  Kano 

Here 

There 

From  afar  or  far  (simply) 

In  Europe 

From  them 

One  of  them 

He  follows  them  behind 

It  slipped  from  my  hand 

He  came  from  the  town 

A  hare  is  not  to  be  caught  from 
your  seat,  i.e.,  unless  you  get  up 

This  letter  is  from  the  hand  of 
Mallam  Musa.  (A  common 
beginning  to  a  letter) 

NOTE.  —  "  Wuri-n"  may  be  used  in  the  meaning  of  "from  "  with  verbs 
of  motion.     See  under  "  wurin,'" 


200  THE   HAUSA   LANGUAGE 

OMISSION  OF  PREPOSITIONS 

In  a  great  many  cases  certain  prepositions  are  omitted, 
though  they  are  necessary  in  English. 

Locality.    At,  in 
The  two  nouns  are  then  in  apposition — 

Na  tafi  kasua  Lokoja  da  laasar      /  went  to  the  market  at  Lokoja 

in  the  evening 
Babu  wani  sariki  dunia  There  is  no  other  king  on  the  earth 

("  Sariki  dunia "  is  an  expression  also  meaning  king  of  a  big 
country,  "sariki"  being  chief  of  a  town,  market,  head- 
man, etc.) 

Ba  shi  sama  He  is  not  in  heaven 

Sun  sa  barao  jaru,  ya  mutu  They  put  the  thief  in  gaol,  and  he 

died.    (Jaru  is  probably  a  cor- 
ruption of  the  English  "  gaol  ") 
Yanmata        gidanmu        kulum     The  daughters  of  our  house  always 

wanka.     Moda.     (Riddle)  wash.     A  dipper 

Garinku,    kadan    yaro    ya     yi     In  your  country  when  a  boy  grows 

girima,  minene  anayi  masa  up,  what  is  done  to  him 

Shina  Kano  He  is  at  Kano 

Suka  kwana  jeji  They  slept  in  the  bush 

Time 

Point  of  Time 

Kwanakin-nan  ban  yi  girima  ba  In  those  days  I  was  not  grown  up 

Chiwuta  nan  ba  zata  worike  ba  This  sickness  will  not  heal  in  one 

kwana,  daia  ko  kwana  bial  ba  day,  even  five  are  not  enough 

su  issa  ba 

The  noun  "  saura"  =  remains,  may  be  used. 

Saura  kwana  uku  mun  tashi  or     In  three  days  more  we  shall  start 
kana  mu  tashi 

Period  of  Time 

Kwanarmu  goma  muna  tafia          For  ten  days  we  have  been  travelling 

Omission  of  "  with  " 

Ina  ji-n-haushinsa  /  am  angry  with  him 

"  Without  "  is  rendered  by  "  babu." 

Ba  ka  iya  sayensa  babu  kurdi         You  cannot  buy  it  without  money, 

lit.,  You  cannot  buy  it ;  no  money 


CHAPTER  VIII 
CONJUNCTIONS 

NOTE. — Some  conjunctions  are  often  classed  as  adverbs  and  vice  versa. 

CO-ORDINATING 


Amma,  ainana  (not  colloquial) 

Da 

Da  ...  da 

Da  ...  da 

Dai,  de 

Fa 

Gara,  goama,  guma 

Ko 

Ko  .  .  .  ko 

Koka 

Kua 

Kau,  kawa 

Kuma 

Ma 


but 
and 

both  .  .  .  and 
had  I  ...    I  should  (not} 
then,  indeed 

therefore    (about ;    usually   inter- 
rogative) 
rather 

either  or  even 
either,  whether  ...  or 
as  well  as,  like  as 
also 

also  (not  colloquial) 
again.     See  under  adverbs 
too,  likewise 


SUBORDINATING 


Bamda 

Don  (S)  Domin  (K) 


Don  kada,  don  en 

Don  wannan,  don  haka 

En,  idan  (S),  kan,1  kam,1  kadan 

(K)  kur  (Z) 
En 
Inda 

Gama 


except 

because,  in  order  that.     (See  also 

Prepositions) 
lest 

for  this  reason 
if,  when 

in  order  to,  that 

if.      Inda  .  .  .  da,    Had    I  .   .   . 

/  should  (not) 
for 


1  See  also  Adverbs  of  Time. 
201 


202  THE  HAUSA   LANGUAGE 

Kada  (S)  kar  (K)  Do  not,  lest 

Koda  although,  when,  even  if 

Sabada  on  account  of 

Sai  except,  and,  etc. 

Zama  because 


NOUNS  USED  (WITH  PARTICLES)  IN  SENSE 
OF  CONJUNCTIONS 

Kama-n-da  in  the  same  way,  as  soon  as,  like  as 

Kwatamshi  (S)  „ 

Kama-n-  like,  the  same 

Amma 

Ina  dubensa,  amma  ban  gane  shi      /  looked  for  him  but    I  did  not 

ba  see  him 

Da  uwata  kua  tana  kuka,  amma      And  my  mother  also  was  crying 

kanena  ba  shi  sani  ba  komi  but  my  younger  brother  did  not 

know  anything 

Da 

"Da  .  .  .  da,,"  both  .  .  .  and,  neither  .  .  .  nor  in  negative 
sentences,  whether  ...  or,  in  conditional  sentences. 
"  Da  "  connects  words  as  well  as  sentences — 

Rago  da  akwia  The  ram  and  the  she-goat 

Ba  naku  ne  da  zaku  san  zamauu      It  is  not  for  you  to  know  the  times 

Ni  tafi  ga  sariki  da  ni  che  masa          /  shall  go  to  the  chief  and  I  shall 

say  to  him 
Da  kaka  zaka  yaki  babu  fadawa  ?      And  how  will  you  go  to  war  with 

no  officers  ? 
Ta  che  mu  biu  da  ni  da  barao  She  said  both  of  us  both  I  and  the 

thief 
Da  ni  da  shi  mu  duka  muna  tafia      Both    I  and  he  were  walking  on 

chiki-n-kaya  the  thorns 

Ina  so  mu  yi  gana  da  ni  da  kai        I  want  to  have  some  conversation 

with  you 

Da  ya  sha  bami,  da  ya  sha  barasa,     Whether  he  drinks  palm  wine  or 
duka  daia  ne  he  drinks  spirit,  it  is  all  the  same 

"  Da  "  may  be  omitted  in  narration — 

Mutum  ya  tashi,  ya  dauka  sanda,  The  man  arose,  he  took  a  stick,  fie 

ya  gudu,  ya  tafo  ga  wurin  enda  ran,  he  came  to  the  place  where 

machiji  shi  ke,  ya  kashe  shi  the  snake  was,  he  killed  it 

Ina  chi,  ina  sha  /  eat  and  drink 


CONJUNCTIONS 


203 


Two  verbs  in  the  imperative  mood  have  no  conjunction 
between  them,  only  a  personal  pronoun — 

Duba  ki  ga  yawa-n-dawaki  nan        Look    and    see    the    multitude    of 

horses  here 

Da  .  .  .  da,  Had  1  ...  I  should  (not) 

This  idiom  is  usually  found  with  one  of  the  sentences 
in  the  negative — 


Da  na  sani,  da  ban  yi  shi  ba 

Da  kana  nan  da  kanena  ba  ya 

mutu  ba 
Da  en  yi  wannan  gara  en  mutu 


Had  I  known,   I  should  not  have 

done  it 
Had    you    been    here    my    young 

brother  would  not  have  died 
I  would  rather  die  than  do  this 


Inda  .  .  .  da 

Inda  ba  ha ka  ba  da  na  gaya  maka      //  it  were  not  so  I  would  not  have 

told  you 

Inda  ka  zo  wurina  da  lotu,  da  mu      If  you  come  for  me  in  time,  we  will 
tafi  tare  kasua  go  to  the  market  together 

Dai,  de.     It  is  never  first  word  in  a  sentence 

Dila  de  ke  nan  This  is  the  jackal  (the  beginning 

of  a  story).  See  here  is  the 
jackal 

Ni  de  .  .  .  As  for  me  ... 


Fa 


Shi  fa  ? 


What  about  him  ? 


Gara,  guma,  goama 

Kada  ka  sayas  shi,  amma  goama     Do  not  sell  it  but  rather  give  it  to  me 

ka  ba  ni 
Gara  haka  It  is  better  so 

Ko,  either,  or 


Bani  rago  ko  kurdi 
Hario  mutume  nan  ko  ubanta  ya 
zaka  ya  mashie  ta 


Give  me  the  ram  or  the  money 
Again  this  man  or  her  husband 
came  and  made  her  return 


Ko  ka  bashi  kurdi,  ko  ka  bashi     Either  give  him  the  money  or  give 


rago-n-nan 


him  the  ram 


Ko  Audu  ya  zo  ko  Mahma  ya  zo      Either    Audu   comes   or    Mahma 

comes 


204  THE    HAUSA   LANGUAGE 

Angaya  mani  wannan  labari,  ko  /  was  told  this  news,  whether  it  is 

gaskia  ne,  koko  tasunia  che,  true,  or  whether  it  is  a  tale,    I 

oho  !  don't  know  ! 

Suna  che  ko  na  mutu  They  asked  if  I  was  dead 

Amma  ban  ji  ba  ko  daia  ya  mutu,  But   I  have  not  heard  if  anybody 

ko,  wani  ya  halbi  kibia  died  or  whether  any  one  shot  an 

arrow 

Ko = even,  indeed  (an  intensive) 

Na  gani  ko  sariki  /  have  indeed  seen  the  chief 

Ba  mu  samu  ba  ko  aluransu  daia     We  did  not  find  even  one  of  their 

needles 
Ko  ni  dakaina  ina  tafia  da  kafa       Even    I  myself  was  travelling  on 

foot 
Da  babu  rairai  ko  kadan  There  was  no  sand  there,  not  even 

a  little 

Bature  ba  shi  tsoro   mutua  ko      The  white  man  does  not  fear  death, 
anakasheshi  ba  i  kula  ba  even  if  he  is  to  be  killed  he  does 

not  care 
Ko  da  babu  daki  nan  Formerly  there  was  no   house  at 

all  here 

"  Ko  da  "  here  is  distinct  from  "  koda,"  although 

"  Ko "  may  be  used  at  the  end  of  a  sentence  as  an 
interrogative  particle — 

Mutum  ya  tafi,  ko  ?  Did  the  man  go  ? 

Here  "  ko  "  is  elliptic  for  "  ko  ba  hakka  ba,"  or  is  it 
not  so.  "Ko"  may  also  be  used  in  the  middle  of  the 
sentence,  even  splitting  the  verb — 

A  ko  nuna  inaka  talauchi  ?  Shall  poverty  be  shown  you  ? 

Koka 

Na     sani     sariki- n-Kano     koka      /  know  the  chief  of  Kano  as  well 
sariki-n-Sokoto  as  the  chief  of  Sokoto 

Kua 
Usually  found  with  "  da,"  and.     Compare  use  of  "  kuma." 

Gobe  ubanka  shi  zo  kua  Tomorrow  my  father  will  also  come 

Audu  ya  yi  sata  kua  Audu  has  also  stolen 

Ina  sonsa  da  shi  kua  shina  sona  /  like  him  and  he  also  likes  me 

Ko  kua    mu   ya-n-Africa    niuna  Even    we    Africans  also  eat  raw 

chi-n-nama  dainye  meat 

Ni  zani  tafia  ga  kasua  da  kai  kua  /  shall  go  to  the  market  and  you 

zaka  tafia  ga  kasua  also  will  go  to  the  market 


CONJUNCTIONS 


205 


Kuma  (conjunction).     See  also  under  adverbs 


Audu  ya  yi  sata,  Mahma  ya  yi 
sata  kuma 


Audu  has  stolen,  Mahma  has  also 
stolen 


Ma 
Enclitic  to  the  word  it  refers  to 


Ni  ma  ina  tafia  en  nema  dukia 
Su  ma  ba  su  da  yaya 


/  too  am  going  in  search  for  riches 
They  too  had  no  children 


Bamda.     See  under  Preposition 
Bamda  Allah  ba  ni  tsoro-n-komi      Except  God  I  fear  nothing 

Don.     See  also  under  Preposition 


Ya  yi  kuka  don  mun  buga  shi 

Kira  shi  don  en  biya  shi 

Don  ba  ka  ji  ba 

Na   sani    Hausa    kwarai  don   ni 

da-n-Tuntume  ne 
Suna  zo  bisa  dawaki  don  su 

kamaku 
Yao  na  tafi  ga  makaranta  don  en 

gani  abinda  zasu  goda  ga  yan 

makaranta 
Ya  bani  duka  don  wannan  na  ya 

murna 
Don  kada  su  gani  wuta  da  dere 


He  howled  because  we  beat  him 
Gall  him  so  that  I  may  pay  him 
Because  you  do  not  understand 
I  know  Hausa  correctly  because  I 

am  a  native  of  Tuntume 
They    are    coming    on    horses    to 

catch  you 
I  went  to  school  to-day  to  see  what 

they  were  going  to  show  to  the 

school  children 
They  gave  me  all  therefore   I  was 

glad 
Lest  they  should  see  the  fire  by 

night 


En,  idan,  kadan,  etc. 


En  ya  yi  karia  abugeshi 
Asamu  en  anjima  kadan 
Ya  kamata  mutum  zashi  tafia  shi 
nema  guzuri  en  shina  yi  hankali 

En  ba  ka  da  kurdi  ba  ka  da  gaskia 


Idan  kana  son  sarota  em  ba  ka 

Kadan  ban  che  ba  karia 
Kadan  wanga  mutum  ya  yi  gudu 

shi  fadi 

Kadan  anarua  ba  zamu  tafia  ba 
Kadan   na   tafi   garesa   shi   facia 

mani  gaskia 
Kan  na  sakeki 
Kan  na  yi  muku  rana,  kada  ku  yi 

mini  dere  (prov.) 


//  he  lies  he  will  be  beaten 

They  will  be  got  if  you  wait  a  little 

It  behoves  a  man  who  is  going  a 

journey  to  lay  in  provisions  if  he 

is  wise 
If  you  have  no  money  you  have  no 

truth,  i.e.,  only  a  rich  man  is 

listened  to 
If  you  want  the  kingdom    I  will 

give  it  you 

If  I  am  not  telling  a  lie 
If  this  man  runs  he  will  fall  down 

If  it  rains  we  will  not  go 

If  I  go  to  him  he  will  tell  me  the 

truth 

If  1  set  you  free 
If   I  make  day  for  you,  do  not 

make  night  for  me 


206  THE    HAUSA   LANGUAGE 

"  //"  understood  from  context 

Akoi  laya,  kana  sa  ta  ga  wuya,      There  is  a  charm,  (if)  you  hang  it 
kana  yi  sata  babu  maigani  on  your  neck,  you  can  steal  and 

no  one  will  see  you 

.Era  =  in  order  to,  that 

Ya  tambaye  en  su  Fulani  ne  He  went  to  ask  if  they  were  Fulanis 

Ta  tafi  gari  en  dauka  kashia  She  went  to  the  town  to  take  her  pay 

Inda  .   .  .  da 

Inda   ba   haka   ba,   da   na   gaya      It  it  were  not  so    I  should  have 
maka  told  you 

Gama 

Ban  so  tafi  ba  gama  ban  ganshi      /  do  not  want  to  go  for  I  have  not 
ba  tukuna  seen  him  yet 


=  because  not.     Compare  don 

Kada  ka  tafi  Do  not  go 

Kada  su  tafi  Let  them  not  go 

Gudu  maza  kada  shi  wucheka  Bun  quickly  lest  he  pass  you 

Na    tambaye    su    domi    mutane  /  asked  him  why  the  men  should 

kada  su  tafi  not  go 

Ya  aiko  mani  wata  budurua  kada  He  sent   to  me  a  certain  girl  (to 

en  tafi  bar  ya-n-makaranta  su  say)  that   I  should  not  go  until 

fita  the  school  children  came  out 

Koda 

Koda  shi  ke  yaro  shina  da  karifi  Although  he  is  a  boy  he  is  very 

kwarai  strong 

Koda  ya  mutu  shi  yi  rai  Even  if  he  dies  he  shall  live 

Koenna    ka    tafi   Allah   shinana  Wherever  you  go  God  is  there  with 

tari  da  kai  koda  dere  koda  rana  you  whether  by  night  or  by  day 

Sabada 

This  preposition  is  used  with  a  noun  or  with  "  wannan," 
and  the  phrase  may  be  translated  by  such  a  conjunction 
as  "  because  "— 

Ni    kua    ina    yi-n-kuka    sabada      /  too  cried  because    I  was  tired. 
gajia  Lit.,  on  account  of  fatigue 

Or  "  haka  "  may  be  used— 

Ba  ni  ba  ta  kurdi  sabada  haka  ta      /  did  not  give  her  money  so  she 
tafi  went 


CONJUNCTIONS  207 

Sai 
See  also  under  adverbs 

Sai  suna  yawo  chikin  gari  All  they  did  was  to  walk  about  the 

town 

"  Sai  "  is  used  in  narration  at  the  beginning  of  sentences  meaning 
little  more  than  "  and  " — 

Sai  ya  bubuge  ta  da  sanda  a  kai,     And  he  continued  beating  her  with 
sai  ga  kafoni  sun  fito  a   stick   on   the  head  until  the 

horns  came  out 

Zama 

Zama  Kafirawa  kan  yerda  da  sabo    Because  the  heathen   are  addicted 

to  evil 

(NOTE. — "  Su  "  is  omitted  before  "  kan  "  by  poetical  license) 

Kwatamshi 

Sun  yi  inasa  kwatamshi-n-wan-      They  did  to  him  the  same  as  to  the 
chan  other 


CHAFFER   IX 


A  oh 

Aa  exclamation  of  astonishment.     It  is   in  a  different 

tone  from  aa  =  no,  which  has  a  low,  falling  tone 

Af,  Ap  oh  ;  an  exclamation  of  recollection 

Aha  exclamation  of  satisfaction 

Ai  ah 

Arr(K),  irr(S)     be  off 

Ara  go  on 

Ashe  truly 

Asha,  hasha         an  exclamation  of  pain  or  grief  « 

Aya  up  I  or  it  does  not  matter 

Gasa  expression  of  disgust,  surprise 

Hakika  true ! 

Habba,  hubba     expression  of  astonishment  or  indignation 

Kai  hi  I  you  ! 

Kaito,  kaicho      alas 

Ko  exclamation  of  surprise 

Labada  true ! 

Madilla  exclamation  of  joy,  also  used  as  a  reply  salutation, 

or  on  receiving  an  acceptable  gift 

Oho  it  does  not  concern  me,      (See  example  under  con- 

junction "  ko  ") 

Sanu  softly,  also  a  salutation.     An  expression  of  sym- 

pathy 

To  all  right.     Used  on  receiving  an  order  and  signifying 

acceptance.     Also  as  an  informal  expression  of 
-  thanks 

Ungo  take  it  I 

Us  used  in  driving  sheep  and  donkeys 

Tir  alas.     An  expression  of  sympathy 

Wai  exclamation  of  doubt,  hesitation 

Ya  0.     Arabic 

Yowa  (K)  yes,  all  right 

208 


INTERJECTIONS  209 

Examples 

A  mugum  bara  !  Ah  bad  servant  ! 

Kai  yaro  You  boy  I 

Kai  !  YOU 

Kai  wadanan  yara  !  You  boys  I 

Aya  mu  tafi  !  Up  I  let  us  go  ! 

Ya  sidi  !    Ya  ku  mutane  !     0  air  1      You,  0  men  ! 

Ungo  mashi-n-nan  Take  this  spear 


CHAPTER   X 
SYNTAX 

GENERAL  OBSERVATIONS  ON  THE  CONSTRUCTION  OF 

SENTENCES 

THE  SUBJECT 

The  subject  may  be  composed  as  follows  : — 

i.  pronoun,  personal. 

ii.  noun    or   other   substantive  +  personal    pronoun 

(never  noun  alone), 
iii.  demonstrative  +  noun  +  personal   pronoun  ;    or, 

noun  +  demonstrative  +  personal  pronoun, 
iv.  noun  +  possessive  pronoun  +  personal  pronoun. 
v.  noun  +  adjective  or  numeral  +  personal  pronoun. 
vi.  two  nouns  in  apposition  +  personal  pronoun, 
vii.  two  nouns,  one  in  genitive  case  +  personal  pronoun, 
viii.  infinitive  +  personal  pronoun, 
ix.  relative  sentence  +  personal  pronoun. 

From  this  list  it  can  be  seen  that,  whatever  the  nature 
of  the  subject,  its  predicate  must  be  preceded  by  a  personal 
pronoun.  The  only  cases  in  which  its  omission  is  per- 
missible are  in  poetry  and  proverbs. 

Examples 

i    Ya  tafi  He  went 

ii    Mutum  ya  tafi  The  man  went 

iii.  Wannan  mutum  ya  tafi  "\       m-,  . 

Mutume-nan  ya  tafi  )      ^s  man  went 

210 


SYNTAX  211 

iv.  Dansa  ya  tafi  His  son  went 

v.  Yaro  karami  ya  tafi  The  small  boy  went 

Yara  uku  sun  zo  Three  boys  have  come 

vi.  Yaro,  dana,  ya  tafi  The  boy,  my  son,  went 

vii.   Da-n-mutum  ya  tafi  The  man's  son  went 

viii.  Dauka-n-yaro  ba  da  wuya  ba  To  carry  the  boy  is  not  difficult 

ix.  Mutum  da  ya  zo  jia  ya  tafi  The  man  who  came  yesterday  has 

gone 

Simple  Subject 

The  subject  need  not  necessarily  be  a  noun ;  other  sub- 
stantives or  a  substantival  phrase  may  be  substituted — 

Na-baya  ya  kuka  The  one  behind  howled 

Mai-doka-n-kaya  ya  zo  The  man  to  carry  the  load  has 

come 
Bature  mai-ji  Hausa  ya  zo  The  white  man  who  knows  Hausa 

has  come 

Compound  Subject 

The  compound  subject  consists  of  one  or  more  simple 
subjects,  to  all  of  which  one  predicate  belongs — 

Mutume  da  mache  da  yaro  sunka      The  man  the  woman  and  the  boy 
tafi  went 


THE   PREDICATE 

The  predicate  may  be  simple  or  compound. 

The  Simple  Predicate 
The  simple  predicate  may  consist  of— 

i.  a  simple  verb, 
ii.  auxiliary  verb, 
iii.  or,  may  be  understood. 

Examples 

\.  Aiki  ya  karc  The  work  is  finished 

ii.   Yaro  karami  no  The  boy  is  small  or  it  is  a  small 

boy 


212  THE    HAUSA    LANGUAGE 

iii.  (a)  With  "  mai  " — 

Gari  mainesa  The  town  is  far 

(b)  With  the  pronoun  compounded  with  "  na  " — 

Shina  baya  He  is  behind 

(c)  With  "  da,."  with  (the  substitute  for  "  have  ") — 

Aiki  da  wuya  The  work  is  hard 

These  predicates  may  be  expanded  in  various  ways  with 
attributes — 

i. 

Aiki  ya  kare  duka  The  work  is  all  finished 

Ya  ji  sarai  He  understands  perfectly 

ii. 
Miji-n-ta  shi  ne  inaisaida-n-zinaria      Her  husband  is  a  seller  of  gold 


Yaro  ba  shi  da  karifi  The  boy  is  not  strong 

The  Compound  Predicate 

A  compound  predicate  consists  of  two  or  more  simple 
predicates  belonging  to  the  same  subject.  The  personal 
pronoun  has  to  be  repeated  with  each — 

Yaro  ya  gudu  ya  fadi  chiki-n-      The  boy  ran  and  fell  into  the  hole 
rami 

Special  Notes  on  the  Predicate 


By  idiomatic  usage  the  number  of  the  predicate  does 
not  agree  with  that  of  the  subject. 

A  singular  noun  will  take  a  plural  predicate  when  the 
former  has  a  collective  sense — 

Kasua  duka  sun  hauka  The  whole  market  went  mad  drunk 

Dokinsa  dubu  ishirin  da  biar  His  cavalry  was  25,000  men 

Mutum  duka  ya  gudu  They  have  all  run  away 

Wani  mutane  yatafi  garin  Bauchi  Some    men    went    to    the    Bauchi 

taritari  country — a  great  many 


SYNTAX 


213 


Also  two  subjects  may  have  a  singular  predicate  — 


Kowa  ya  rinaka  yaro  da  baba 
kafiri  da  Musulmi  duk  ya 
zageka 

Ban  ji  ba  ban  gani  ba  ta  rabaka 
da  zaure-n-tara  (proverb) 


Every  one  despises  you,  boy  and 
grown-up,  heathen  and  Musul- 
man,  all  revile  you 

/  did  not  hear  I  did  not  see 
keeps  you  out  of  the  hall  of 
fines,  i.e.,  proves  an  alibi 


In  connection  with  these  the  following  sentences  may  be 
noticed  — 


Ya  tafi  gari  baba  ya  yi  aiki  da  su 

Bature  ya   kashe   masu   mutum 
tari  da  doki 


He  went  to  a  big  town  he  made 

war  on  it  (them) 
The  white  man  killed  of  them  many 

men  and  horses 


Verbs  of  saying,  thinking,  seeing,  etc.,  generally  intro- 
duce direct  speech  and  are  not  followed  by  any  con- 
junctions— 


Na  sani  ka  ba  ni  abinda  ni  ke  so 

Ina  tamaha  shina  da  rai  bar  yanzu 

Da  inuka  zamna  na  ji  suna  so-n-    When  we  halted  I  heard  that  they 


/  know  (that)  you  will  give 

what  I  want 
/  think  he  is  still  alive 


tafia  yaki 
Da  muna  gani  suna  gudu 


wanted  to  go  to  war 
Aa  we,  looked  they  ran  off 


There  are  a  few  instances  in  which  the  predicate  precedes 
the  subject.  The  verbs  are  '•  akwoi,"  "za,"  "je,"  "ya" 
(see  under  the  Verb)  — 

Akwoi  mutane  dayawa  a  chiki-n-      There    are    many    people    in    the 


gida 
Akoi  Allah 
Akwoisu 
Zamu  gida 
Gobe  zaka  Kano 
Jeku  ! 
Yaka  ! 


house 
There  ia  a  God 
There  are 
We  will  go  home 
Tomorrow  you  will  go  to  Kano 
Be  off  / 
Come  I 


214  THE    HAUSA   LANGUAGE 


THE   OBJECT 

The  object  is  of  two  kinds — 

i.  Direct. 

ii.  Indirect. 

The  nature  of  the  object  is  the  same  as  that  of  the 
subject. 

Direct  Object 

The  following  are  examples  of  the  direct  object  follow 
ing  the  classification  of  the  subject — 

i.  Mutum  ya  huge  shi  The  man  beat  him 

Na  ba  wani  I  gave  (it)  (to)  another 

ii.  Mutum  ya  buga  yaro  The  man  beat  the  boy 
iii.  Mutum  ya  buga  wannan  ) 

yaro                                   >  The  man  beat  this  boy 
Mutum  ya  buga  yaro  nan  ) 

iv.  Mutum  ya  buga  yaronsa  The  man  beat  his  boy 

v.  Mutum  ya  buga  yaro  mugu  The  man  beat  the  bad  boy 

Mutum  ya  buga  yara  uku  The  man  beat  three  boys 

vi.  Mutum  ya  buga  yaro  dansa  The  man  beat  the  boy  his  son 

vii.  Mutum  ya  buga  da-n-uwansa  The    man    beat    the    son    of   his 

mother,  i.e.,  his  brother 

viii.  Mutum  ya  tafi  dauka-n-kaya  The  man  has  gone  to  take  his  load 

ix.  Mutum  ya  buga  wanda  ya  The  man  beat  him  who  carried  the 

dauki  kaya  load 

Don  ba  ka  samu  ba  ya  fi  Because   you    cannot  find    better 

wannan  than  this 

Example  of  Compound  Direct  Object 

Mutum  ya  buga  yaro  da  yarinia      The   man   beat  the  bad  boy  and 
miagu  girl 

In  Hausa  a  direct  object  in  the  form  of  an  objective 
phrase  is  used  where  in  English  a  subordinate  sentence 
is  found — 

Allah  shi  sake  taramu  da  lafia         May  God  grant  we  meet  in  health, 

lit.,  May  God  bring  about  "our 
meeting  in  health  " 

Ya  gani  anashiga  gida-n-Muham-      He  saw  them  enter  the  house  of 
madu  da  bame  Mohammed  with  palm  wine 

NOTE. —  //  "  anashiga  "  is  treated  as  the  equivalent  of  "  suna  shiga  " 
the  verbal  aspect  becomes  more  prominent  than  the  substantival. 


SYNTAX  215 

In  the  following  example  a  verb  although  treated  as  a  noun 
yet  takes  a  direct  object.  It  must,  however,  be  observed 
that  the  direct  object  begins  the  sentence  as  an  interroga- 
tion, and  the  rest  of  the  sentence  in  following  loses  its 
strictly  grammatical  sequence — 

Mi  ki  ka  zo  gari-n-nema  ?  W hat  have  you  come  to  look  for  ? 

Double  Object 

Some  verbs  take  two  direct  objects,  one  of  the  person 
the  other  of  the  thing — 

Sariki  ya  ba  mu  shanu  biu  The  chief  gave  us  two  cows 

Ba  ina  tamaha  ba  shi  ba  ni  abinda  /  do  not  think  he  will  give  me  what 

ni  ke  so  /  want 

Anaba  kowa  nasa  Every  one  was  given  his  share 

Shi  ya  gode  Allah  don  bai  haliche-  He  thanks  God  because  he  has  not 

shi  karre  ba  created  him  a  dog 

Da-n-zaki  ya  dauka  dan  mutum  The  lion's  child  took  the  human 

aboki  child  for  his  friend 

Ya  daura  dokinsa  surdi  He  saddled  his  horse 

Lokachinda  anazuba  maka  kasa  When  they  pour  earth  upon  you 

bisa  kai  (i.e.,  bury  you) 

Example  of  Nouns  in  Apposition 
Ya  hau  dokinsa  zaki  He  mounted  his  horse — a  lion 

Indirect  Object 

This  is  very  varied  in  its  nature. 
It  usually  follows  the  predicate — 

Ya  tiifi  ga  gida-n-maimagani  He    went    to    the    house    of    the 

medicine  man 

Or  it  may  stand  first — 

Da  sanda  na  buge  shi  With  a  stick  I  beat  him 

Wanene  ka  ke  kira  biri  Whom  are  you  calling  a  monkey  ? 

When  there  are  both  direct  and  indirect  objects  the 
indirect  stands  first— 

Ta  bids  masu  magani  She  sought  medicine  from  them 

Wani  ya  kawo  ma  sariki  labari         Some  one  brought  the  news  to  the 

chief 


216  THE    HAUSA   LANGUAGE 

Some  verbs  take  "  da  "  with  the  indirect  object — 

Na  gaji  da  sukua  bisa  rakumi  /  was  tired  of  riding  on  the  camel 

Ta  tuna  da  mijinta  She  remembered  her  husband 

Ta  mutu  da  yungwa  She  died  of  hunger 

Ni  ban  yirda  ba  da  shi  I  do  not  believe  in  him 

NATURE  or  SENTENCES 

Sentences  are — 

1.  Affirmative. 

2.  Negative. 

3.  Interrogative. 

The  affirmative  sentence  is  a  simple  statement  in  any 
mood  or  tense.  The  negative  sentence  is  formed  from  the 
affirmative  sentence  by  the  addition  of  "  ba  .  .  .  ba " 
before  and  after  the  verb.  (See  under  adverb.) 

Affirmative  Negative 

Yaro  nan  shi  ke  karami  Yaro  nan  ba  shi  ke  karami  ba 

Yaro  nan  shina  karami  Yaro  nan  ba  shi  karami  ba 

Yaro  nan  shina  da  wayo  Yaro  nan  ba  shi  da  wayo 

English. — This  boy  is  small ;  This  boy  is  cunning,  etc. 

In  sentences  containing  a  command,  if  direct  the  subject 
pronoun  may  be  omitted  in  the  singular,  but  not  in  the 
plural — 

Tafi  or  ka  tan  Go 

Ku  tafi  Go  (pi.) 

Ga  shi  See  him 

Ba  ni  rua  Give  me  water 

Inverted  subjects  are  found  in  "  Yaka,"  come;  "  Jeka," 
go;  "Jeku,"  go  (pi.)— 


Ta  che  mata,  ki  kunchesu  She  said  to  her  loose  them 

Ban  sani  ba  ;  fada  man!  en  ji  /  do  not  know,  tell  me  about  it, 

lit.,  so  that    I  may  understand 


SYNTAX  217 

Interrogative  Sentences 

Interrogative  sentences  are  formed  in  three  ways — 

1 .  Change  of  tone  in  an  affirmative  sentence. 

2.  With  interrogative  pronouns. 

3.  With  interrogative   adverbs,  such   as    "  ko,"    for 

indirect  questions  especially ;  "  ba  ? "  not?  "Fa  ? " 
then  ?  "  De  ?  "  indeed  ? 
1 

Ni  ne  ?  Is  it  I  ? 

Kai  ka  ke  yi  mani  magana  haka  ?  Do  you  speak  so  to  me.  ? 

Ka  gani  abin-nan  ?  Have  you  seen  this  thing  ? 

Akoi  rua  chiki-n-rijia  ?  Is  there  water  in  the  well  ? 


Wanene  ka  ke  kira  biri  ?  Whom  are  you  calling  a  monkey 

Mi  zaka  yi  da  shi  ?  What  will  you  do  with  him  ? 

3    Adverbs 

Kurdinsa  nawa  ?  How  much  is  it  ? 

Enna  ubanka  ?  Where  is  your  father  ? 

Yaushe  zaka  komo  ?  When  will  you  come  back  ? 

Ko 

Ya  tambaye  shi  ko  shi  zo  ko  ba  He  asked  him  if  he  was  coming  or 
shi  zo  ba  not 

Ta  che  ko  daganan  rua  Madina  She  said,  is  thia  the  water  of 
shi  ke  ?  Madina  here  f 

Na  tafo  ko  nan  ne  rua  Madina  /  came  to  see  whether  this  is  the 

water  of  Madina 

Ko  ni  ne  ?  Or  is  it  I  ? 

Ko  ba  haka  ba  ?  Or  is  it  not  so  ?  (Often  used 

after  another  question  when  a 
negative  answer  is  possible) 

Baf 

Ka  ji  ba  ?  Did  you  not  hear  ? 

Ni  ne  ba  ?  Is  it  not  I  ? 

Fa? 

Shi  fa  ?  What  about  him  ? 

Ansa  kowa  aikinsa,  shi  yaro  nan     Every  one  has  been  given  his  work, 

fa  ?  but  what  about  this  boy  ? 

Amba  kanena  rabonsa,   ni   de  ?     My  younger  brother  has  been  given 

Ba  zaabani  ba  ?  his    portion,    what   about   me  f 

Shall  I  not  be  given  any  ? 


218  THE    HAUSA   LANGUAGE 

Compound  Sentences 

Compound  sentences  are  of  two  kinds — co-ordinate  and 
subordinate. 

Co-ordinate 

Kurichia  ta  zaka,  tana  yi-n-kuka,  The  dove  came,  she  was  crying  out, 
tana  chewa  ga  mache — yi  kun-  she  was  saying  to  the  woman — 
unki  ki  sha  make  your  gruel,  drink  it 

Sunka  tafi  ga  baki-n-rijia,  ya  che  They  went  to  the  mouth  of  the  well, 
masti  .  .  .  (and)  he  said  to  them  .  .  . 

Amma  mu  ba  mu  iyawa  mu  yi  But  we,  we  cannot  work 
aiki 

Ba  ni  ne  zan  yi  shi  ba  ?  Is  it  not  for  me  to  do  it  ? 

Subordinate 

Subordinate  sentence  first — 

Kadan  ka  bani  kurdi-n-nan  m  //  you  give  me  the  money  I  shall 

baka  tagia  give  you  the  cap 

Kadan  na  tafi,  kadan  ka  rule  When  I  have  gone,  when  you  have 

kofa,  kadan  wani  ya  zaka.  kada  shut  the  door,  if  any  one  comes, 

ka  bude  do  not  open 

Subordinate  sentence  last — 

Rairai  ya  shiga  ga  idanumu  don  The  sand  goes  into  our  eyes 
hiska  ta  busa  da  karifi  because  the  wind  blew  strong 


CHAPTER  XI 


COMMON  IDIOMATIC   EXPRESSIONS 


SALUTATIONS 


1.  Sanu  sanu 

2.  Sanu  ka  dai  (de) 

3.  Kana  lafia  ? 

4.  Lafia  lau 

5.  Madilla 

6.  Madilla  (Arabic) 
1.  Sanu  da  aiki 

I.  Sanu  da  gajia 

1.  Sanu  da  zua 

2.  Sanu  ka  dai  (de) 

Sanuku 

Sanunka 
Sanunka  da  kaya 

1.  Ka  kwana  lafia  ? 

2.  Lafia;  Madilla 

1.  Kana  lafia  ? 

2.  Lafia  lau,  na  godi 

1.  Analafia  ? 

2.  Muna  lafia 

1.  Enna  gajia  ? 

2.  Babu  gajia 

2.   Gajia  da  sauki 
1.   Enna  gida  ? 

1.  Kaka  gida  ?  * 

2.  Lafia  lau 


How  do  you  do.     Lit.,  Softly 
How  do  you  do 
Are  you  well  ? 
Quite  well 
Thanks  be  to  God 

Said   when    meeting    a    man  at 

work 

Said  when  meeting  a  man  tired 
Said  when  meeting  a  man  coming 
How  do  you  do  ? 

Said  when  meeting  several  per- 
sons, and  also  in  reply 
How    do    you    do  ?     Lit.,     Your 

" sanu  " 
Said  when  meeting  a  man  with 

a  load 

Have  you  slept  well  ? 
Very    well,    thanks      (Madilla= 

What  has  Ood  shown  ?) 
Are  you  well  ? 
Quite  well,   I  thank  (you) 
Are  you  well  ? 
We  are  well 
I  hope  you  are  not  tired.     Lit., 

Where  is  the  fatigue  ? 
Not  at  all  tired 

>» 
How  are  all  at  home  ? 

Quite  well 


*  NOTB. —  It  it  impolite  to  say,  How  is  your  wife  if 
219 


220 


THE    HAUSA   LANGUAGE 


3.  Da  iyali  suna  lafia  ? 

4.  Lafia  lau,  muna  lafia 

1.  Enna  labari  ? 

2.  Sai  lafia 

1.  Maraba,  maraba  (Arabic) 

2.  Sanu,  sanu  madilla 

1.  Maraba  da  zua 

2.  Sanu 

1.  Enna  zamnan  gari  ? 

2.  Sai  alheri 

1.  Marhabi,  marhabi  (Arabic) 

2.  Sanu,  madilla 

1.  Albarka 

2.  Albarka  de 

1.  Madilld  \ 

2.  Alhumdillilahi  (Arabic)    / 

1.  Salaam  alaikum  (Arabic) 

2.  Alaikum  salaam 

1.  Berka  (for  albarka) 

2.  Berka  da  zua 
Agaisheka 
Tngoya  (ingweya) 

Sai  gobe 

Sai  wata  rana 

Sai  anjima 

Allah  shi  dade  da  ranka 

Gafara  ! 

Gafara  dai  ! 

Kaka  ka  ji  da  sainyi  ? 

Lafia,  sainyi  da  godia 

Kaka  ka  kara  ji  da  jiki  ?     Na 

ji  sauki  (K  and  Z) 
Allah   shi   kara    maka   sauki, 

Amin 
Na  ji  dama.     Na  samu  sauki 

(Zar) 
Allah  shi   anfana-shi   (or  -ta) 

Allah  shi  keauta 
Ka  gaishe  shi  da  yini 
Gai  mini  da  ubanka 
Sai  ka  komo 


And  are  all  the  family  weU  ? 

Quite  well,  we  are  all  well 

What  is  the  news  ? 

It  is  good.  The  invariable  for- 
mal reply 

Used  after  long  absence 

Thank  you 

Welcome 

Softly,  i.e.,  thank  you 

How  is  your  stay  in  the  town  ? 

It  is  going  well,  prosperous 

Salutation  on  returning  from  a 
journey 

I  am  well,  thank  you 

Welcome 

Thank  you  for  your  welcome 

Praise  be  to  God 

Peace  be  with  you 
With  you  be  peace 
How  do  you  do 
Welcome 

You  are  saluted.      Hoio  do  you  do 
Reply  salutation  to  an  important 

person 

Good-bye  till  to-morrow 
Good-bye  till  another  day 
Good-bye  for  a  short  time 
May  God  give  you  long  life  (to  a 

chief) 
/  beg  your  pardon 

How  do  you  feel  this  cold  weather  ? 
Quite  well  in  spite  of  the  cold 
How    are    you   feeling  ?      I    am 

feeling  better 
May    God   increase    your    health, 

Amen 
I  feel  better  or  am  well  again 

May  God  prosper  it  (on  birth  of 

a  child) 

Say  good-night  to  him 
Salute  your  father  for  me 
Good-bye  till  you  come  again 


COMMON   IDIOMATIC    EXPRESSIONS        221 


NAMES  or  SEASONS,  MONTHS,  DAYS,  AND  HOUBS 

Seasons 

Funturu,  or  Lokachin  dari  Cold    season,    the    season    of   the 

Harmattan  —  December      and 
January 

Rani  Hot  season — March 

Basara  Hottest    part   of  the    hot    season; 

tornado     season  —  April     and 
May 

Damara  Wet     season — June     to     August 

Agajere  Hot  season  after  rain — September, 

October 

Kaka  Harvest  season — October,  Novem- 

ber 

Months 

These  are  the  Arabic  months,  with  the  names  more  or 
less  corrupt — 

Moharam 

Safar 

Rabiu  lauwal 

Rabiu  lahir 

Jimada  lula 

Jimada  luhura 

Rajab 

Jaaban 

Ramadan,  ramalan,  or  wata-n-      The  fast  month 

azumi 

Shauwal,  wata-n-karama-n-salla   Month  of  the  little  prayer 
Zulkiida 
Zulhaji,  wata-n-baba-n-salla  Month  of  the  big  prayer 

The  corresponding  months  in  the  Julian  calendar  vary 
from  year  to  year. 

Days  of  the  Week 

Ran'lahadi  Sunday 

Ran'latini  Monday 

Ran'talata  Tuesday 

Ran'laraba  Wednesday 

Ran'alhamis  Thursday 

Ran'aljimua,  aljima  Friday 

Ran'assabit  Saturday 


222  THE    HAUSA   LANGUAGE 


Hours  of  the  Day 

Jijifi  First  sign  of  dawn 

Kiran  salla  nafari  Call  to  the  first  prayer 

Asuba  Dawn 

Gari  ya  waye  Dawn 

Sasafe  Very  early  morning 

Safe  Morning  (generally) 

Hantsi  About  8  a.m. 

Walaha  About  10  a.m. 

Rana  Day  time  generally 

Rana  tsaka  Midday,  noon 

Zowall  Time  soon  after  midday 

Azuhur  About  2  p.m. 

Laasar  About  5  p.m. 

Maguriba  Evening 

Mareche  Evening 

Lisha  About  7  p.m.,  just  after  sunset 

Fadua-r-rana  Sunset 

Dere  Night 

Tsaka-n-dere  Midnight 

Kwana  Sleep.      A  day  of  24  hours 

Verbs :  etc.,  used  idiomatically 
Che 

Akache  da  shi  It  was  called  a  ... 

Yache  da  su  He  said  to  them 

Chika 

Chika  bindiga  Load  a  gun 

Wotsika  ya  chika  The  letter  is  finished 

Chika  mini  alkaweli  Fulfil  your  promise  to  me 

Chi 

Chi  gari  Conquer  the  country 

Chi  kasua  To  market 

Anachin  kasua  Market  is  on 

Kasua  ta  clii  „ 

Fataki  sun  chi  riba  The  merchants  made  a  profit 

Na  chi  /  take  it  (in  gambling)  or  /  win 

Ku  chi  gaba  kadan  Go  a  little  in  front 

Chi  sarota  Succeed  to  the  sovereignty 

Chi  lafia  To  get  into  safety  :   enjoy  peace 

Chi  a  ma  na  Misappropriate  a  trust.     Lit.,  Eat 

a  pledge 

Chi  lava  Swear  on  the  Koran 

Chi  ado  Adorn  oneself 


COMMON   IDIOMATIC    EXPRESSIONS        223 

Da  (summary  of  various  meanings) 

Da  Eelative  pronoun,  short  of  "  wanda  " 

Da  Son 

Da  Native  of,  as  in  "  da-n-Kano  " 

Da  Diminutive,  as  "  da-n-zane,"  a  piece  of  cloth  ;  "  da-n- 

kasua,"  a  little  market  ;  "  da-n-tumkia,"  lamb 

Da  Freeborn 

Da  And 

Da  Of  old,  formerly 

Da  With 

Da  When  (  =  saanda) 

Da  ...  da      Had  I  ...   I  should  (not) 

Da  Than 

Dama 

Hanu-n-dama  Eight  hand 

Da  da  ma  A  little  more 

Ya  yi  da  ma  It  were  better 

Da  dama  dama  Moderately 

Na  ji  dama  kadan  I  feel  a  little  better 

Gobe  ina  zua  idan  na  samu  dama  I  shall  come  to-morrow  if  I  get  the 

chance 

Ka  yi  abinda  ka  ga  dama  Do  whatever  you  think  best 

Ba  ni  da  dama  /  have  no  time  to  .  .  . 

Dama  mun  so  zua  birni  bale  sariki  We  wished  all  the  more  to  go  to  the 

ya  aiko  city  now  that  the  chief  sent  for  us 

Ka  ji  dama  ya  fi  jia  ?  Do  you  feel  better  than  yesterday  ? 

Da  ni  talaka  ne,  yanzu  na  samu  Formerly   I  was  poor,  now   I  am 

dukia  da  dama  better  off 

Damre  (daure) 

Daura  kuka  liaise  a  cry 

Daura  ido  Frown 

Daura  gudu  Take  up  running 

Daura  magana  Keep  one's  word 

Dau,  do=dauka.    Mostly  used  in  Poetry 

Dau  Allah,  dau  Anabi  !  By  God  and  the  Prophet  ! 

Wajib  mu  do  hayasu  (  =  hainya)  We  must  take  their  road 

Kai,  carry 

Ba  -Iii  ka i  ba  It  will  not  do 

Ba  shi  kai  hakanan  ba  This  will  not  do 

Jibi  mua  kai  gida  The  day  after  to-morrow  we  shall 

get  home 
Allah  ya  worike  cbiniyansa  ta  kai     God    cured  his  thigh,  it    became 

all  right 


224 


THE    HAUSA   LANGUAGE 


Kowa   ya    nomi   hatsi   (ya)    kai 
baba-n-gari  (poet.) 

Gobe  da  safe  na  kaika  wurinda 

suna  bi  suna  yawo 


Every  one  who  sows  corn  (i.e.,  good 

deeds)  reaches    the    great    city 

(heaven) 
To-morrow  I  will  take  you  to  the 

place  which  they  went  to  to  take 

a  walk 


("  Kai  "  does  not  necessarily  mean  to  actually  carry) 


Enna  rana  ta  kai  kana  rau  kai 
Kano  ?     Zata  kai  chan 

Suka  iske  gulbi,  ya  kawo 
rua  achikin  daji 


Where  will  the  sun  be  when  we 
reach  Kano  ?  It  will  be  there 

They  came  to  a  water  course  in  the 
bush,  it  had  water  in  it 


Kara 


Ina  kara  daia 

Ban  kara  ba  zakua 

Ba  ya  kara  ba  chewa 

Aikinsu  zaakarasu 

Sun  che  jirigi-n-kasan  ba  shi  kara 

tafowa  daga  Iku 
Allahu  shi  kara  maka  alberka 

Zaki  ya  yi  kuka  so-daia,  ba  shi 

kara  ba,  ya  mutu 
Ba  shi  kara  ganinsa 
Ba  ya  kara  tashi  ba  bar  .  .  . 
Ba  ta  kara  koma  garesa 


/  add  one 

I  shall  not  come  again 

He  said  no  more 

Their  work  shall  be  increased 

They  said  the  train  shall  not  come 

again  from  Lagos 
May  God  increase  his  blessing  on 

you 
The  lion  cried  once,  he  did  not  do 

so  again,  he  died 
He  saw  him  no  more 
He  did  not  get  up  again  until  .  .  . 
She  did  not  return  to  him  again 


NOTE. — The  noun  form  of  the  verb  is  required  after  "  kara." 


Mai  da 


Ma  maida  kansa 
Ya  maida  kamna  gareta 
Ya  mayesda  magana 
Suka  mayar  (  =  mayas)  da  mag- 
ana, suka  che  masu 
Ka  mayes 
Ina  mayesda  wane 
Ya  maishe  shi 
Yungwa  ta  ke  maida  yaro  tsofo 


He  professes 
He  liked  him 
He  answered 
They  replied  and  said  to  them 

Bring  (it)  back 

I  became  like  so-and-so 

He  transformed  him 

Hunger  turns  a  boy  into  an  old 


Sha 


Sha  hiska 
Sha  enua 
Sha  wohalla 
Sha  taba 


Take  the  air 
Enjoy  the  shade 
Get  into  trouble 
Smoke  tobacco 


COMMON   IDIOMATIC    EXPRESSIONS        225 


Sa 


Ya  sa  masu  wuta 
Na  sa  ka  dilalina 
Ni  sashi  tafi  chikin  jirigi,  koda 

shi  yerda  ko  ba  yerda  ba 
Shi  ya  sa  na  tashi 
Sa  kasa 

Ya  sashi  chikin  sanfo 
Na  sa  wando  baki 
Sariki  ya  sa  akadaura  doki  surdi 


He  set  fire  to  them 

I  make  you  my  agent 

I  will  make  him  get  into  the  boat 

whether  he  is  willing  or  not 
He  made  me  get  up 
Put  it  down 

He  placed  it  in  the  basket 
I  wore  black  trousers 
The  chief  made  them  saddle  the 

horse 


NOTE. — "  Sa  "   has   a    causative  force   which   may  be  translated  in 
English  "  make  "  or  "  do."     "   Ti  "  is  not  used  in  this  sense. 


Hainya  ta  samu  There  is  a  road 

Na  samu  lafia  7  am  better 

Har  su  samu  amsa  Until  they  reply 

Na  samesa  shina  karatu  wotikanka  I  found  him  writing  your  letter 

Saura 
This  is  a  noun  meaning  "  remainder,"  "  rest." 


Ya  yi  saura  kadan 

I,  saura  igia  biu  adamre 

Da  matansa  saura  shi  daia 


There  is  a  little  left 

Yes,  it  still  wants  two  ropes  to  tie 

them 
And  of  his  wives  there  was  only 

left  one  to  him 

Ba  sauran  kwanaki  dayawa  nan      In  not  many  days'  time 
gaba  ba 

Various  uses  of  "  Yi,"  do,  make. 

Some  of  its  uses  are  very  idiomatic.     One  variation  of 
form  is  found — namely,  "  yiwu." 


Independent 


Na  yi 

Na  yi 

Suna  fada  da  juna  ?     Sun  a  yi 

Ku  yi  ta  yi 
Mu  yi  ta  yi 
Ku  yi  ta  tafia 
Kaka  zaka  yi  ? 
Kamada  shi  kc  yi 
Rana  ta  yi 


7  did  it 

He  did  it  or  it  will  do,  it  is 
satisfactory 

Are  they  fighting  amongst  them- 
selves ?  They  are 

Go  on  with  what  you  are  doing 

We  will  get  to  work 

Oo  on 

How  will  you  manage  ? 

How  it  is  done 

It  is  daylight 


226  THE    HAUSA   LANGUAGE 

\\'lth  Direct  Object 

Na  yi  shi  /  have  done  it 

Mun  yi  shi  da  kasa  We  made  it  of  earth 

Kana  yi  magana  Hausa  ?  Do  you  speak  Hausa  ? 

Mun  yi  abuta  da  ni  da  shi  He  and   I  have  become  friends 

Har  ya  yi  sainyi  Until  it  gets  cool 

"  Yi "  joined  with  nouns  is  often  translatable  by  a 
single  verb  in  English,  as — 

Yi  magana  to  speak 

Yi  zanche  to  converse 

Yi  aiki  to  work 

Yi  munafiki  to  deceive 

Yi  godia,  to  thank 

Yi  tafia  to  journey 

Yi  girima  to  grow 

Yi  alheri  to  rejoice 

Yi  sata  to  steal 

All  of  these  phrases  take  indirect  objects  with  preposi- 
tions. The  indirect  object  is  placed  between  "  yi "  and 
the  noun  it  is  attached  to  if  the  preposition  in  question 
is  "ma,"  to,  but  after  if  the  preposition  is  "da,"  with. 

Without    Indirect  Object 

Zuchiana  ya  yi  fari  My  heart  rejoiced 

Zua  mutua  Ahmadu  ya  yi  sariki  On    the    death    of     Ahmadu    he 

became  king 

Ya  yi  girima  He  has  grown  up 

Ya  yi  arziki  It  is  fortunate 

Ya  yi  keao  It  is  good  :  that  is  all  right 

Ya  yi  nauyi  It  is  heavy 

Yaro  ya  yi  kama-n-uwansa  The  boy  is  like  his  mother 

Ya  yi  karatu  wonga  wochika  He  wrote  this  letter  (double  object) 

With  Indirect  Object 
Ma 

Ya  yi  mani  munafiki  He    cheated    (betrayed,    deceived) 

me 

Na  yi  masa  alheri  /  treated  him  kindly 

Ya  yi  mani  alkawali  He  made  me  a  promise 

Sun  yi  masa  sata  They  stole  from  him 

Sariki  ya  yi  masa  kaliye  The  king  gave  him  an  order 

Ya  yi  mani  gudumawa  He  came  to  my  help 


COMMON    IDIOMATIC   EXPRESSIONS        227 

Giwa,   anyi   mata   rauni  a  kafa      The  elephant  was  only  wounded  in 

guda  one  leg 

Karia  ka  ke  yi  mani  You  are  lying  to  me 

Ya  yi  mani  takarda  He  wrote  me  a  letter 

Kada  ka  yi  mani  karia  Do  not  lie  to  me 

Da 
Ku  yi  magana  da  su  Talk  to  them 

Na 

Ya  yi  mantuwa-r-suna-n-da  He  forgot  the  name  that  the  hare 

zomo  ya  fada  masa  told  him 

"   Yi  "with  Nouns  used  as  Prepositions  and  Adverbs 

Ku  yi  kusa  Come  near 

Ya  yi  nisa  It  is  far 

With  adverbs 

Yi  massa  Make  haste  or  do  it  quickly 

"   Yi  "  with  Expressions  of  Time 

Lokachi  ya  yi  mu  tashi  It  is  time,  let  us  start 

Da  rana  ta  yi  ya  mutu  When  it  was  daylight  he  died 

Shekarunsa  nawa  ?  ya  yi  shekara     How  old  is  he  ?      He  is  five.      Oh 

bial.     Aa,  ba  ya  yi  ba  no,  he  is  not 

Rana  ta  yi  It  is  daylight 

Ya  yi  shekara  biu  It  is  two  years 

Ka  yi  rana  You  are  late 

Ya  yi  kwana  bokoi  A  week  passed 

"  Yi  "  with  the  sense  of  "  too  much  " 

Ya  yi  mani  yawa  They  are  too  many  for  me 

Rafi  nan  ya  yi  masa  fadi  That  river  is  too  broad  for  it 

Riga  nan  ta  yi  mani  kadan  (or  The  coat  is  too  small  for  me 

karami) 

Gidanga  ya  yi  kankane  This  house  is  small  (or  too  small) 

Kun  yi  yawa  You  were  very  many 

Miscellaneous 

Zuchiansa  ya  yi  biu  Doubt  was  in  his  heart 

Yi  itache  Cut  or  get  firewood 

Wannan  ya  yi  wanchan  This  equals  that 

Anayi  da  shi  He  is  being  set  upon 

Beri  kashi  chikin  chiki  ba  shi  yi  To  leave  excrement  in  the  belly  is 

maganin  yungwa  (prov.)  not  food  for  hunger 

Funtu    ya    yi    darial    maitsuma  The    naked    man    laughs    at    the 

(prov.)  ragged  man 


228  THE    HAUSA    LANGUAGE 

Example  of  the  Form  "  yiwu  " 
Ta'ala  da  ya  yiwota  The  exalted  one  who  made  it 

"  Yi "  takes  what  seems  to  be  the  suffix  "  da "  (see 
derived  verbs,  class  5)  in  the  sharpened  form  "  ta."  If 
this  etymology  be  correct,  it  is  not  in  accordance  with  the 
common  phonetic  rules  of  the  language. 

Ku  yita  yi  Go  on  with  what  you  are  doing 

Ku  yita  tafia  !  March  ! 

Ku  yita  tuba  !  Repent  I 

Yita  aiki  Accomplish  the  work 

Ku  yita  kanku  Do  that  which  appertains  to  you 

or  do  as  you  like 

In  Sokoto,  Zanfara,  and  Katsina  "wo"  is  commonly 
used  for  "yi,"  as  "wo  takarda,"  send  a  letter;  "wo 
yaki,"  wage  war. 

Examples  of  Circumlocution 

Sariki  ya  rassu  The  chief  is  dead 

but,  Doki  ya  mutu  The  horse  is  dead 

Abokina  ba  shi  da  lafia  My  friend  is  ill 

Wazirin  Sokoto  ba  ya  gani  yanzu  The  vizier  of  Sokoto  is  blind 

Abokina  ba  shi  da  kafa  My  friend  is  lame 

but,  Guragu  ne  In  speaking  of  a  horse  being  lame 

Kaka  iyalinka  ?  How  is  your  family  ?  (instead   of 

asking  after  a  man's  wife) 


BIBLIOGRAPHY 

SCHOEN,  J.   F. 

Vocabulary  of  the  Hausa  Language  and  Grammar  (1843). 

Grammar  of  the  Hausa  Language  (1862). 

Dictionary  of  the  Hausa  Language  (1876). 

Appendix  to  Dictionary  of  the  Hausa  Language  (1888). 

Magana  Hausa  (1885). 

ROBINSON,  C. 

Hausa  Language,  1st  edition  (1897). 
2nd  edition  (1909). 
Hausa  Dictionary,  1st  edition  (I.  1899  and  II.  1900). 

2nd  edition  (1906)  (Hausa-English  only) 
Specimen  of  Hausa  Literature  (1896). 

MILLER,  W.  R.     Hausa  Notes  (1901). 

MISCHLICH,  A.     Lehrbuch  der  hausanischeu  Sprache  (1902). 

Km. AH.  F.     Litati  na  tatsuniyoyi  na  Hausa  (1911). 

HARRIS,  H.     Hausa  Stories  (1907). 

CHARLTON,  L.     A  Hausa  Reading  Book  (1908). 


229 


Printed  at 

The  Edinburgh   Press 
9  and  II   Young  Street. 


FROM  KEG  AN  PAUL  <$  CO.'S  LIST 

A  Hausa  Grammar,  with  Exercises,  Readings,  and  Vocabu- 
laries. By  Rev.  Canon  CHARLES  H.  ROBINSON,  M.A., 
sometime  Lecturer  in  Hausa  in  the  University  of 
Cambridge,  and  Major  J.  ALDER  BURDON,  C.M.G.,  M.A., 
Resident  of  Sokoto  Province,  N.  Nigeria.  Fourth  Edition. 
Crown  8vo.  53.  net. 

Hausa  Proverbs,  including  Riddles  and  Common  Expressions, 
with  some  Grammatical  Notes.  By  Captain  G.  MERRICK, 
R.G.A.  Crown  8vo.  33.  6d.  net. 

English-Hausa  Vocabulary-  By  Captain  A.  H.  W.  HAYWOOD, 
R.A.  Second  and  Enlarged  Edition,  containing  nearly 
1,400  words  in  every-day  use.  F'cap  8vo.  Paper 
Cover.  2s.  net. 

A  Grammar  of  the  Angass  Language,  with  Vocabulary,  etc. 
By  Captain  H.  D.  FOULKES. 

Handbook  of  Modern  Arabic,  consisting  of  a  Grammar,  with 
numerous  Examples,  Dialogues,  and  Newspaper  Extracts, 
printed  in  roman  type.  By  FRANCIS  W.  NEWMAN, 
Emeritus  Professor,  University  College,  London. 
Crown  8vo.  6s. 

Grammar  of  the  Arabic  Language.  By  the  Rev.  R.  STERLING, 
M.A.  Printed  in  Arabic  and  Roman  types.  Demy 
8vo.  i2s.  net. 

Arabic  and  English  Idiom.  Conversational  and  Literary. 
A  companion  to  the  above.  Demy  8vo.  75.  net. 

Arabic  -  English  Dictionary.  By  H.  ANTHONY  SALMONE, 
Lecturer  at  University  College,  London.  Comprising 
about  120,000  Arabic  words,  with  English  Index  of 
about  50,000  words.  2  vols.  Large  Crown  8vo.  363. 

Comparative  Handbook  of  Congo  Languages.  A  comparative 
Grammar  of  the  eight  principal  languages  of  the  district, 
and  of  Swahili,  with  a  Vocabulary  of  800  words  with 
their  English  equivalents,  etc.  By  W.  HENRY  STAPLETON. 
Demy  8vo.  6s.  net. 

Grammar  of  the  Somali  Language.  By  Rev.  Fr.  E.  DE  LARA- 
JASSE  and  Ven.  Fr.  C.  DE  SAMPONT.  Crown  8vo.  123.  net. 

Somali- English  and  English  Somali  Dictionary.  By  Rev.  Fr. 
E.  DE  LARAJASSE.  Crown  8vo.  123.  net. 

Dictionary  of  the  Swahili  Language.  By  the  Rev.  Dr  L. 
KRAPF,  C.M.S.,  with  an  outline  of  the  Grammar. 
Med.  8vo.  305.  net. 


KEGAN  PAUL,  TRENCH,  TRUBNER  &  CO.,  LTD., 
BROADWAY  HOUSE,  68-74  CARTER  LANE,  LONDON,  E.C. 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY,  LOS  ANGELES 
EDUCATION  AND  PSYCHOLOGY  LIBRARY 

This  book  is  DUE  on  the  last  date  stamped  below. 


Form  L9-10m-9,'69(N1370s8)4939A — 3,  59 


University  of  Caklorria,  Los  Angeles 


L  005  462  915  9 


A 001  079  329     7